You are on page 1of 351

Control/Regulation C0

Control/Regulation

8 M 32 C

Engine No.: 38966 Record No.: 261096


38967
38968
38969

en / 19.04.2011 AA047729 1
Total Index C0.01

Control/Regulation C0
Total Index C0.01
Introduction Electrical Equipment C0.02
Table of contents C5.01

en / 19.04.2011 AA047685 1/1


Introduction C0.02
Electrical Equipment

M20-M601C

The structure of the contents ensures that you will find the required spares very quickly

Example: Electrical Equipment

Electrical engine equipment

C5.05.05 nn.nn.nn

Chapter 7
External Documentation

- These documents reflect your actual engine equipment and are, therefore, not compatible with other or
similar engine plants.

- Possible modifications or additions to the catalogue due to conversions will be carried out on request by
our customer service.

Ordering Spare Parts:


Please observe the following when ordering spare parts:

1. All spare parts orders must be placed with your dealer.

2. In case of multi-engine plants please do not place a collective order.

3. Each engine must be treated separately stating its respective engine No.
Please find attached the required enquiry/order sheets.

4. For reasons of order handling each order must contain the following data:

• P.O. number/Customer ref. No.


• Order date
• Forwarding address (telephone/fax number and person in charge)
• Date of delivery
• Required date of arrival (ETA)
• Marks, special instructions, e.g. complete delivery
• Ship’s name/plant
• Engine type
• Engine No.
• Shipping instruction, unless otherwise specified we will choose the cheapest method of
shipment, not prepaid ex works
• Drawing No. and sheet
• Part No.
• Catalogue sheet No.
• Description and measuring point No.
• Quantity
• Address on invoice, i.e. the complete address to which the invoice is to be made out

en / 07.04.2011 AA035841 1/7


Introduction C0.02
Electrical Equipment

M20-M601C

Procedure

Variant A

The damaged component with identification of measuring point must be identified on the engine or cable.

Exhaust thermocouple cylinder 1

Next to the plug a metal plate with identification of the measuring point is fitted. Additionally, the measu-
ring point number is identified on the cable of the plug-in connection.

Measuring point No. 8211.1

In the Electrical Equipment Engine C5.05.05.10.nn the component with stock


No. 273 450 450 is easily found by means of the measuring point No. 8211.1 .

en / 07.04.2011 AA035841 2/7


Introduction C0.02
Electrical Equipment

M20-M601C

Variant B

By means of the drawings Sensor - Actuators - Arrangement / Engine General View

Here as well measuring point 8211.1 can be found. Procedure as described above.

Example B1

8211.1 Thermocouple type K 273 450 450


...
8211.6

en / 07.04.2011 AA035841 3/7


Introduction C0.02
Electrical Equipment

M20-M601C

A relay can be clearly identified by means of the drawing Junction Box 1. In this example K9

In the Electrical Equipment Engine C5.05.05.10.nn the component with stock No. 213 480 770 is easily
found by means of component identification K9.

Example B2

K9 Attaching type relay 213 480 770

en / 07.04.2011 AA035841 4/7


Introduction C0.02
Electrical Equipment

M20-M601C

Variant C

With the electric documents Sensoric Level Sensor Junction Box 1 / Alarm System
Level probe B7301 Water min. Measuring point No. 7301.

In the Electrical Equipment Engine C5.05.05.10.nn the component with stock No. 213 483 072 is easily
found by means of the measuring point No.7301.

Example C

7301 Level probe 213 483 016

en / 07.04.2011 AA035841 5/7


Introduction C0.02
Electrical Equipment

M20-M601C

Variant D

Ordering a cable

If a cable has to be replaced, at least a measuring point or plug designation is to be safely identified.

By stating the engine number the part "cable loom" can be ordered.

en / 07.04.2011 AA035841 6/7


cvb2 Caterpillar Motoren GmbH & Co. KG

Anfrage/Ersatzteilbestellschein / Spare Parts Inquiry or Order Sheet


Auftrags-Nr,/Kunden-Referenz-Nr. Auftragsdatum
P.O. Number/Customer Ref. No. Order date

Käufer/Buyer Empfänger/Consignee
(postalisch einwandfreie Anschrift) (genaue Warenempfänger-Anschrift) Liefertermin Erforderlicher Ankunftstermin
exact postal address exact addressee of consignee Date of Delivery (voraussichtliche Ankunftszeit)
Date of required arrival (eta)

Markierung, spezielle Anweisungen, z. B. vollständige Lieferung


Marks, special instructions, e. g. complete delivery

Schiffsname/Anlage/Ship's name/Plant Motor-Typ/Engine Type Motor-Nr./Engine No. *) Versandart/Shipping Instructions

Bitte stets angeben Nur von Caterpillar auszufüllen


Pl i d O l b l db C ill
Pos. Sach-Nr. Zeichnungs-/Teile-Nr. Sach-Nr. Zeichnungs-/Teile-Nr. Benennung und Messstellennummer Menge
Item Stock No. Drawing/Part No. Stock No. Drawing/Part No. Description and Measuring Point No. Quantity
Beispiel für Bestellung Beispiel für Bestellung
As an illustration for ordering As an illustration for ordering
213 480 770 9-A-1081-83, Page 5 Attaching type relay 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*) Pro Einzelbestellschein nur eine Motor-Nr. angeben!
Please state only one engine no. on each spare parts order sheet! Rechtsverbindliche Unterschrift und Stempeldruck des Bestellers
Stamp and signed by buyer
Fordern Sie bitte rechtzeitig kostenlos neue Vordrucke zur Bestellung von Ersatzteilen an
44.17/11.06 Please forward your requirement of free-of-charge new order sheets in due time to us ..................................................................................................................................
Table of contents C5.01

Table of contents C5.01

Engine, measuring points C5.05.02


A List of Measuring Points C5.05.02.01.12.62

Engine, control C5.05.04


B VIKING 35 Propulsion Panel
Regulateurs Europa C5.05.04.20.21.18

Engine, regulation C5.05.05


C Three-position Controller
Console Mounting C5.05.05.09.16.01
D Electrical Equipment C5.05.05.10.30.30
E Circuit diagram Motor
Safety System C5.05.05.10.32.87
F Description
Description of the Safety System C5.05.05.10.50.84
G Description
FCT-Control C5.05.05.10.51.13
H Description
Engine Monitoring Devices C5.05.05.10.51.78
I Equipment List Safety System C5.05.05.10.62.65
J Equipment List Engine FCT-Control C5.05.05.10.63.48
K Equipment List Engine C5.05.05.10.63.89
L FCT-Control C5.05.05.10.69.01
M Maintenance Unit C5.05.05.45.23.02
N Maintenance Unit
Control Stand C5.05.05.45.23.03
O RPM Switch Unit C5.05.05.70.06.43
P Safety System
Description C5.05.05.70.15.34
Q Safety System
Description C5.05.05.70.15.62

en / 19.04.2011 AA020086 1/1


List of Measuring Points C5.05.02.01.12.62
-

M32

List of Measuring Points

en / 19.04.2011 FD045436 1/20


List of measuring points PART A page 1 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

The following example ahows how to read the list of measuring points:

section number:
1. Letter Designation 2. Letter Function 3. Letter Value
1 Shutdowns
P Pressure A Alarm H High
2 Load Reductions
PD Diff. pressure I Indication HH High
3 Startpumps / Functions
High
4 Safety Relevant Alarms
5 Alarms T Temperature L Low
6 Dicare / Indication Q Volume LL Low Low
Noris Channel and
S Switch
information about the
V Viscosity
scale
section G Position
L Level
1. Shutdowns
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-channel / Scale
no. finction supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value
Alarm 1 Alarm 2 remarks
action description delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2
(binary) (binary)
override (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

to be trigger
explanation if measuring points is suppressed value
overrideable when
MODbus addresses
kind of function delay time operation
(by alarm value
no. of measuring point system)

Note:
Suppressions and time delays as requested in the "list of measuring points" have to be executed inside the alarm system.
Anaolg signals for remote indicators have to be generated in the alarm system.
CM indicates that the DICARE software needs this measuring point for Condition Monitoring.
The Exhaust Gas Temperature Monitoring Diagramm is included in Part B of the measuring point list (part A = list of measuring point, part B = Exhaust Gas Tempersatur Diagram)

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 2 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

General explanations

Automatic speed reduction


If an automatic speed reduction is not possible due to the special conditions of the plant design
( shaft generator drive ), an automatic output reduction to approx. 30-40% of the CP propeller
The MaK wiring diagrams and installation documents must be observed for
power is permissible.
further handling of the monitoring equipment.
After this period ( approx. 4-5 min. ) the speed should be reduced manually, if the operating
When using pressure transformers and transmitters for luboil and fuel, an
situation permits such an action.
overpressure safety of two times rated pressure must be ensured on a
It is recommended to switch over from shaft generator operation to auxiliary engine operation via
warm engine.
a reduction prealarm ( output from the alarm system ).
All measuring points mentioned exist once per engine deviations are
indicated under „remarks“ for each measuring point.
In the case of multi-engine installation driving one CP propeller via a
combining gear, the total output of all engines of the installation will be automatically reduced to
Summery alarm after consulting with MaK.
approx. 40% of the rated output of one engine instead of the automatic speed reduction.
In parallel to this, the alarm and order will be activated to „reduce the speed“.
Automatic engine shut-down
After the reduction of the output, the engine that released the alarm will be declutched and its
The following operations must be carried out additional in the event of
speed reduced or stopped.
automatic shut down:
If the machinery spaces are unattended, the starting interlock of the engine
Safety Relevant Alarms:
must be activated.
For the following safety relevant alarms require special attention. These alarms should be marked
Main engine, reversible:
with text "Operator action is needed" in the alarm system:
The flywheel shaft brake must be automatically activated.
6105 (stopping air pressure at engine), 9611 (rpm switch failure),
Main engine, unidirectional:
9671 (trouble at safety system)
The clutch must be disengaged automatically. The CP propeller pitch
If one of these alarms appears, corrective action is required. Since a secure engine stop is no
must be automatically set to zero.
longer given a man needs to be stationed at the engines local control. Change over to manuel
For multi-engine installation with a combining gear and one propeller,
control and reduce engine load gradually. Stop engine when "0" load reached and investigate and
the respect. clutch must be autom. disengaged. rectify reason for alarm.

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 3 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

1. Shutdowns
1106 PALL 290 kPa 0..600 kPa
Schmieröldruck
shutdown 500 kPa binary
lub.oil pressure
yes

1163 PALL
Schmieröldruck Getriebe
shudown binary from gearbox (not CAT supply)
lub. Oil pressure gearbox
yes

1253 QAHH 2% 0,5..25 %


Ölnebelkonzentration im Kurbelraum 1 evaluation unit for
shutdown < 2% binary
oil mist concentration in crankcase 1251,/.1 ,/.2, 1253, 9631
yes

2103 PALL h) 0..600 kPa


Frischwasserdruck HT vor Motor
shutdown 20s >250 kPa binary h) 60kPa below operating value
fresh water pressure HT at engine inlet
yes

9404 SA 708 min-1 0..800 min-1


Überdrehzahl Motor
shutdown 600 min-1 binary
engine overspeed
no

9616 SA governor without mechanical back-up


Störung elektronischer Drehzahlregler (major error)
shutdown 1s binary 9616 = shut down,
trouble at electronic speed governor
no

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 4 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

2. Load Reductions
1166 PAL
Schmieröldruck Getriebe from gearbox (not CAT supply)
Load Reduction binary
lub. oil pressure gearbox incuded in meas.point 9639
yes

1203 TAHH 75 °C 0-200°C


Schmieröltemperatur vor Motor
Load Reduction 60 - 65 °C PT100
lub. Oil temp. at engine inlet
yes

1262 SA
Schmieröltemp. Getriebe from gearbox (not CAT supply)
Load Reduction binary
lub. Oil temp. Gearbox incuded in meas.point 9639
yes

1282 SA
Drucklagertemp. Getriebe from gearbox (not CAT supply)
Load Reduction binary
thrust bearing temp. Gearbox incuded in meas.point 9639
yes

2212 TAHH 98 °C 0-200°C


Frischwassertemp. HT nach Motor
Load Reduction 80 - 90 °C PT100
fresh water temp. HT at engine outlet
yes

8216 SA see 0..720 °C


Abgastemperatur Mittelwertabweichung Zyl. incuded in meas.point 8234
Load Reduction 16s diagram
deviation of mean average value reduct alarm cyl.
yes

8218 SA see 0..720 °C


Abgastemperatur Abweichung absolut Zyl. incuded in meas.point 8234
Load Reduction 16s diagram
exhaust gas temp. reduct alarm of each cyl. Absolut
yes

8224 SA Abgastemperatur nach Turbolader see 0..720 °C


incuded in meas.point 8234
Load Reduction exhaust gas temp. reduction alarm of 16s diagram
yes turbocharger outlet

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 5 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

8234 SA
common alarm exhaust gas temp. Monitoring common alarm
Load Reduction binary
load reduction included 8216, 8218, 8224 from alarm system
yes

9639 SA
common alarm gearbox common alarm
Load Reduction binary
load reduction included 1262, 1282, 1166 from gearbox to LESS
yes

3. Start Pumps / Functions


1104 PLL 350 kPa 0..600 kPa
Schmieröldruck
Start Pump 500 kPa binary
lub. Oil pressure fitted on engine

1142 PLL 20-40 kPa -90-150 kPa


Vorschmierdruck
Start interlock 500 kPa binary external sensor
pre lub. Oil pressure gearbox

1165 PAL
Schmieröldruck Getriebe
Start interlock binary from gearbox (not CAT supply)
lub. Oil pressure gearbox

2101 PLL h) 0..600 kPa


Frischwasserdruck HT vor Motor
Start Pump >250 kPa binary fitted on engine
fresh water pressure HT at engine inlet
h) 20 kPa below operating value

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 6 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

2111 PLL h) 0..600 kPa


Frischwasserdruck LT vor Motor
Start Pump >250 kPa binary fitted on engine
fresh water pressure LT at engine inlet
h) 20 kPa below operating value

5101 150kPa 0..600kPa


Kraftstoffdruck vor Motor
Start Pump 400kPa binary fitted on engine
fuel oil pressure at engine inlet

9401.1 S 420 min-1 0..800 min-1


Unterdrückung von Alarmen
Function 600 min-1 binary
suppression of alarms

9401.2 S 420 min-1 0..800 min-1


Frischwasser-Vorwärmer an-/abschalten
Function 600 min-1 binary hardwired to CW-preheating control
fresh water preheater switch on / off

9402 S 420 min-1 0..800 min-1


HM Reserveschmierölpumpe an-/abschalten
Start Pump 600 min-1 binary
ME lub. Oil stand-by pump switch on / off

NOT USED

9411 S 420 min-1 0..800 min-1


Getriebe Reserveschmierölpumpe an-/abschalten
Start Pump 600 min-1 binary
gearbox lub. Oil stand-by pump switch on/off

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 7 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

9532.1 GI 0-110%
Füllungssignal / Fuel Rack Position signal for CPP-load control
Function 4-20mA
fuel rack position hardwired to CPP

9532.2 GI 0-110% signal for exhaust gas system


Füllungssignal / Fuel Rack Position
Function 4-20mA hardwired to exhaust gas temp.
fuel rack position
system

9532.3 GI 0-110%
Füllungssignal / Fuel Rack Position signal for electronic governor
Function 0-10V
fuel rack position hardwired to electronic governor

9561 SI
Törnvorrichtung eingerückt
Start interlock binary
turning gear engaged

9581 SI
Propellersteigung / Kupplung eingerückt
Start interlock binary
propeller pitch / clucth enganged

4. Safety relevant Alarms


6105 SA 600 kPa 500..2000kPa channel: 01 43 / scale:
Abstellluftdruck am Motor operator action is needed /
Alarm 2s 750 kPa binary
stopping air pressure at engine 10048 13048 see description

9611 SA
Drehzahlschalter ausgefallen operator action is needed / see
Alarm 1s binary
rpm switch failure description

9671 SA
Störung Sicherheitsanlage operator action is needed / see
Alarm 1s binary
trouble at safety system description

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 8 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

9677 SA
Alarm Override activated 1s binary
has to be recorded by alarm system

5. Alarme
CM 1105 PAL 320 kPa 0..1000kPa channel: 01 21 / scale: 01
Schmieröldruck order to reduction
Alarm / Dicare 500 kPa 4-20 mA
lub. Oil pressure 30009 13009 analog / used for Alarm + Dicare

1112.1 PDAH 60 kPa 0..60 kPa channel: A01 12 / scale:


Schmieröldifferenzdruck am Automatikfilter
Alarm < 60 kPa binary filter fitted on engine
lub. Oil differential pressure automatic filter 10034 13034

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 9 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

1112.2 PDAH 80 kPa 0..80 kPa channel: A01 13 / scale:


Schmieröldifferenzdruck am Automatikfilter
Alarm < 80 kPa binary filter fitted on engine
lub. Oil differential pressure automatic filter 10035 13035

CM 1202 TAH 70 °C 0-200 °C channel: 01 22 / scale: 10


Schmieröltemperatur vor Motor
Alarm / Dicare 60 - 65 °C PT100 analog / used for Alarm + Dicare
lub. Oil temp. Engine inlet 30010 13010

1251 QAH 2% 0,5..25 % channel: 01 41 / scale:


Ölnebelkonzentration im Kurbelraum 1 evaluation unit for
Alarm < 2% binary
oil mist concentration in crankcase 10046 13046 1251,/.1 ,/.2, 1253, 9631

70% from
1251.1 QAH : 1 evaluation unit for
Ölnebelkonzentration im Kurbelraum - Vorlarm 1251
1251,/.1 ,/.2, 1253, 9631,
Pre-Alarm oil mist concentration in crankcase - prealarm < 2% binary hardwired to alarm system

CM 2102 PAL h) 0..1000 kPa channel: 01 23 / scale: 10


Frischwasserdruck HT vor Motor h) 40kPa below operation value
Alarm / Dicare >250 kPa 4-20 mA
fresh water pressure HT at engine inlet 30246 13246 analog / used for alarm + Dicare

2112 PAL h) 0..1000 kPa channel: 01 24 / scale: 10


Frischwasserdruck LT vor Motor h) 40kPa below operation value
Alarm >250 kPa 4-20 mA
fresh water pressure LT at engine inlet 30250 13250 analog / used for alarm + Dicare

CM 2201 TAL 60 °C 0-200°C channel: 01 25 / scale: 10


Frischwassertemp. HT vor Motor
Alarm / Dicare > 75°C PT100 analog / used for alarm + Dicare
fresh water temp. HT at engine inlet 30013 13013

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 10 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

CM 2211 TAH 93 °C 0-200°C channel: 01 26 / scale: 10


Frischwassertemp. HT nach Motor
Alarm / Dicare 80-90 °C PT100 analog / used for alarm + Dicare
fresh water temp. HT at engine outlet 30014 13014

2229 TAH 43 °C 0-200°C channel: 01 27 / scale: 10


Frischwassertemp. LT vor Ladeluftkühler
Alarm < 40°C PT100 anaolg
fresh water temp. LT at charge air cooler inlet 30015 13015

5102 PAL 100 kPa 0..1000 kPa channel: 01 65 / scale: 01


Kraftstoffdruck vor Motor
Alarm 400 kPa 4-20mA analog
fuel oil pressure at engine inlet 30021 13021

5111 PDAH 80 kPa 0..80 kPa channel: 01 14 / scale:


Kraftstoffdifferenzdruck am Doppelfilter
Alarm < 60 kPa binary
fuel oil differential pressure at double filter 10036 13036

5112 PDAH 50 kPa 0..80 kPa


Kraftstoffdifferenzdruck am Automatiklfilter extern / module
Alarm < 30 kPa binary
fuel oil differential pressure at automatic filter (yard or customer supplied)

CM 5201 TAL 35 °C 0-200°C channel: 01 36 / scale: 10


Kraftstofftemperatur vor Motor
Alarm 40-50 °C PT100 analog / used for alarm + Dicare
fuel oil temp. At engine inlet 30022 13022

5202 TAH 60 °C 0-200°C channel: 03 66 / scale: 10


Kraftstofftemperatur vor Motor analog / common alarm with 5201 /
Alarm 40-50 °C PT100
fuel oil temp. At engine inlet 30022 13022 5202 only with MDO

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 11 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

5301 LAH channel: 01 44 / scale:


Leckkraftstoffniveau am Motor
Alarm binary
leakage oil niveau at engine 10003 13003

6101 PAL 1250 kPa 0..6000 kPA channel: 01 48 / scale: 01


Anlaßluftdruck vor Motor
Alarm <3000kPa 4-20mA analog
starting air pressure at engine inlet 30032 13032

CM 7201 TAH 65 °C 0-200°C channel: 01 28 / scale: 10


Ladelufttemperatur vor Motor
Alarm / Dicare 45-60 °C PT100 analog / used for alarm + Dicare
charge air temp. At engine inlet 30016 13016

7301 QAH channel: 01 45 / scale:


Wasseranfall im Ladeluftkanal
Alarm binary
condense water in charge air canal 10004 13004

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 12 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

8211.1 TI <n-min see 0..720°C channel: 02 21 / scale: 01


Abgastemperatur nach Zylinder 1 analog (sensor value)
Exhaust gas 16s diagram NICr-Ni (mV)
exhaust gas temp. after cyl. 1 30073 13073 used for alarm + Dicare
monitoring / Dicare

8211.2 TI <n-min see 0..720°C channel: 02 22 / scale: 01


Abgastemperatur nach Zylinder 2 analog (sensor value)
Exhaust gas 16s diagram NICr-Ni (mV)
exhaust gas temp. after cyl. 2 30074 13074 used for alarm + Dicare
monitoring / Dicare

8211.3 TI <n-min see 0..720°C channel: 02 23 / scale: 01


Abgastemperatur nach Zylinder 3 analog (sensor value)
Exhaust gas 16s diagram NICr-Ni (mV)
exhaust gas temp. after cyl. 3 30075 13075 used for alarm + Dicare
monitoring / Dicare

8211.4 TI <n-min see 0..720°C channel: 02 24 / scale: 01


Abgastemperatur nach Zylinder 4 analog (sensor value)
Exhaust gas 16s diagram NICr-Ni (mV)
exhaust gas temp. after cyl. 4 30076 13076 used for alarm + Dicare
monitoring / Dicare

8211.5 TI <n-min see 0..720°C channel: 02 25 / scale: 01


Abgastemperatur nach Zylinder 5 analog (sensor value)
Exhaust gas 16s diagram NICr-Ni (mV)
exhaust gas temp. after cyl. 5 30077 13077 used for alarm + Dicare
monitoring / Dicare

8211.6 TI <n-min see 0..720°C channel: 02 26 / scale: 01


Abgastemperatur nach Zylinder 6 analog (sensor value)
Exhaust gas 16s diagram NICr-Ni (mV)
exhaust gas temp. after cyl. 6 30078 13078 used for alarm + Dicare
monitoring / Dicare

8211.7 TI <n-min see 0..720°C channel: 02 27 / scale: 01


Abgastemperatur nach Zylinder 7 analog (sensor value)
Exhaust gas 16s diagram NICr-Ni (mV)
exhaust gas temp. after cyl. 7 30079 13079 used for alarm + Dicare
monitoring / Dicare

8211.8 TI <n-min see 0..720°C channel: 02 28 / scale: 01


Abgastemperatur nach Zylinder 8 analog (sensor value)
Exhaust gas 16s diagram NICr-Ni (mV)
exhaust gas temp. after cyl. 8 30080 13080 used for alarm + Dicare
monitoring / Dicare

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 13 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

NOT USED not available in this project

8212.1 to
TAHH <n-min 0..720°C
8212.8 alarm from exhaust gas temp.
see
Abgastemperatur absolut nach Zylinder 1 bis 8 from exhaust System, has to be created in the
diagram
Alarm exhaust gas temp. Absolute after cyl. 1 to 8 16s gas temp. EGTS /
System see diagram

8213.1 to
TAHH <n-min 0..720°C
8213.8 alarm from exhaust gas temp.
Abgastemperatur Mittelwert nach Zylinder 1 bis 8 see
from exhaust System, has to be created in the
exhaust gas temp. Deviation from mean average diagram
Alarm 16s gas temp. EGTS /
cyl. 1 to 8
System see diagram

CM 8221 TAHH <n-min see 0..720°C channel: 02 32 / scale: 01


Abgastemperatur nach Turbolader
Alarm / Dicare 16s diagram NiCrNi (mV) analog / used for alarm + dicare
exhaust gas temp. At turbocharger outlet 30082 13082

CM 8231 TAH see 0..720°C channel: 02 33 / scale: 01


Abgastemperatur vor Turbolader
Alarm diagram NiCrNi (mV) analog / used for alarm + dicare
exhaust gas temp. At turbocharger inlet 30083 13083

R1 -40°C-120°C channel: 02 36 / scale: 01


temperature compensation temperature compensation
Temperature PT100
exhaust gas temp. 30086 13086 exhaust gas temp.
compensation

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 14 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

9406 SA
Abschalter der Schmierölreservepumpe
Alarm 1s binary NC-contact
switch off lub. Oil stand-by pump
extern (yard supply)

9507 SA
Alarmunterdrückung 7201 + 2229
Alarm binary hardwired to alarm system
alarm suppression 7201 + 2229

9602 SA channel: 02 15 / scale:


N3000 CAN Bus Fehler - Alarm hardwired to alarm system
Alarm binary
N3000 CAN bus failure alarm 10005

9615 SA
Störung elektronischer Drehzahlregler (minor alarm) hardwired to alarm system
Alarm 1s binary
trouble at electronic speed governor (minor alarm) from RE cabinet

governor without mechanical back-up


9616 = shut down,
see page 3

9627 SA
Ausfall FCT Steuerung hardwired to alarm system
Alarm 1s binary
FCT control failure external from FCT control box

9631 SA channel: 01 42 / scale:


Störung Kurbelraumüberwachungsgerät 1 evaluation unit for
Alarm 1s binary
oil mist detector failure 10047 13047 1251,/.1 ,/.2, 1253, 9631

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 15 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

9751.1 SA
Spannungsausfall am Ladelufttemperaturregler NC-contact / extern
Alarm 1s binary
voltage fail at charge air temp. Controller hardwired to alarm system

9771 SA
Spannungsausfall am Frischwasservorwärmgerät NC-contact / extern
Alarm 1s binary
freah water prheater voltage failur hardwired to alarm system

9836.1 SA channel: 01 17 / scale:


Sensor / Isolationsfehler A01 - Alarm hardwired to alarm system
Alarm binary
sensor / isolation fault A01 - alarm 10107

9836.2 SA channel: 02 17 / scale:


Sensor / Isolationsfehler A03 - Alarm hardwired to alarm system
Alarm binary
sensor / isolation fault A03 - alarm 10007

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 16 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

9962.1 SA channel: 01 18 / scale:


Sammelalarm A01 -Alarm
Alarm binary hardwired to alarm system
common alarm A01 -alarm 30108

9962.2 SA channel: 02 18 / scale:


Sammelalarm A03 -Alarm hardwired to alarm system
Alarm binary
common alarm A03 -alarm 30008

6. DICARE and INDICATIONS


1251.2 QAHH 0-100% analog / hardwired to alarm system
Ölnebelkonzentration im Kurbelraum
Indication < 2% 4-20mA 1 evaluation unit for
oil mist concentration in crankcase
1251,/.1 ,/.2, 1253, 9631

CM 6181 PI 80..120 kPa channel: 01 33 / scale: 01


Ansaugluftdruck im Maschinenraum analog
DICARE 4-20 mA
intake air pressure in engine room 30019 13019 used for DICARE

CM 7109 PI 0..600 kPa channel: 01 31 / scale: 10 analog


Ladeluftfruck vor Motor
DICARE / Indication 4-20 mA used for DICARE and FCT-control
charge air pressure at engine inlet 30248 13248
indication in alarm system

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 17 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

CM 7206 TI 65°C 0-200°C channel: 01 34 / scale: 10


Ladelufttemperatur vor Turbolader analog
DICARE 45-60°C PT100
intake air temperature at turbocharger inlet 30020 13020 used for DICARE

CM 7307 PD 0..10 kPa channel: 01 32 / scale: 100


Ladeluftdifferenzdruck am Ladeluftkühler analog
DICARE < 10 kPa 4-20 mA
charge air differential pressure at charge air cooler 30018 13018 used for DICARE

CM 7309 TI 0..720°C channel: 02 37 / scale: 01 analog


Ladelufttemperatur vor Ladeluftkühler
DICARE / Indication NiCrNi (mV) used for DICARE
charge air temp. At charge air cooler inlet 30087 13087
indication in alarm system

CM 9409 SI 420 min-1 0..800 min-1


Betriebsstunden Motor unsed for DICARE and
DICARE / Indication 600 min-1 binary
working our meter engine operating hour meter

CM 9419 NI 0..800 min-1 channel: 02 43 / scale: 01 analog


Motordrehzahl
DICARE / Indication 600 min-1 4-20mA / 4-20mA for CPP system /
engine speed 30050 13050
0-10V 0-10V for indicators

0..40000
CM 9429 NI channel: 01 38 / scale: 100
min-1 analog
Turboladerdrehzahl
<33780 used for FCT-control (4-20mA)
DICARE / Indication turbocharger speed 4-20mA /
min-1 30043 13043 and Indication (0-10V)
0-10V

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PART A page 18 / 18
c for main engine 8M32C
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH Co .KG
MOD bus information: generally
Measuring point information
Noris-Channel / Scale
no. function supp. trigger sensor range Sensor- Fade Value Value Bemerkungen
Beschreibung Alarm 1 Alarm 2
action delay normal signal range Value failure Out Limit 1 Limit 2 remarks
description (binary) (binary)
overridetable yes/no (binary) (binary) (analog) (analog)

CM 9509 GI 0-110 % channel: 01 47 / scale: 10


DICARE / Indication / Füllungssignal / Fuel Rack Position used for Dicare / +EGTS
+EGTS fuel rack position 30031 13031 indication in alarm system

9531 SI 0..110 %
Motorbelastung zu groß contact closed at > 100 % at n_rated
Indication binary
engine overload at rated speed hardwired to CPP system

Revision: 1-1 list of measuring points Date of creation


Changes: 8211.7/8 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Date: 25.05.2010
Date: 13.09.2010 Bearb.: Beh
Name: Order no. 261 096 Gepr. : Beh
List of measuring points PARTB Exhaust Gas Temperature Monitoring page 1/1
Caterpillar Motoren GmbH & Co.KG

Exhaust G as E n g in e g ro u p 1
T e m p . (°C )
REDUCT. 570 8 2 3 1 a b s o lu te a la rm tu rb o c h a rg e r in le t 570
ZONE REDUCT.
8216 8 2 1 8 a b s o lu te re d u c tio n e a c h c ylin d e r ZONE
8 2 1 6 d e via tio n o f m e a n va lu e (+ 1 0 0 °C ) 8216
520 8 2 1 2 a b s o lu te a la rm e a c h c ylin d e r 520
8 2 1 3 d e via tio n o f m e a n va lu e (+ 8 0 °C )
8 2 1 6 d e via tio n o f m e a n va lu e (+ 8 0 °C )
ALAR M
8 2 1 3 d e via tio n o f m e a n va lu e (+ 6 0 °C )
ZONE 470 8 2 2 4 re d u c tio n a la rm 470 ALAR M
8213 8 2 2 1 a la rm tu rb o - tu rb o c h a rg e r o u tle t ZONE
c h a rg e r o u tle t 8213
420 AVERAG E VALUE
420 420
420
ALAR M
ALAR M ZONE
ZONE 8213
8213 370 8 2 1 3 d e via tio n o f m e a n va lu e (- 6 0 °C ) 370
8 2 1 3 d e via tio n o f m e a n va lu e (- 8 0 °C )

8 2 1 6 d e via tio n o f m e a n va lu e (- 8 0 °C )
320 8 2 1 6 d e v ia tio n o f m e a n v a lu e (- 1 0 0 °C )
320 REDUCT.
ZONE
REDUCT.
8216
ZONE
8216 270 270

220 220

170 170
25 50 75 100
E n g in e P o w e r (% )

No. E x h a u s t g a s te m p e ra tu re s e n g in e p o w e r 2 5 % e n g in e p o w e r 1 0 0 %
8212 a la rm o f e a c h c yl. A b s o lu te 510 °C 510 °C
8213 d e v ia tio n o f m e a n a ve ra g e v a lu e a la rm (c yl.) 3 4 0 °C / 5 0 0 °C 3 6 0 °C / 4 8 0 °C
8216 d e v ia tio n o f m e a n a ve ra g e v a lu e re d u c t. a la rm (c yl.) 3 2 0 °C / 5 2 0 °C 3 4 0 °C / 5 0 0 °C
8218 re d u c tio n a la rm o f e a c h c yl. A b s o lu te 530 °C 530 °C
8221 a la rm o f tu rb o c h a rg e r o u tle t 510 °C 400 °C
8224 re d u c tio n a la rm o f tu rb o c h a rg e r o u tle t 530 °C 430 °C
8231 a la rm o f tu rb o c h a rg e r in le t 550 °C 570 °C

N o te :T h e e xh a u s t g a s te m p e ra tu re s a t e a c h c ylin d e r o u tle t h a ve to b e m o n ito re d in th e a la rm s ys te m . T h e lim it v a lu e s fo r th e m a x. a n d m in . te m p e ra tu re s d e p e n d s o n th e e n g in e s lo a d . T h e te m p e ra tu re s fo r


1 0 0 % lo a d a n d fo r 4 0 % lo a d h a v e to b e a d ju s te d d u rin g c o m m is s io n in g . T h e re fo re th e a la rm s ys te m h a s to b e c a p a b le o f a d ju s tin g th e s e s e tp o in ts a n d th e te m p e ra tu re s p re a d . T h e a b s o lu te m a x. te m p e ra tu re a t
c y lin d e r o u tle t is 5 3 0 °C , a fte r tu rb o c h a rg e r it is 5 3 0 °C . In th e c a s e th a t o n e o r m o re o f th e s e te m p e ra tu re s e xc e e d th e ir lim it va lu e s a b in a ry N O -c o n ta c t fro m th e a la rm s ys te m h a s to b e g ive n to th e e n g in e s
s a fe ty s ys te m .

list of measuring points PART B 1.00.1-09.64.00-13 Order no. 261 096 Date: 30.06.2010
Rev.: 0
VIKING 35 Propulsion Panel C5.05.04.20.21.18
Regulateurs Europa

VIKING 35 Propulsion Panel

Regulateurs Europa

en / 04.01.2011 FD044873 1/145


VIKING 35
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

SOFTWARE J0001 – 001


PROPULSION PANEL
CATERPILLAR

Regulateurs Europa B.V. ©2010


FOREWORD

These instructions have been compiled to assist personnel responsible for the operation and
maintenance of equipment manufactured by Regulateurs Europa.
Care has been taken to ensure that the equipment has been accurately represented, but it
should be appreciated that, with the continued progress of design and the diversity of
application, certain items may differ in detail.
It should be noted that these instructions are issued for general information.
Whilst reserving the right to make any alteration in design which they may consider
advisable, the manufacturers absolve themselves from making any such alteration
retrospective.
In addition to the information given herein, practical advice and assistance are always
available from our Service Department.

Regulateurs Europa B.V.


PO Box 28,

9300AA Roden,

Netherlands

Tel: +31 505019888

Fax: +31 505013618


E-mail: regulateurs@regulateurs-europa.com
Software Initial Release:J0001/001 Date: 05/11/2008
Software Release:

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION & TEST SPECIFICATION FOR VIKING 25

Test Equipment Per Viking

i) Switch box to simulate digital inputs.


ii) Lamp box to simulate digital outputs.
iii) 4-20mA current source to simulate analogue inputs.
iv) Signal generator to simulate speed pickup inputs.
v) Engine simulator for testing closed loop operation of system.
vi) 0-1A meter to measure actuator output.
vii) Multimeter, oscilloscope.
viii) Chart recorder.
ix) Dummy actuator coil.
x) Display board.
xi) PC with PC interface program and CCF document.
xii) CANalyzer CANbus simulation equipment and script/database files.
xiii) CAN-Ace protocol document (for CANbus loadsharing communications)

ER509/890
Page 1 of 142
1. OVERVIEW OF SYSTEM

The controller has the following basic functions:

a) Selection of engine type via Viking Vision menu.

b) Editing of engine types via Viking Vision menu.

c) Speed measuring by high or low frequency speed pickups.

d) The teeth/markers per revolution being automatically set up on engine type selection.

e) Six sets of dynamics selected on speed pickup in use and digital inputs.

f) Detection of speed pickup faults.

g) Override to slave speed pickup via menu item.

h) Actuator wire break monitoring.

i) Analogue and digital speed setting modes

j) Four-slope programmable speed ramp.

k) Three load variable gain functions applied to any combination of the proportional,
integral and derivative terms.

l) Three speed variable gain functions applied to any combination of the proportional,
integral and derivative terms.

m) Four torque fuel limit functions.

n) Isochronous and droop load sharing.

o) Load balance offset analogue input to create a difference in KW Load between the two
main engines.

p) Two engine speed analogue outputs 4-20 mA.

q) Combination of analogue outputs supporting pitch control functionality

r) KWatt command analogue output 4-20 mA to allow loadsharing with auxiliary engines.

s) Menu selection of pickups in use.

t) Start Fuel Control

u) Three speed level and two load level digital outputs with adjustable hysteresis.

ER509/890
Page 2 of 142
2. CALIBRATION

On start up a ‘Use CCF Parameters’ and a Save will need to be carried out to set all the preset
menu parameters. The save must be performed without pickup signals being present. The
Viking will need to be powered off and on after the save to use all of the parameters correctly.

ER509/890
Page 3 of 142
3. INPUTS

3.1 Dedicated Inputs

a) Nominal 24VDC power supply.

b) Speed pickup inputs PH1 (master) and PH2 (slave).

3.2 Analogue Inputs

DIGITAL IP DIGITAL IP
CHANNEL DESCRIPTION
‘ON’ ‘OFF’
1 Combinator speed setting 1
2 Combinator speed setting 2
3 Fi-Fi speed setting
4 Boost pressure
5 Start air pressure
6 Fuel rack position
7 kW load
8 Load balance offset

3.2.1 Calibration Input

To get correct input after configuring each channel, the calibration for each channel are needed.
Following are steps to calibrate each channel

1) Input 4mA (if input channel configure to current) or 0V (if input channel configure to
current) to channel x.
2) Go to Display menu Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A > Raw Value
and read the value from channel x.
3) Go to Edit menu Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A > Calibration >
Current if input is current or Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A >
Calibration > Voltage > 0-5V / 0-10V if input is voltage and type read value into
items Raw Value x 4mA or Raw Value x 0V.
4) Input 20mA (if input channel configure to current) or 5V /10V (if input channel
configure to current) to channel x.
5) Go to Display menu Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A > Raw Value of
Display menu and read the value from channel x
6) Go to Edit menu Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A > Calibration >
Current if input is current or Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A >
Calibration > Voltage > 0-5V / 0-10V if input is voltage and type read value into
items Raw Value x 20mA or Raw Value x 5V / Raw Value x 10V.
7) Repeat steps 1 to 6 for all 8 channels.
8) Go to Configuration > General of Edit menu and highlight ‘Save All Edited Data’ by
click second column (‘Value’ column) of ‘Save All Edited Data’.
9) Press ‘Save’ button

The red LED will light up. The calibration data will be saved after red LED turned off. If red LED
does not turn on repeat step 3 and 4.

Note: x is channel number.

3.2.2 Set Up Transducer Fail Check

The analogue input sensor healthy status can be checked by selecting appropriate status in A x
TX Check Status (in Edit menu Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A >TX Fail Range

ER509/890
Page 4 of 142
> Current if input is current or Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A >TX Fail Range >
Voltage > 0-5V / 0-10V if input is voltage). There are 4 choice

Disable Both : Disable input sensor healthy status check.


Check Low : Check input sensor fail on low value only.
Check High : Check input sensor fail on high value only.
Enable Both : Check input sensor fail on both high and low value.

Note : 1) ‘Check input sensor fail on high value’ means that channel x TX fault will be
reported if input value is above Ax Check High (in Edit menu Hardware >
Analogue > Inputs > Channel A >TX Fail Range > Current if input is current or
Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A >TX Fail Range > Voltage > 0-5V /
0-10V if input is voltage).
2) ‘Check input sensor fail on high value’ means that channel x TX fault will be
reported if input value is below Ax Check High (in Edit menu Hardware >
Analogue > Inputs > Channel A >TX Fail Range > Current if input is current or
Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A >TX Fail Range > Voltage > 0-5V /
0-10V if input is voltage).

3.2.3 Display

The Hardware > Analogue > Inputs >Channel A>Raw Value menu provide permanent
display of the analogue input raw value. The Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Current Scaled
Value and Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Current Measured Value menu provide
permanent display of the analogue input scaled and measured value in real world unit according
to the appropriate calibration data in Edit menu.

These values are unaffected by user forced values (via the Edit menu) or software forced values
(under transducer failed conditions) and as such may not represent the parameter values
currently being processed by the application software.

The parameter values currently being processed by the application software are displayed in
Hardware > Analogue > Inputs >Channel A> Scaled Value or within the appropriate areas of
the Display menu, as described elsewhere in this manual.

3.3 Standard Digital Inputs 1 to 16

CHANNEL ‘ON’ FUNCTION ‘OFF’ FUNCTION


1 Main supply healthy
2 Standby supply healthy
3 Fault reset (pulse)
4 Twin unit: Viking healthy
5 Twin unit: CB closed Twin unit: CB open
6 Twin unit: clutch engaged Twin unit: clutch disengaged
7 Twin unit: kW balancing
8 Stop (pulse)
9 Unused Unused
10 Unused Unused
11 Unused Unused
12 Unused Unused
13 Unused Unused
14 Unused Unused
15 Unused Unused
16 Unused Unused

ER509/890
Page 5 of 142
3.4 Expanded Digital Inputs 17 to 32

CHANNEL ‘ON’ FUNCTION ‘OFF’ FUNCTION


17 Local mode select (remote mode select)
18 Local mode – raise speed
19 Local mode – lower speed
20 SS active mode select (pulse)
21 SS active mode – raise speed
22 SS active mode – lower speed
23 Generator mode select
24 Generator mode – raise speed
25 Generator mode – lower speed
26 Const speed mode select (pulse)
27 Bridge mode select
28 Combinator 1 mode
29 Combinator 2 mode
30 Fi-Fi pump mode select
31 Set speed step
32 Reset alarm (pulse)

3.5 Expanded Digital Inputs 33 to 48

CHANNEL ‘ON’ FUNCTION ‘OFF’ FUNCTION


33 Circuit breaker closed Circuit breaker open
34 Clutch engaged Clutch disengaged
35 Emergency start mode select
36 Slave pick-up select
37 Torque limiter 2 select
38 Bus-tie closed Bus-tie open
39 Droop mode Isoch mode
40 Loadshare
41 Offload
42 kW loadshare Fuel rack loadshare
43 Prepare to clutch-in (pulse)
44 Load reduction
45 Fuel limit override
46 Group interconnector 1
47 Group interconnector 2
48 Group interconnector 3

ER509/890
Page 6 of 142
4. OUTPUTS

4.1 Analogue Outputs

CHANNEL DESCRIPTION
1 Engine speed 1
2 Engine speed 2
3 PID speed controller position
4 Actuator position
5 Least fuel limiter position
6 Available load
7 Ramped setspeed
8 Load setpoint

4.1.1 Calibration Output

To get correct output after configuring each channel, the calibration for each channel are
needed. Following are steps to calibrate each channel

1). Go to Edit menu Hardware > Analogue > Outputs > Channel A > Force and force
0.0% for channel x
2). Measure channel x output.
3). If measured value is not 4mA (if output is configured to be current) or 0V(if output is
configured to be voltage), go to Edit menu Hardware > Analogue > Outputs >
Channel A > Calibration > Current or Hardware > Analogue > Outputs > Channel A
> Calibration > Voltage > 0-5V / 0-10V and adjust the value in Raw Value x 4mA or
Raw Value x 0V until measured value read 4mA or 0V.
4) Go to Edit menu Hardware > Analogue > Outputs > Channel A > Force, force
100.0% for channel x
5) Measure channel x output.
6) If measured value is not 20mA (if output is configured to be current) or 5V / 10V(if output
is configured to be voltage), go to Edit menu Hardware > Analogue > Outputs >
Channel A > Calibration > Current or Hardware > Analogue > Outputs > Channel A
> Calibration > Voltage > 0-5V / 0-10V and adjust the value in Raw Value x 20mA or
Raw Value x 5V / Raw Value x 10V until measured value read 20mA or 5V / 10V.
7) Repeat steps 1 to 6 for all channels.
8) Go to Configuration > General of Edit menu and highlight ‘Save All Edited Data’ by
click second column (‘Value’ column) of ‘Save All Edited Data’.
9) Press ‘Save’ button

The red LED will light up. The calibration data will be saved to flash after red LED turned off. If
red LED does not turn on repeat step 8 and 9.

Note: x is channel number.

4.2 Standard Digital Outputs 1 to 16

CHANNEL ‘ON’ FUNCTION ‘OFF’ FUNCTION


1 Unused Unused
2 Start enable
3 Disengage clutch
4 Trip circuit breaker
5 Run on ballhead
6 kW balancing (to twin unit)
7 Viking healthy (to twin unit)
8 Disengage clutch (to twin unit)

ER509/890
Page 7 of 142
9 Unused Unused
10 Unused Unused
11 Unused Unused
12 Unused Unused
13 Unused Unused
14 Unused Unused
15 Unused Unused
16 Unused Unused

4.3 Expanded Digital Outputs 17 to 32

CHANNEL ‘ON’ FUNCTION ‘OFF’ FUNCTION


17 General alarm active
18 Major alarm active
19 Local mode
20 SS active mode
21 Const speed mode
22 Generator mode
23 Operating as master
24 Operating in droop
25 Engage clutch
26 Clutch-in failure
27 Load reduction active
28 Fuel limitation active
29 Unused Unused
30 Unused Unused
31 Unused Unused
32 Unused Unused

4.4 Expanded Digital Outputs 33 to 48

CHANNEL ‘ON’ FUNCTION ‘OFF’ FUNCTION


33 Bridge mode
34 Combinator 1 mode
35 Combinator 2 mode
36 Fi-Fi pump mode
37 Stop engine
38 Emergency start mode
39 Speed switch 1
40 Speed switch 2
41 Speed switch 3
42 Load switch 1
43 Load switch 2
44 Unused Unused
45 Unused Unused
46 Unused Unused
47 Unused Unused
48 Unused Unused

4.5 Actuator Outputs

0-1A Actuator Drive

ER509/890
Page 8 of 142
5. SPEED MEASURING

5.1 Engine Speed Measuring

Speed measuring is by two speed pickups: Master and Slave. The primary speed pickup is the
master.

Software configuration for the number of teeth / markers being sensed by each pick-up is
achieved in the Configuration > Engine Types > Selection menu through Viking Vision or the
handheld programmer.
Note:- If any changes are made to the engine types or a new type is selected a full save is
required to allow these changes to be initialised prior to use.

For this application:

i.- The master speed pick-up, number 1, is located on the load side of a coupling
(gearbox or generator) and provides a low frequency signal, sensing 3,4 or 9 markers.

ii.- The slave speed pick-up, number 2, is located on the engine side of the coupling and
provides a high frequency signal, sensing flywheel teeth.

If a pick-up speed signal is lost while the other pick-up is in use the ‘pickup X fail’ alarm will be
initiated and the general alarm output will be de-energised.

If the master pick-up is in use and its speed signal is lost the slave is automatically selected.
The ‘pickup 1 fail’ and ‘pickup change’ alarms will be initiated and the general alarm output will
be de-energised. Reversion back to use of the master speed pick-up signal will be attempted
after reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) is energised

If the master pick-up is in use and the slave speed signal is lost the ‘pickup 2 fail’ alarm will be
initiated and the general alarm output will be de-energised

If both pick-up speed signals are lost the ‘pickup fault’ alarm will be initiated and the general
alarm output and the major alarm output will be de-energised. As the Viking can no longer
perform speed control the engine will be either shutdown, for a non-ballhead actuator or backup
governing will takeover, for a ballhead actuator).

If a difference in speed of greater than 2 rpm is measured between speed inputs, the software
automatically selects the highest measured speed as the one for use. In this instance the
message Warning will be displayed in the Pickup Change alarm menu item and the governor
fault output will be energised. This functionality can be disabled via the Change Over Enable
menu item in the Pickups menu. Setting this to Disabled prevents a change of pickups on a 2
RPM speed difference.

NOTE:-
a. No pickup change will occur below Running Speed to prevent changes caused
by one pickup seeing a signal prior to the other pickup.
b. A change over will always occur, even if disabled, if the alternate pickup is seen
above Run RPM when the main pickup has not been seen.

The Engine Status menu will display the messages Pickup 1 or Pickup 2 in the Pickup In Use
menu item to indicate the speed pickup in use.

It is possible to disable the master pickup so that only the slave pickup is used by setting the
Pickup 1 Enable menu item in the Hardware menu to Disable. Setting this menu item to Enable
will enable the master pickup.

During stop, stationary and starting conditions the parameters in the Dynamics SFL menu are
applied, regardless of the pickup in us]

ER509/890
Page 9 of 142
5.2 Speed Pickup Selection Override

The selection of the speed pickup can be overridden via the slave pick-up select digital input to
ensure the slave speed pickup is used.

With the engine stationary and slave pick-up select input energised pickup 2 will be displayed as
in use. If there is a problem with the slave speed signal such that when the engine is cranked
no signal is generated, rotation detected on the master speed signal will initiate the pickup 2 fail
– no signal and ‘pickup fault’ alarms.

With the engine running, both speed signals healthy and pickup 1 in use, energising the slave
pick-up select input will achieve pickup 2 in use without initiating a pickup change alarm. While
these conditions are maintained the pickup 1 fail – no signal alarm is inhibited. Should the
slave speed signal be lost the pickup 2 fail – no signal alarm and the ‘pickup fault’ alarm will be
initiated, regardless of pickup 1 status.

With the engine running and pickup 2 fail – no signal alarm active, pickup 1 will be in use.
Energising the slave pick-up select input will achieve ‘pickup fault’ alarm initiation.

With the engine running, both speed signals healthy and the slave pick-up select input
energised, pickup 2 will be in use. De-energising the slave pick-up select input will achieve
pickup 1 in use and pickup change alarm initiation.

ER509/890
Page 10 of 142
6. START UP AND INITIAL RUN-UP

TAKE THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS PRIOR TO STARTING THE ENGINE. IF IN DOUBT


CONSULT THE HANDBOOK OR REGULATEURS EUROPA.

6.1 Backup Governing

Backup governing is supported when a ballhead actuator is fitted and the Actuator Type item of
Configuration > Engine Types > Type X (x = selected type) is selected to either Bhd: Nrml or
Bhd: Rvrs.

With the system arrangement supporting backup governing, the Viking ‘run on ballhead’
condition is initiated should any of the following alarm conditions become active, as it would not
be possible for the Viking to perform the governing function:

1.- Actuator wirebreak


2.- Pickup fault
3.- Flash memory error
4.- Power up on ballhead

The Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition is indicated by the following:

1.- V25 LED display alarm code A26 indicated


2.- Ballhead alarm active, the Ballhead item in Alarm > General will display Warning
3.- Ballhead status displayed in Engine Status item of Engine Status > This Engine

On achieving the Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition control signals are driven as follows:

1.- Viking fuelling rate signal is driven to min or max mA (dependant on actuator mode).
2.- Viking stop output is maintained de-energised state (run state)
3.- Viking run on ballhead output is de-energised
4.- This unit is forced into droop mode

The above conditions are also achieved on the failure mode of a Viking power supply or
processor problem.

While the Viking is healthy the speed setting of the backup governor should be set outside of the
normal setspeed range of the Viking, high or low speed (dependant on actuator mode). If the
Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition is achieved on a running engine, the ballhead actuator
arrangement enables the backup governor to take over speed governing when the Viking
fuelling rate is driven to min or max mA (dependant on actuator mode). The engine speed can
subsequently be modified manually through the backup governor speed setting.

The Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition and the Ballhead alarm can be clears when the above
initiating alarms are successfully reset.

ER509/890
Page 11 of 142
6.2 Actuator Mode

When backup governing is not supported a non ballhead actuator is fitted and the Actuator Type
item of Configuration > Engine Types > Type X (x = selected type) is selected to Non Bhd. In
this condition normal acting actuator mode is always processed.

The backup governing function can be implemented in either normal acting actuator mode or
reverse acting actuator mode.

Normal Acting Ballhead

If there is a requirement for the engine to run at low speed when the Viking ‘run on ballhead’
condition is achieved then normal acting actuator mode should be implemented.

A normal acting ballhead actuator is fitted and the Actuator Type item of Configuration >
Engine Types > Type X (x = selected type) is selected to Bhd: Nrml.

Under healthy Viking running the Viking produces a low mA fuelling rate signal for a low fuel
demand and the actuator drives the fuel racks to low fuel delivery, with <80mA achieving
actuator output position 0. The backup governor speed setting will be set below the normal
speed setting range of the Viking.

When Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition is achieved the Viking fuelling rate signal is reduced
towards 80mA, causing fuel delivery to be reduced towards minimum. As the engine speed falls
below the backup governor speed setting the ballhead arrangement enables the backup
governor to take over fuel control and speed govern, initially at low speed.

Reverse Acting Ballhead

If there is a requirement for the engine to run at high speed when Viking ‘run on ballhead’
condition is achieved then reverse acting actuator mode should be implemented.

A reverse acting ballhead actuator is fitted and the Actuator Type item of Configuration >
Engine Types > Type X (x = selected type) is selected to Bhd: Rvrs.

Under healthy Viking running the Viking produces a low mA fuelling rate signal for a high fuel
demand and the actuator drives the fuel racks to high fuel delivery, with <80mA achieving
actuator output position 10. The backup governor speed setting will be set above the normal
speed setting range of the Viking.

When Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition is achieved the Viking fuelling rate signal is reduced
towards 80mA, causing fuel delivery to be increased towards maximum. As the engine speed
increases above the backup governor speed setting the ballhead arrangement enables the
backup governor to take over fuel control and speed govern, initially at high speed.

A reverse acting ballhead actuator requires an independent stop signal to achieve an engine
stop.

ER509/890
Page 12 of 142
6.3 Viking Power Up Conditions

In a system supporting back-up governing, it is possible for the engine to be running when the
Viking is powered up.

In a system supporting back-up governing, the ‘ballhead on power up’ alarm is initiated if engine
rotation is detected on Viking power up.

While the alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A29 indicated


- Ballhead On Power Up item in Alarm > General displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised

If no stop has been applied and the actuator wirebreak and pickup fault alarms have remained
healthy, energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) will clear the ‘ballhead on
power up’ alarm (and the Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition). This action will initiate a bumpless
transfer of governing from backup to Viking. The backup governor speed setting should be set
out of the Viking speed control range before the reset is applied.

On the instant of the reset the Viking ramped setspeed will be set to the measured engine
speed. The Viking setspeed control functions will then be processed and the setspeed may be
modified according to the setspeed mode and associated parameter settings.

On Viking power up, following completion of initialisation routines:

If the engine is running and backup governing is not supported the Viking will initially
apply the (normal) start fuel control function then process engine governing in accordance
with the current setspeed mode and system status.
The Engine Status item in Display > Engine Status > This Engine menu will indicate
Running.

If the engine is running and backup governing is supported (and a stop is not applied to
the Viking), the backup governor will initially maintain control of engine fuelling.
The Engine Status item in Display > Engine Status > This Engine menu will indicate
Ballhead

If the engine is stationary and the Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition is not achieved the
Viking will process engine start interlocks to determine the available to start condition.
The Engine Status item in Display > Engine Status > This Engine menu will indicate
either Start Block or Available.

If the engine is stationary and the Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition is achieved the
ballhead alarm will need to be successfully reset before the Viking will process an engine
start.
The Engine Status item in Display > Engine Status > This Engine menu will indicate
Ballhead.

ER509/890
Page 13 of 142
6.4 Standby Conditions

While all Viking start interlock conditions are clear, the Viking available to start condition is
achieved and the start fuel function will be processed on detection of engine rotation.

The Viking available to start condition is indicated as follows:

Engine Status item in Display > Engine Status > This Engine = Available.
Start Block item in Display > Engine Status > This Engine = 0.
Fuel Limitation item in Display > Engine Status > This Engine = SFL.

The Viking start interlocks are detailed below:

Governor Running, Start Block bitmap value = 1


This interlock is active while the Viking speed measurement detects engine rotation.

Ballhead Governor, Start Block bitmap value = 2


This interlock is active while the Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition is achieved.

Shutdown Active, Start Block bitmap value = 4


This interlock is active while any shutdown condition is active.
The stop output will be de-energised while this interlock is active

Stop Active, Start Block bitmap value = 8


This interlock is active while the stop input is energised or the stop timer is running following
detection of the (pulsed) stop input.
The stop output will be de-energised while this interlock is active

The following interlock is overridden while the current speed setting mode is emergency start
mode:

Clutch Engaged / CB Close, Start Block bitmap value = 16


This interlock is active while the clutch engaged or circuit breaker closed input is energised .

While a start interlock is active the start block condition is achieved, indicated as follows:

Engine Status item in Display > Engine Status > This Engine = Start Block.
Start Block item in Display > Engine Status > This Engine = sum of bitmap values.
Appropriate items in Display > System > Start Interlocks = Active.
Fuel Limitation item in Display > Engine Status > This Engine = Start Block

While the Start Block condition is achieved the Viking will maintain setspeed at Start Control
Speed item value and fuelling rate at actuator position 0. A Viking start control sequence will not
be initiated on detection of engine rotation, the Start Process item will maintain Dormant.

ER509/890
Page 14 of 142
6.5 Start Interlock Outputs

The Viking provides two outputs for use by the external system in the control of engine starting:

i.- Start enable


ii.- Run on ballhead

6.5.1 Start Enable Output

The start enable output is normally de-energised and will be energised to enable a start while
the Viking available to start condition is achieved

6.5.2 Run On Ballhead Output

The Run on ballhead output is energised while the Viking is able to perform speed governing.

The output will be de-energised while the Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition is active.

By failure mode, the output will de-energise on power supply or Viking failure.

ER509/890
Page 15 of 142
6.6 Start Fuel Control Function (Normal)

Editable parameters associated with the start fuel control function are presented in the Edit >
System > Start Control menu.

Status parameters associated with the start fuel control function are presented in the Display >
System > Start Control menu.

The start fuel control function achieves engine acceleration from an adjustable low level speed
to idle speed by processing speed governing according to a pre-defined set of ramp rates. The
ramp rates should be set up such that acceleration is achieved with minimal smoke emissions.

Engine starting performance also depends on start air pressure. The Viking measurement of
start air pressure is displayed as a % value in Start Air Pressure item. The analogue input is
scaled such that:

Minimum SAP / % value is represented by Minimum SAP / mA value


Maximum SAP / % value is represented by Maximum SAP / mA.value

The Start Air Level item provides an adjustable start air pressure threshold, the Start Air
Hysterisis item provides adjustable hysterisis of the status switching. When the measurement
falls below the threshold for Start Air Fall Delay period Start Air Status item displays Low. When
the measurement rises above the threshold + hysterisis for Start Air Rise Delay period the Start
Air Status item displays High.

Engine starting performance also depends on engine temperature. The engine is considered
hot once idle speed has been achieved and for Hot Start Period from a stop initiation, during
which the Start Temp Status item displays Hot Engine, after this period Start Temp Status
displays Cold Engine.

While the Viking available to start condition is not achieved the Start Process item displays
Dormant, the Viking fuelling rate is maintained at actuator position 0.

If a stop condition is achieved during the start process, or the engine speed stalls to 0rpm during
the setspeed ramping phase, the start process is reset.

While the engine is stationary, the Viking available to start condition is achieved and the current
speed setting mode is not emergency mode, the Start Process item displays Norm-Stationary.
The Viking setspeed is held at Start Control Speed item value. To assist engine starting the
Viking fuelling rate is set to Start FL Stationary item actuator position if the start air pressure is
low or the engine is cold. Otherwise the Viking fuelling rate is maintained at actuator position 0.

On detection of engine rotation the Start Process item displays Norm-Rotating. To assist engine
starting the Viking fuelling rate is set to Start FL Rotating item actuator position if the start air
pressure is low or the engine is cold. Otherwise the Viking fuelling rate is maintained at 0
actuator position.

While Start Process item displays Norm-Rotating and the measured engine speed is below
Firing RPM the Viking setspeed and fuelling rate are maintained as defined above. When the
measured engine speed exceeds Firing RPM the Viking fuelling rate is set to Start FL Rotating
item actuator position (regardless of start air pressure or engine temperature).

When the measured engine speed exceeds Start Control Speed the Start Process item displays
Norm-Ramping and the normal start fuel limit is removed to enable speed governing

ER509/890
Page 16 of 142
While Start Process item displays Norm-Ramping:

i.- The Viking setspeed is ramped from Start Ctrl Speed to Idle Speed according to the
ramp rates Start Ramp 1 / s, Start Ramp 2 / s, and Start Ramp 3 / s items. The
speed level at which the applied ramp rate changes is defined by R1 / R2 Speed
and R2 / R3 Speed items.

ii.- Speed governing processes the dynamic parameters in Control > Control Gains >
S.F.L Dynamics menu.

iii.- Torque fuel limitation functions TFL1 and TFL2 and the boost fuel limitation function
are inhibited.

On a successful start attempt the engine speed will achieve idle speed. The start fuel control
function is released and the Start Process item displays Dormant.

The set speed is held at Idle Speed item in Edit > Speed Setting > General for the duration of
Idle Hold Period item value in System > General menu.

On completion of the idle hold period the Viking setspeed is defined by the current speed setting
mode.

ER509/890
Page 17 of 142
6.7 Emergency Start Functions

The emergency start functions are active while the current speed setting mode is emergency
start mode. The currently active speed setting mode is indicated in the Speed Setting Mode
item in Engine Status > This Engine.

While the engine is stationary the stop latch timer is inhibited, inhibiting a Stop start interlock that
may have been resulting from an earlier stop (pulsed) input. Note that Viking Running, Ballhead
Governor and Shutdown start interlocks operate as normal.

While the Viking available to start condition is not achieved the Start Process item displays
Dormant, the Viking fuelling rate is maintained at actuator position 0.

While the engine is stationary, the Viking available to start condition is achieved and the current
speed setting mode is emergency mode, the Start Process item displays Emergency and the
normal start fuel control function is overridden. The Viking setspeed is held at Idle Speed item
value in Speed Setting > General menu and the Viking fuelling rate is set to Emerg Start Fuel
item value in Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > Start menu.

All other fuel limitation functions are inhibited.

The stop latch timer is enabled when the Viking speed measurement detects engine rotation.
Any subsequent stop (pulse) input will latch a stop condition for the duration of the stop timer as
normal, or until the engine is again stationary in emergency start speed setting mode.

The idle hold period is bypassed. Immediately after achieving Idle Speed on starting, the
demand setspeed is set to Emergency Speed value in Speed Setting > General menu.

ER509/890
Page 18 of 142
6.8 Engine Running

On entering a digital speed setting mode the current demand setspeed maybe maintained, or
maybe ramped to a predefined speed, depending on the mode. Should a maintained setspeed
be outside of the new speed range defined by the Minimum Setspeed and Maximum Setspeed
parameters in the appropriate Speed Setting sub menu, the setspeed will be ramped to the new
limit.

If the digital speed setting mode accommodates raise and lower speed digital inputs, the
demand setspeed can be adjusted within the range, when not ramping to predefined speeds
where applicable.

On entering an analogue speed setting mode the demand setspeed will be defined by the
analogue speed setting input and the ramped setspeed will ramp to meet this.

In an analogue speed setting mode the demand setspeed can be adjusted between the Min
Setspeed / rpm and Max Setspeed / rpm parameters in the appropriate Speed Setting sub
menu.

ER509/890
Page 19 of 142
7. SPEED SETTING

7.1 Speed Setting Initialisation

At switch on the ramped setspeed is initialised to an rpm value appropriate to the conditions
detected to accommodate the use of a mechanical ‘ballhead backup’ actuator:

Should the engine be running, ramped setspeed will be initialised to the Viking engine
speed measurement.

Should the engine be stationary, ramped setspeed will be initialised to Start Control
Speed item value in System > Start Control menu, awaiting start up.

7.2 Speed Setting Modes

The following speed setting modes are supported.

(0), Local mode


(1), Remote: Speed Setting Active mode
(2), Remote: Constant Speed mode
(3), Remote: Generator mode
(4), Remote: Bridge Control mode
(5), Remote: Combinator Control mode – station 1
(6), Remote: Combinator Control mode – station 2
(7), Remote: Fi-Fi Pump Control mode
(8), Remote: Emergency Start mode

The speed setting mode is initialised to Remote: Speed Setting Active mode.

The currently active speed setting mode is indicated in the Speed Setting Mode item in Engine
Status > This Engine.

The currently active speed setting mode is indicated on the Viking LED display module in the
format:
,S, , ,X,

Where:
S: is a constant denoting the display of current speed setting mode
X: is a value 0-8 representing speed setting modes (in brackets above)

The active speed setting mode will not change while the Start Process item in System > Start
Control menu displays Norm-Ramping

ER509/890
Page 20 of 142
7.2.1 Local Mode

Local mode is achieved by energising local mode select input while the circuit breaker closed
input is not energised.

Local mode output is energised while in local mode. No other speed setting mode can be
achieved while in local mode with local mode select input maintained energised.

While in local mode the demand setspeed is modfiied by local mode – raise and lower speed
inputs. Setspeed adjustment limits and ramp rates specific to local mode are defined in Speed
Setting > Local Mode menu.

Droop speed control is always processed while in local mode. The Local Droop % items in
Control > Control Gains > Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2 menu’s apply while Dynamics 1 or 2
are in use.

When local mode select input is de-energised (while current speed setting mode is local mode)
the mode falls into provisional default SSactive mode, when any mode can be achieved if
selected. SSactive mode will be achieved after 2 seconds.

7.2.2 Remote: Emergency Start Mode

Remote: Emergency Start (emergency) mode is achieved by energising emergency start mode
select input while the engine is available to start, the current speed setting mode is any remote
mode and local mode select input is not energised.

Emergency start mode output is energised while in emergency mode.

Standby, starting and running functions are affected while emergency mode is active. See other
sections for detail.

While the engine is stationary, emergency mode will be overridden by local mode if local mode
select input is energised (or by generator mode should the circuit breaker input be energised).

On completion of starting in emergency mode, demand setspeed is initially set to Emergency


Speed rpm value in Speed Setting > Emergency Mode menu. Note that the demand
setspeed will be limited to the emergency mode setspeed adjustment limits.

When the initial ramp to demand setspeed has been achieved, the demand setspeed can be
modified by generator mode – raise and lower speed inputs. Setspeed adjustment limits and
ramp rates specific to emergency mode are defined in Speed Setting > Emergency Mode
menu.

While the engine is running, emergency mode will be overridden by local mode if local mode
select input is energised or generator mode if circuit breaker input or generator mode select
input are energised.

When emergency start mode select input is de-energised (while current speed setting mode is
emergency mode) the mode falls into provisional default SSactive mode, when any mode can
be achieved if selected. SSactive mode will be achieved after 2 seconds.

ER509/890
Page 21 of 142
7.2.3 Remote: Speed Setting Active Mode

Remote: Speed Setting Active mode (SSactive) mode is the default remote mode.

Provisional default SSactive mode is achieved when local mode select input is de-energised,
circuit breaker closed input is not energised and no remote mode select inputs are energised.

Provisional default SSactive mode can also be achieved by energising SSactive mode select
(pulse) input while the current speed setting mode is Remote: Constant Speed mode.

Provisional default SSactive mode conditions are required to be maintained for 2 seconds
before SSactive mode is achieved. SSactive mode output is energised while in SSactive mode.

While in SSactive mode the demand setspeed is modified by SSactive mode – raise and lower
speed inputs. Setspeed adjustment limits and ramp rates specific to SSactive mode are defined
in Speed Setting > SS Active Mode menu.

All local and remote modes can be achieved from SSactive mode (provisional or achieved).

The lower priority remote modes have no stated order of precedence. When in SSactive mode
(provisional or achieved), the order of assessing selection of lower priority remote modes is as
follows:
1.- Remote: Combinator Control Mode – station 1
2.- Remote: Combinator Control Mode – station 2
3.- Remote: Bridge Control Mode
4.- Remote: Fi-Fi Pump Control Mode
5.- Remote: Constant Speed Mode (pulse selection)

7.2.4 Remote: Constant Speed Mode

Remote: Constant Speed (const speed) mode is achieved by energising const speed mode
select (pulse) input while the current speed setting mode is Remote: Speed Setting Active
mode.

Const speed mode output is energised while in const speed mode.

While in const speed mode demand setspeed is fixed at Rated Speed rpm value in Speed
Setting > General menu, with no external adjustment of setspeed possible. Ramp rates
specific to const speed mode are defined in Speed Setting > Cont Speed Mode menu.

Adjustment of the Rated Speed rpm parameter value while in const speed mode will initiate a
ramp to the new value

Local mode, generator mode, emergency mode and SSactive mode can be achieved from const
speed mode.

ER509/890
Page 22 of 142
7.2.5 Remote: Generator Mode

Remote: Generator (generator) mode is achieved when circuit breaker closed input energises
while the current speed setting mode is any other remote mode.

Generator mode can also be achieved by energising generator mode select input while the
current speed setting mode is any remote mode (except emergency mode when engine
stationary) and local mode select input is not energised.

Generator mode output is energised while in generator mode.

On achieving generator mode, demand setspeed is set to Rated Speed rpm value in Speed
Setting > General menu. If circuit breaker closed input is not energised the CB Offset Speed
rpm value in Speed Setting > Generator Mode menu will be added to the demand setspeed. If
bus tie closed input is not energised the BT Offset Speed rpm value in Speed Setting >
Generator Mode menu will also be added to the demand setspeed. The offsets may be
positive or negative rpm values. Note that the demand setspeed will be limited to the generator
mode setspeed adjustment limits.

When not ramping to achieve a demand setspeed, demand setspeed can be modified by
generator mode – raise and lower speed inputs. Setspeed adjustment limits and ramp rates
specific to Generator mode are defined in Speed Setting > Generator Mode menu.

Should either circuit breaker or bus tie status change while generator mode is maintained a
ramp to the updated demand setspeed (Rated Speed rpm + offsets according to breaker status)
will be initiated:

Local mode and emergency mode can be achieved while in generator mode when circuit
breaker closed input de-energised.

When both circuit breaker closed input and generator mode select inputs are de-energised
(while current speed setting mode is generator mode) the mode falls into provisional default
SSactive mode, when any mode can be achieved if selected. SSactive mode will be achieved
after 2 seconds.

ER509/890
Page 23 of 142
7.2.6 Remote: Bridge Control Mode

Remote: Bridge Control (bridge) mode is achieved by energising bridge mode select input while
the current speed setting mode is Remote: Speed Setting Active mode.

Bridge mode output is energised while in Bridge Control (bridge) mode.

On achieving bridge mode, demand setspeed is initially set to either:


- Clutch-in Speed rpm value in Speed Setting > General menu if clutch engaged input
is not energised.
- Bridge Speed rpm value in Speed Setting > Bridge Control Mode menu if clutch
engaged input is energised.

Demand setspeed is fixed at the appropriate above rpm value, with no external adjustment
possible. Ramp rates specific to bridge mode are defined in Speed Setting > Bridge Control
Mode menu.

Adjustment of the Clutch-in Speed rpm parameter value or the Bridge Speed rpm value while in
use in Bridge Control (bridge) mode will initiate a ramp to the new value

Should clutch engaged input status change while bridge mode is maintained, setspeed will ramp
to the appropriate above rpm value.

Local mode, generator mode and emergency mode can be achieved while in bridge mode with
bridge mode select input maintained energised.

When bridge mode select input is de-energised (while current speed setting mode is bridge
mode) the mode falls into provisional default SSactive mode, when any mode can be achieved if
selected. SSactive mode will be achieved after 2 seconds.

7.2.7 Remote: Combinator Control Mode – station 1

Remote: Combinator Control mode – station 1 (combi1), is achieved by energising combinator 1


mode select input while the current speed setting mode is Remote: Speed Setting Active mode.

Combinator 1 mode output is energised while in combi1 mode.

While in combi1 mode the demand setspeed is defined by combinator speed setting 1 input.
Speed setting input scaling and ramp rates specific to combi1 mode are defined in Speed
Setting > Combi1 Mode menu.

Should a combi1 setspeed transducer failure alarm be active the demand setspeed will be
forced to the Min Setspeed / rpm value in Speed Setting > Combi1 Mode menu while in
combi1 mode.

Local mode, generator mode and emergency mode can be achieved while in combi1 mode with
combinator 1 mode select input maintained energised.

When combinator 1 mode select input is de-energised (while current speed setting mode is
combi1 mode) the mode falls into provisional default SSactive mode, when any mode can be
achieved if selected. SSactive mode will be achieved after 2 seconds.

ER509/890
Page 24 of 142
7.2.8 Remote: Combinator Control Mode – station 2

Remote: Combinator Control mode – station 2 (combi2), is achieved by energising combinator 2


mode select input while the current speed setting mode is Remote: Speed Setting Active mode.

Combinator 2 mode output is energised while in combi2 mode.

While in combi2 mode the demand setspeed is defined by combinator speed setting 2 input.
Speed setting input scaling and ramp rates specific to combi1 mode are defined in Speed
Setting > Combi2 Mode menu.

Should a combi2 setspeed transducer failure alarm be active the demand setspeed will be
forced to the Min Setspeed / rpm value in Speed Setting > Combi2 Mode menu while in
combi2 mode.

Local mode, generator mode and emergency mode can be achieved while in combi2 mode with
combinator 2 mode select input maintained energised.

When combinator 2 mode select input is de-energised (while current speed setting mode is
combi2 mode) the mode falls into provisional default SSactive mode, when any mode can be
achieved if selected. SSactive mode will be achieved after 2 seconds.

7.2.9 Remote: Fi-Fi Pump Control Mode

Remote: Fi-Fi Pump Control (Fi-Fi) mode is achieved by energising Fi-Fi Pump mode select
input while the current speed setting mode is Remote: Speed Setting Active mode.

Fi-Fi Pump mode output is energised while in Fi-Fi mode.

While in Fi-Fi mode the demand setspeed is defined by Fi-Fi speed setting input. Speed setting
input scaling and ramp rates specific to Fi-Fi mode are defined in Speed Setting > Fi-Fi Mode
menu.

Should a Fi-Fi setspeed transducer failure alarm be active the demand setspeed will be forced
to the Min Setspeed / rpm value in Speed Setting > Fi-Fi Mode menu while in Fi-Fi mode.

Only local mode, generator mode and emergency mode can be achieved while in Fi-Fi mode
with Fi-Fi Pump mode select input maintained energised.

When Fi-Fi Pump mode select input is de-energised the mode falls into provisional default
SSactive mode, when any mode can be achieved if selected. SSactive mode will be achieved
after 2 seconds.

ER509/890
Page 25 of 142
7.3 Speed Setting Parameters

Speed setting parameters specific to each speed setting mode are presented in the appropriate
sub menu’s of Speed Setting menu.

RPM
Up Ramp1 = R1/R2 - Min.
Max. x t1
^R3 vR1 Up Ramp2 = R2/R3. - R1/R2
t2
R2/R3 x x Up Ramp3 = Max. – R2/R3
t3
^R2 vR2
R1/R2 x x Down Ramp1 = Max. – R2/R3
T4
^R1 vR3 Down Ramp2 = R2/R3 – R1/R2
Min. x x T5
Down Ramp3 = R1/R2 - Min.
T6
t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 Time

For all speed setting modes:

Up Ramp1 ^R1: Upward Ramp rate in rpm/s indicated above

Up Ramp2 ^R2: Upward Ramp rate in rpm/s indicated above

Up Ramp3 ^R3: Upward Ramp rate in rpm/s indicated above

Down Ramp1 vR1: Downward Ramp rate in rpm/s indicated above

Down Ramp2 vR2: Downward Ramp rate in rpm/s indicated above

Down Ramp3 vR3: Downward Ramp rate in rpm/s indicated above

R1/R2 Speed R1/R2: Speed at which ramp rate changes from Ramp1 to Ramp2.

R2/R3 Speed R2/R3: Speed at which ramp rate changes between Ramp2 & Ramp3.

For digital speed setting modes:

Maximum Setspeed Max.: Maximum value to which speed setting can be increased

Minimum Setspeed Min.: Minimum value to which speed setting can be decreased

For analogue speed setting modes:

Max Setspeed / rpm Max.: Maximum value to which speed setting can be increased

Min Setspeed / rpm Min.: Minimum value to which speed setting can be decreased

Max Setspeed / mA Scaling of Speed setting input. mA representing Max Setspeed / rpm

Min Setspeed / mA Scaling of Speed setting input. mA representing Min Setspeed / rpm

ER509/890
Page 26 of 142
Via the above parameters it is possible to vary the speed ramps independently and to alter the
speed at which the ramp changes from Ramp1 to Ramp2.

7.4 Set Speed Step Function

The speed step function operates in all speed setting modes. The current speed setting mode
Setspeed adjustment limits are maintained and ramp rates utilised.

For the period of Speed Step Time seconds in Speed Setting > General menu, following
detection of set speed step input changing to the energised state, the Speed Step Offset rpm
value in Speed Setting > General menu is added to demand setspeed resulting from the speed
setting mode functionality.

At the end of the period the offset rpm added to demand setspeed is ramped to 0.

The set speed step input must be returned to the de-energised state before a further period of
offset can be initiated.

ER509/890
Page 27 of 142
8. SPEED CONTROL

The speed controller of the V25 calculates the error between measured speed and set speed
and feeds it into a PID controller. Gain modifier functions provide modulation of the speed serror
and the 3 term controller parameters to achieve speed control response required for the
application over the full range of operation.

A number of dynamic parameters sets and gain modifier function configurations are provided,
automatically selected based on the specific rotating machinery arrangements described below.

The final resultant values to be processed by the 3 term controller are displayed in the Speed
PID Input, Speed P Gain, Speed I Gain and Speed D Gain items in Control Gains > Dynamics.

8.1 Speed Control Dynamics

Due to the different location of the master and slave pick-ups, the speed error calculated from
their respective speed measurement is processed by a set of dynamic parameters specific to
each pick-up:

i.- The parameter set in Control > Control Gains > Dynamics 1 applies while the master
speed pick-up is in use.

ii.- The parameter set in Control > Control Gains > Dynamics 2 applies while the slave
speed pick-up is in use.

During stop, stationary or starting conditions, while the Start Fuel Control function is active and
regardless of the speed pick-up in use, the speed error is processed by the dynamic parameters
in Control > Control Gains > Start Dynamics menu.

While the engine is running and the master speed speed pick-up is in use, alternative dynamic
parameter sets are selected as follows:

i.- The parameter set in Control > Control Gains > Dynamics 3 will be used while the
clutch is engaged, the circuit breaker is not closed and the current speed setting mode is
not Fi-Fi Pump Control.

ii.- The parameter set in Control > Control Gains > Dynamics 5 will be used while the
current speed setting mode is Fi-Fi Pump Control and the circuit breaker is not closed.

iii.- The parameter set in Control > Control Gains > Dynamics 4 will be used while the
circuit breaker is closed.

The parameter set currently being applied is displayed in the Dynamics In Use item in Control
Gains > Dynamics.

The derivative term processed by the speed controller, indicated in the Speed D Gain item in
Control Gains > Dynamics is forced to 0 while the unit is operating in droop mode and the
%droop value ‘in use’ is greater than 0, indicated in the Droop item in Control Gains >
Dynamics

ER509/890
Page 28 of 142
8.2 Non-linear Gains

Non-linear gain is a modifier function that provides control of fuel as a function of the magnitude
of calculated speed error.

A Non-linear gain configuration acts when the calculated speed error is less than the % value in
its Error Range item. Above this percentage speed error the configuration will apply no
modification to the speed error.

If 0 d calculated speed error d Error Range, the modifier function will retrieve a value from the
configurations 11 point curve. This value will directly replace the original speed error.

Note: If a configurations Error Range item is adjusted the associated data point items will need
to be scaled to match the new value:

The Data Point 0 value is fixed at 0 and cannot be edited.


The Data Point 10 value should be set to the same value as the Error Range.

10.0

‘New’ Speed x x
x Parameters
Error Data Pt 0 to 10
x x
x x x
x
x

0x
0 Speed Error % Error Range

Non-linear gain modifier configurations have been preset, but can be adjusted on a running
engine by editing Data Point 0-10.

Selecting Disable in the configurations NLG Enable item will inhibit the configuration from
modifying the speed error.

The Non-linear gain configurations are sub menu’s of Control > Control Gains > Gain
Modifiers. Non-Linear Gain 1 configuration applies while the master speed pick-up is in use.
Non-Linear Gain 2 configuration applies while the slave speed pick-up is in use.

While the engine is running and the master speed pick-up is in use, alternative configurations
are selected as follows:

ii.- Non-Linear Gain 3 applies while the clutch is engaged and the circuit breaker is not
closed.

i.- Non-Linear Gain 4 applies while the circuit breaker is closed.

The Non-linear gain configuration currently being applied is displayed in the NLG Modifier In
Use item in Control Gains > Dynamics.

ER509/890
Page 29 of 142
8.3. Speed Variable Gains

Speed variable gain is a modifier function that provides control of fuel as a function of engine
speed.

A speed variable gain configuration can be configured to modify any combination of


proportional, integral and derivative speed control terms by selecting Enable or Disable in its
Proportional, Integral and Derivative items.

A speed variable gain configuration acts on the Prop.Gain, Integ.Gain and Deriv.Gain items
received, originating from the currently selected dynamic parameter set.

Data points set to 100.0% will multiply gains by 1, setting the data points to 50.0% will multiply
the gains by 0.5. The speed window for Data Points 0-10 is defined by the configurations Low
RPM and High RPM items

100.0

Modification x x
To selected x Parameters
PID terms Data Pt 0 to 10
x x
x x x
x
x x

0
Low Engine Speed High
RPM RPM

Speed variable gain modifier configurations have been preset, but can be adjusted on a running
engine by editing Data Points 0-10

Setting all Data Points to 100.0%, or selecting Disable for the Proportional, Integral and
Derivative items will effectively disable the configuration.

The speed variable gain configurations are sub menu’s of Control > Control Gains > Gain
Modifiers. Speed variable gain modification is applied while the engine is stationary or starting
or running.

Speed Variable Gain 1, 2 and 3

While the engine is running except engine starting (see S.F.L SV Gain) Speed Variable
Gain 1 configuration is applied as the default, alternative configurations are selected as
follows:

i.- Speed Variable Gain 2 applies while the clutch is engaged and the current speed
setting mode is not Fi-Fi Pump Control.

ii.- Speed Variable Gain 3 applies while the current speed setting mode is Fi-Fi Pump
Control.

Additional Speed Variable Gain

ER509/890
Page 30 of 142
The additional speed variable gain is applied for the situation that different gain modifier
configurations are needed for different control item (Proportional or Integral or Derivative).

While the engine is running with Additional SVG Sta. setting to In Use except engine
starting (see S.F.L SV Gain) the Additional SV Gain configuration is always applied,.

S.F.L SV Gain

While the engine is starting the S.F.L SV Gain configuration is applied. During this period
Additional SV Gain and Speed Variable Gain 1, 2, 3 configurations will not be used.

The speed variable gain configurations currently being applied are displayed in the SVG
Modifier In Use and ASVG Modifier In Use items in Control Gains > Dynamics.

ER509/890
Page 31 of 142
8.4 Load Variable Gains

Load variable gain is a modifier function that provides control of fuel as a function of engine load.
The load variable gain function uses actuator position (before fuel limits) as its reference for
engine load.

A load variable gain configuration can be configured to modify any combination of proportional,
integral and derivative speed control terms by selecting Enable or Disable in its Proportional,
Integral and Derivative items.

A load variable gain configuration acts on the Prop.Gain, Integ.Gain and Deriv.Gain items
received, originating from the currently selected dynamic parameter set.

Data points set to 100.0% will multiply gains by 1, setting the data points to 50.0% will multiply
the gains by 0.5.

100.0

Parameters
Gain Data Pt 0 to 10
Modifier

0 Actuator Position 10

Actuator positions below 0 will be treated the same as 0, actuator positions above 10 will be
treated the same as 10.

Load variable gain modifier configurations have been preset, but can be adjusted on a running
engine by editing data points Data Points 0-10

Setting all Data Points to 100.0%, or selecting Disable for the Proportional, Integral and
Derivative items will effectively disable the configuration.

The load varaible gain configurations are sub menu’s of Control > Control Gains > Gain
Modifiers. Load variable gain modification is applied while the engine is stationary or starting or
running. The Load Variable Gain 1 configuration is applied as the default, alternative
configurations are selected as follows:

i.- Load Variable Gain 2 applies while the clutch is engaged and the current speed
setting mode is not Fi-Fi Pump Control.

ii.- Load Variable Gain 3 applies while the current speed setting mode is Fi-Fi Pump
Control.

The load variable gain configuration currently being applied is displayed in the LVG Modifier In
Use item in Control Gains > Dynamics.

ER509/890
Page 32 of 142
9. FUEL LIMITATION

The Viking processes a number of fuel limitation functions that provide engine protection by
applying restriction of the engine fuelling rate. When active, fuel limit functions override the PID
speed controller fuelling requirement.

Start (SFL), Boost (BFL) and Torque (TFL) fuel limitation functions are implemented. A number
of TFL function configurations are implemented.

Fuel Limit configuration parameters are presented in the appropriate sub menu of Control >
Fuel Control > Fuel Limits. Fuel Limit status parameters are presented in Fuel Control > Fuel
Limits.

9.1 Start Fuel Limitation

Fuel Limitation applied during engine starting is described in the Start Fuel Control Function and
Emergency Start Function sections of this manual.

While a start fuel limitation is being applied the Fuel Limitation item in Engine Status > This
Engine will display SFL.

ER509/890
Page 33 of 142
9.2 Application of Running Fuel Limit Functions

Boost (BFL) and Torque (TFL) fuel limitation functions can be disabled by selecting Disable in
the Enable item in the appropriate sub menu. Additionally, TFL’s are enabled / disabled
automatically based on the following system conditions:

i.- TFL1 is disabled while:


- Torque limiter 2 select input is energised
- TFLclutch-in is enabled

ii.- TFL2 is disabled while:


- Torque limiter 2 select input is not energised
- TFLclutch-in is enabled

iii.- TFLclutch-in is enabled while:


- Prepare for clutch-in conditions are current
- Clutch engaged input is energised

iv.- TFLfi-fi is enabled while:


- Current speed setting mode is Fi-Fi pump mode.

While a fuel limitation function is disabled it is not processed, its status is forced to inactive and
its active delay timer is reset. The (Function) Status item will display Disabled and the
(Function) Value item will display 10.00 (maximum fuel, no limitation).

While a fuel limitation function is enabled it will be processed and its resultant value will be will
be displayed in the (Function) Value item. The exception to this rule is BFL while boost pressure
transducer failure alarm is active where the status is forced to inactive and its active delay timer
is reset.

Should the resultant fuel limit value be greater than the PID speed controller output its active
delay timer is reset (if applicable) and the (Function) Status item will display Enabled.

Should the resultant fuel limit value be less than the PID speed controller output the (Function)
Status item will display Active.

All TFL functions include an active delay facility which is configured by the Limit Delay Period
item in the appropriate sub menu. The resultant fuel limit value must be less than the PID speed
controller output for the delay period for an active status to be achieved. The active delay timer
is instantly reset should the resultant fuel limit value be greater than the PID speed controller
output.

Fuel limitation functions may be automatically inhibited. While inhibited, the fuel limitation
function is processed, the (Function) Status item will display Inhibited and an active status will
be masked.

Fuel limitation functions are inhibited based on the following system conditions:

i.- BFL is inhibited while:


- Fuel limit override input is energised
- Current speed setting mode is Generator mode
- Current speed setting mode is Emergency Start mode
- Circuit breaker closed input is energised
- Normal SFL function being processed

ER509/890
Page 34 of 142
ii.- TFL1 is inhibited while:
- Fuel limit override input is energised
- Current speed setting mode is Generator mode
- Current speed setting mode is Emergency Start mode
- Circuit breaker closed input is energised
- Normal SFL function being processed

iii.- TFL2 is inhibited while:


- Fuel limit override input is energised
- Current speed setting mode is Generator mode
- Current speed setting mode is Emergency Start mode
- Circuit breaker closed input is energised
- Normal SFL function being processed

iv.- TFLclutch-in is inhibited while:


- Fuel limit override input is energised
- Current speed setting mode is Generator mode
- Current speed setting mode is Emergency Start mode
- Local mode select input is energised
- Circuit breaker closed input is energised

v.- TFLfi-fi is inhibited while:


- Fuel limit override input is energised
- Current speed setting mode is Generator mode
- Current speed setting mode is Emergency Start mode
- Circuit breaker closed input is energised

The resultant of each fuel limit is displayed in the (Function) Resultant item, displayed in
actuator positions. When disabled the resultant is actuator position 10.0 (maximum fuel, no
limit).

The lowest of any active fuel limitation functions will be indicated in the Fuel Limitation item in
Engine Status > This Engine

Auto enabling / disabling of fuel limits on a running engine introduces the potential for step
changes in fuelling rate. A stepped reduction of fuelling rate going into a fuel limit is required to
achieve the engine protection function. A stepped increase of fuelling rate coming out of a fuel
limit is avoided by application of the fuel limit release ramp feature.

The fuel limit release ramp feature increments fuelling at the rate defined in the Release Ramp
Rate item in Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > General menu, until the fuelling rate
equals that defined by the function currently defining the fuelling rate.

The Release Ramp Status item in Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > Boost and Fuel Control >
Fuel Limits > Torque display Active while the feature is applying the ramp. Indication of the
previous fuel limit function is maintained in the Fuel Limitation item in Engine Status > This
Engine for this period

Fuel limitation active output will be energised while any BFL or TFL function or the fuel limit
release ramp feature is active.

ER509/890
Page 35 of 142
While a fuel limit function is active, should the measured speed be greater than the ramped
setspeed by a value greater than Reset Speed Margin item in Control > Fuel Control > Fuel
Limits > General, the Viking speed controller PID integrator output value will be set to the
current fuelling rate to enable instant fuelling rate reduction.

The Reset Speed Margin item is presented as % of Nominal Speed, Nominal Speed item in
Speed Setting > General menu.

ER509/890
Page 36 of 142
9.3 Definition of Boost Fuel Limitation Function

The Boost Fuel Limitation function provides a limitation of fuelling rate as a function of boost
pressure.

The Boost pressure analogue input is scaled by the following items in Control > Fuel Control >
Fuel Limits > Boost > General menu:

Minimum Boost / % value is represented by Minimum Boost / mA value


Maximum Boost / % value is represented by Maximum Boost / mA.value

The two boost fuel limit characteristics have been preset in Control > Fuel Control > Fuel
Limits > Boost > Actuator Charact. and Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > Boost >
Fuel Rack Charact, but can be adjusted on a running engine by editing Data Points 0-10 items.

10

Governor x x
Output / x Parameters
Actuator Data Pt 0 to 10
x x
Division
x x x
x
x x

0
0 Boost % of Range 100

and

10

Governor x x
Output / x Parameters
% Fuel Rack Data Pt 0 to 10
x x
x x x
x
x x

0
0 Boost % of Range 100

The selection for witch characteristic table to be used is via item selection in Control > Fuel
Control > Fuel Limits > Boost > General menu

It should be noted that the parameters and Minimum Boost mA and Maximum Boost mA are the
transducer current output representing 0% and 100% boost for scaling purposes.

Setting all Data Points items to '10.0'(if selecting using actuator characteristic table) or '100.0'(if
selecting using fuel rack characteristic table), the maximum value, will prevent any limitation.

ER509/890
Page 37 of 142
9.4 Definition of Torque Fuel Limitation Functions

A Torque Fuel Limitation function provides limitation of fuelling rate as a function of measured
engine speed.

The two torque fuel limitation characteristics have been preset in Control > Fuel Control > Fuel
Limits > Torque: x > Actuator Charact. and Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > Torque:
x > Fuel Rack Charact. but can be adjusted on a running engine by editing Data Points 0-10
items.

10

Governor x x
Output / Parameters
x Data Pt 0 to 10
Actuator x x
Division
x x x
x
x x

0
Low. Engine Speed High.
RPM RPM
and

10

Governor x x
Output / Parameters
x Data Pt 0 to 10
% Fuel Rack x x
x x x
x
x x

0
Low. Engine Speed High.
RPM RPM
The selection for witch characteristic table to be used is via item selection in Control > Fuel
Control > Fuel Limits > Torque: x > General menu

It should be noted that the torque limit speed range is determined by the High RPM and Low
RPM menu items in Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > Torque: x > General menu.

Setting all Data Points items to '10.0' (if selecting using actuator characteristic table) or '100.0'(if
selecting using fuel rack characteristic table), the maximum value, will prevent any limitation.

Note: ‘x‘ can be ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘clutch-in’ or ‘fi-fi’.

ER509/890
Page 38 of 142
10. SYSTEMS FUNCTIONS

10.1 Major Alarm

The major alarm active status output is normally energised healthy.

While any of the following alarm conditions are active the output will be de-energised:

- Actuator wirebreak
- Pickup fault
- Flash memory error

Additionally, by failure mode, the output will be de-energised should a Viking power supply or
processor problem occur.

10.1.1 Pickup Fault Alarm

The pickup fault alarm will be initiated if the Viking speed measurement, having previously been
present and above Running Speed item value in Speed Setting > General, reduces below
speed pickup detection speed without a stop having been initiated.

This would occur if the pickup signal was lost while the engine was running but could also be
due to an engine stall.

While the alarm is active the following alarm conditions will be maintained:

- Viking LED display alarm code A16 indicated.


- Pickup Fault item in Alarm > Pickups displays Pickups Failed.
- Major alarm output de-energised.

If the system is not configured to support backup governing the following conditions will be
applied in addition to the above alarm conditions, and maintained while the alarm condition is
active:

- Fault Shutdown item in Alarm > General displays Shutdown.


- Stop condition latched by Shutdown, including:
Stop output energised.
Viking fuelling demand driven to actuator position 0.
Start block applied (shutdown and stop interlocks).

The alarm will be reset when the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) is energised.

If the system is configured to support backup governing the Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition
will be achieved and the following conditions will be applied in addition to the above alarm
conditions, and maintained while the alarm condition is active:

- Ballhead item in Alarm > General displays Warning


- Viking fuelling demand driven to:
actuator position 0 for normal acting actuator mode.
actuator position 10 for reverse acting actuator mode.
- Start block applied (either ballhead governor or Viking running).

The alarm will be reset when the Viking receives a stop input.

ER509/890
Page 39 of 142
10.1.2 Actuator Wirebreak Alarm

The actuator wirebreak condition is detected (running or stationary) using the fuelling rate
monitoring circuit within the Viking hardware which checks that the return current matches the
output current. Detection of the actuator wirebreak condition can be enabled / disabled by the
Actuator Wire Break item in System > General menu

The actuator wirebreak alarm is initiated and latched when the monitoring circuit detects that the
feedback signal does not match the drive, therefore current flow is not achieved due to an open
circuit condition.

The actuator wirebreak condition cannot be detected while the fuelling rate current drive is 0mA.
0mA drive occurs only while a shutdown is active when operating in normal acting actuator
mode. In this situation, following stop timer timeout, the software will drive a current pulse
equivalent to actuator position 1 for 1 second, every 15 seconds.

While the alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- Viking LED display alarm code A21 indicated


- Actuator Wirebreak item in Alarm > General displays Warning.
- Major alarm output de-energised.
- General alarm output de-energised.

If the system is not configured to support backup governing the following conditions will be
applied in addition to the above alarm conditions, and maintained while the alarm condition is
active:

- Fault Shutdown item in Alarm > General displays Shutdown.


- Stop condition latched by Shutdown, including:
Stop output energised.
Viking fuelling demand driven to actuator position 0.
Start block applied (shutdown and stop interlocks).

The alarm will be reset when the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) is energised if the
Viking speed measurement = 0rpm and the wirebreak condition no longer exists. The status of
the wirebreak condition is logged during the actuator position 1 pulse period and is used to
process a reset during the subsequent 15 second period.

If the system is configured to support backup governing the Viking ‘run on ballhead’ condition
will be achieved and the following conditions will be applied in addition to the above alarm
conditions, and maintained while the alarm condition is active:

- Ballhead item in Alarm > General displays Warning.


- Viking fuelling demand driven to:
actuator position 0 for normal acting actuator mode.
actuator position 10 for reverse acting actuator mode.
- Start block applied (Viking running).

The alarm will be reset when the Viking receives a stop input and the actuator wirebreak
condition is healthy. The alarm can also be reset while the engine is stationary by energising
the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) when the actuator wirebreak condition is healthy

ER509/890
Page 40 of 142
10.1.3 Flash Memory Failure Alarm

Regulateurs Europa must be contacted for advice should this alarm occur, the alarm cannot be
reset.

The flash memory error condition can be detected during Viking initialisation routines or as a
function of a user initiated Viking Vision parameter save (should only be performed when engine
stationary).

While the alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- Viking LED display alarm code A22 indicated


- Flash Memory Fail item in Alarm > General displays Warning
- Major alarm output de-energised
- Stop output energised

ER509/890
Page 41 of 142
10.2 General Alarm

The general alarm active status output is normally energised healthy.

While any of the following alarm conditions are active the output will be de-energised:

- Transducer Failed: Combi. 1 Setspeed - see section 10.2.1


- Transducer Failed: Combi. 2 Setspeed - see section 10.2.2
- Transducer Failed: Fi-Fi Setspeed - see section 10.2.3
- Transducer Failed: Boost Pressure - see section 10.2.4
- Transducer Failed: Start Air Pressure - see section 10.2.5
- Transducer Failed: Fuel Rack Position - see section 10.2.6
- Transducer Failed: kW Load - see section 10.2.7
- Transducer Failed: Load Balance Offset - see section 10.2.8

- Loadshare: Rack Limit - see section 12.2.8


- Loadshare: Trip To Speed Control - see section 12.2.8
- Loadshare: Multi Master - see section 12.2.8
- Loadshare: Engine Stationary - see section 12.2.8

- Pickups: Pickup 1 Failed - see section 5.1


- Pickups: Pickup 2 Failed - see section 5.1
- Pickups: Pickup Change - see section 5.1

- General: Actuator Wire Break - see section 10.1.2


- General: Flash Memory Failed - see section 10.1.3
- General: Main Supply Failed
- General: Backup Supply Failed
- General: ClutchIn Failure - see section 15.3.5
- General: Ballhead On Power Up - see section 6.3
- General: ClutchIn Aborted - see section 15.3.6
- General: Gov No. Out Of Range
- General: Fuel Rack Control - see section 10.4.3.

- CAN: Comms Failed - see section 12.2.2.1


- CAN: Message Missed - see section 12.2.2.1
- CAN: Governor Lost - see section 12.2.2.1
- CAN: Governor ID Clash - see section 12.2.2.1

While the alarm output is in the de-energised state due to one or more of the alarms in the group
currently being active, a new alarm initiation within the group will be indicated through the alarm
output by a pulse to the energised state for a period of 0.5 seconds.

By the failure mode of a Viking power supply or processor problem, the output will be de-
energised.

ER509/890
Page 42 of 142
10.2.1 Combinator Control Mode – Station 1 Speed Setting Transducer Failure Alarm

The alarm is commissioned by the configuration of Tx Fail Monitor item in the Speed Setting >
Combi 1 Mode menu.

- When None is selected, the alarm is permanently de-commissioned.

- When Current Mode is selected, the alarm is commissioned only when combi1 is the
current speed setting mode.

- When Continuous is selected, the alarm is permanently commissioned.

While commissioned, if the analogue input falls below 2mA for a continuous 1 second period the
alarm will be initiated and latched. While the alarm is active the following conditions will be
maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A1 indicated


- Combi1 Setspeed item in Alarm > Transducer displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- Demand setspeed in combi1 speed setting mode forced to Min Setspeed / rpm item
value in Speed Setting > Combi 1 Mode menu.

The alarm is cleared by energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) when the
analogue input has returned to a healthy value or the alarm is decommissioned.

10.2.2 Combinator Control Mode – Station 2 Speed Setting Transducer Failure Alarm

The alarm is commissioned by the configuration of Tx Fail Monitor item in the Speed Setting >
Combi 2 Mode menu.

- When None is selected, the alarm is permanently de-commissioned.

- When Current Mode is selected, the alarm is commissioned only when combi2 is the
current speed setting mode.

- When Continuous is selected, the alarm is permanently commissioned.

While commissioned, if the analogue input falls below 2mA for a continuous 1 second period the
alarm will be initiated and latched. While the alarm is active the following conditions will be
maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A2 indicated


- Combi2 Setspeed item in Alarm > Transducer displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- Demand setspeed in combi2 speed setting mode forced to Min Setspeed / rpm item
value in Speed Setting > Combi 2 Mode menu

The alarm is cleared by energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) when the
analogue input has returned to a healthy value or the alarm is decommissioned.

ER509/890
Page 43 of 142
10.2.3 Fi-Fi Pump Mode Speed Setting Transducer Failure Alarm

The alarm is commissioned by the configuration of Tx Fail Monitor item in the Speed Setting >
Fi-Fi Mode menu.

- When None is selected, the alarm is permanently de-commissioned.

- When Current Mode is selected, the alarm is commissioned only when Fi-Fi is the
current speed setting mode.

- When Continuous is selected, the alarm is permanently commissioned.

While commissioned, if the analogue input falls below 2mA for a continuous 1 second period the
alarm will be initiated and latched. While the alarm is active the following conditions will be
maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A3 indicated


- Fi-Fi Setspeed item in Alarm > Transducer displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- Demand setspeed in Fi-Fi speed setting mode forced to Min Setspeed / rpm item value
in Speed Setting > Fi-Fi Mode menu.

The alarm is cleared by energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) when the
analogue input has returned to a healthy value or the alarm is decommissioned.

10.2.4 Boost Pressure Transducer Failure Alarm

The alarm is commissioned by the configuration of Boost Limit Enable item in the Control >
Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > Boost Limit menu.

- When Disabled is selected, the alarm is not commissioned.

- When Enabled is selected, the alarm is commissioned.

While commissioned, if the analogue input falls below 2mA for a continuous 1 second period the
alarm will be initiated and latched. While the alarm is active the following conditions will be
maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A4 indicated


- Boost Pressure item in Alarm > Transducer displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- Boost Pressure working value forced to 100% to inhibit limitation function

The alarm is cleared by energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) when the
analogue input has returned to a healthy value or the alarm is decommissioned.

ER509/890
Page 44 of 142
10.2.5 Start Air Pressure Transducer Failure Alarm

The alarm is permanently commissioned.

If the analogue input falls below 2mA for a continuous 1 second period the alarm will be initiated
and latched. While the alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A5 indicated


- Start Air Pressure item in Alarm > Transducer displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- Start air pressure working value forced to 0% to ensure start assist fuelling.

The alarm is cleared by energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) when the
analogue input has returned to a healthy value.

10.2.6 Fuel Rack Position Transducer Failure Alarm

The alarm is commissioned by the configuration of Rack Transducer item in the Control > Fuel
Control > Fuel Limits > Fuel Rack Position menu.

- When Not Avail is selected, the alarm is not commissioned.

- When Available is selected, the alarm is commissioned.

While commissioned, if the analogue input falls below 2mA for a continuous 1 second period the
alarm will be initiated and latched. While the alarm is active the following conditions will be
maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A6 indicated


- Fuel Rack Position item in Alarm > Transducer displays Warning
- Measurement Status item in Fuel Control >Fuel Rack Position displays Failed
- Measured Value item in Fuel Control >Fuel Rack Position displays 0%
- General alarm output de-energised
- Fuelling rate reference reverts to the open loop speed PID output

The alarm is cleared by energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) when the
analogue input has returned to a healthy value or the alarm is decommissioned.

ER509/890
Page 45 of 142
10.2.7 kW Load Transducer Failure Alarm

The alarm is commissioned by the circuit breaker closed input status.

- When circuit breaker closed input not energised, the alarm is not commissioned.

- When circuit breaker closed input energised, the alarm is commissioned.

While commissioned, if the analogue input falls below 2mA for a continuous period exceeding
kW Load OOR Period item value in Loadshare > kW Balance > General, the alarm will be
initiated and latched. While the alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A7 indicated


- KW Load item in Alarm > Transducer displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- kW Load values forced to 0%

The alarm is cleared by energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) when the
analogue input has returned to a healthy value or the alarm is decommissioned.

10.2.8 Load Balance Offfset Transducer Failure Alarm

The alarm is commissioned by the configuration of Load Balance Offset item in the Loadshare
> kW Balance > Load Balance Offset menu.

- When Disable is selected, the alarm is not commissioned.

- When Enable is selected, the alarm is commissioned.

While commissioned, if the analogue input falls below 2mA for a continuous 1 second period the
alarm will be initiated and latched. While the alarm is active the following conditions will be
maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A8 indicated


- Load Balance Offset item in Alarm > Transducer displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- load balance offset value forced to 0%

The alarm is cleared by energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) when the
analogue input has returned to a healthy value or the alarm is decommissioned.

ER509/890
Page 46 of 142
10.3 Stop

An alarm reset pulse is generated internally when stop input is energised. Any active alarms will
be cleared on a stop application if the associated initiating condition has returned healthy.

A stop condition is initiated if any of the following conditions exist:

i.- Stop input energised (pulse).

ii.- Fault shutdown alarm active (latched through reset).

iii.- Viking Vision stop initiated (latched through Viking25 alarm, code A28).

While a stop condition is active the following actions are applied:

i.- Engine Status item in Engine Status > This Engine indicates Stop Enable

ii.- Stop engine output energised.

iii.- Fuelling demand driven to actuator position 0.

iv.- Setspeed reset for subsequent start

If the Viking speed measurement exceeds Running Speed item value in Speed Setting >
General when a stop condition is initiated and the current speed setting mode is not emergency
start, the above stop actions are maintained for a minimum period of Stop Time item value in
System > General.

The following additional stop actions are applied during the Stop Time period:

i.- Disengage clutch output energised while clutch engaged input energised

ii.- Trip circuit breaker output energised while circuit breaker closed input energised.

When stop initiation is removed and the Stop Time period has timed out the Viking stop
condition is removed.

If the engine is stationary when the Viking stop condition is removed, the available to start
condition can be achieved if other start interlocks allow.

If the engine is still rotating when the Viking stop condition is removed, start fuel control is
applied such that the setspeed and fuelling demand are defined by the normal or emergency
start control functions.

Following removal of the Viking stop condition, the stop engine output is de-energised when the
engine speed subsequently exceeds Firing Speed.

ER509/890
Page 47 of 142
10.3.1 Stop When ‘run on ballhead’

The Viking will apply stop conditions on detection of a stop initiation when the Viking ‘run on
ballhead’ condition is active (not possible if achieved due to Viking power supply or processor
problem). Functionality will be similar to that described above, with the following differences:

i.- The Fault Shutdown alarm initiation cannot occur. All major fault conditions achieve
‘run on ballhead’ condition when backup governing is supported.

ER509/890
Page 48 of 142
10.4 Fuel Rack Position Feedback

Unless stated otherwise, menu items associated with fuel rack position, fuelling rate reference
and actuator output trim are presented in sub menu’s of the following menu’s:

Edit > Control > Fuel Control


Display > Fuel Control

If the engine is fitted with a fuel rack position transducer, the Rack Transducer item in Fuel
Rack Position should be selected to Available.

While the fuel rack position analogue input is available and healthy the Measurement Status
item in Fuel Rack Position will display Healthy.

While the Measurement Status item displays Healthy the transducer signal is processed
according to the items in the Fuel Rack Position menu. The mA / Actuator pos 8 item should
be set to represent the transducer output at actuator position 8, The mA / Actuator pos 2 item
should be set to represent the transducer output at actuator position 2, the %Rack/Actuator pos
8 item should be set to represent percentage fuel rack position at actuator position 8 and the
%Rack/Actuator pos 2 item should be set to represent percentage fuel rack position at actuator
position 2.

While the Measurement Status item displays Healthy the fuel rack position measurement is
displayed in the Measured Value item in Fuel Rack Position, in %.

The average filter can be applied to the fuel rack position analogue input. The filter stages is
selected via item Input Filter Stages in Edit > Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Rack position.
Minimum stages is 1 and maximum stages is 50. The input value will not be filtered if item Input
Filter Stages is set to 1.

10.4.1 Fuelling Rate Reference

The Fuel Ref Source item in General displays the currently in use source of the fuelling rate
reference.

Under the following conditions the governor actuator output will be used to provide an open loop
fuelling rate reference. The Fuel Ref Source item will display Gov Output:

i.- Fuel rack position analogue input not available


ii.- Fuel rack position analogue input failed
iii.- Engine stationary
iv.- Running on ballhead condition active

Otherwise, the fuel rack position feedback measurement is used to provide a closed loop fuelling
rate. The Fuel Ref Source item will display Rack Feedback.

The current fuelling rate reference value is displayed in the Fuel Ref Value item in General, in
%.

The following software functions use the fuelling rate reference value:

i.- Actuator output trim function - section 10.4.2


ii.- Load Setpoint function - section 10.5.8
iii.- Load Switch Outputs - section 10.6.2

ER509/890
Page 49 of 142
10.4.2 Actuator Output Trim Function

This function applies a bias to the governor actuator output signal. The value of the applied bias
is the resultant of processing the error between the governor actuator output value and the
current fuelling rate reference value.

The function is only effective when the Fuel Ref Source item in General displays Rack
Feedback and relies on the correct setup of the fuel rack position transducer. Under these
conditions the 0-1A fuelling rate control output signal is trimmed by the bias value such that the
feedback signal equals the governor actuator output value, overcoming any calibration errors
that may exist within the fuelling system.

When Fuel Ref Source item displays Gov Output the fuel control is effectively open loop as the
function constantly generates a bias value of 0. This is used under conditions in which the rack
feedback signal cannot match the governor actuator output value.

The governor actuator output value is displayed in the Governor Output item in General, in %.
The fuelling rate reference value is displayed in the Fuel Ref Value item in General, in %.
The Actuator Error item value in General is calculated as Governor Output - Fuel Ref Value and
is displayed in %.

The Actuator Bias item value in General is generated by integrating the Actuator Error value.
The constant of integration is defined by the Integ Gain item in Control > Control Gains >
Actuator Control. The Actuator Bias item value is limited to +/- the % value defined in the Bias
Limit item.

The Actuator Bias item value is added to the Governor Output item value and it is the resultant
value that is used to generate the 0-1A fuelling rate control output signal.

10.4.3 Fuel Rack Control Alarm

Alarm is applied to fuel rack control function. The configuration for the alarm is in menu Edit >
Control > control Gains > Actuator Control.

The fuel rack control alarm will be set if alarm is enabled, ‘run on ballhead’ is not active and
difference between Fuel Rack Position Feedback and Governor Output is outside the Match
Window +/- for an Alarm Delay time. While the alarm is active the following conditions will be
maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A32 indicated


- Fuel Rack Control item in Alarm > General displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised

The alarm is cleared by energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse) when
difference between Fuel Rack Position Feedback and Governor Output is inside the Match
Window +/- or the alarm is disabled or ‘run on ballhead’ is active.

The alarm status (not latched) is displayed in menu Display > Fuel Control > General.

Note: The value for Fuel Rack Position Feedback can be viewed via item Measured Value in
the menu Display > Fuel Control > Fuel Rack Position and the value for Governor
Output can be viewed via the menu Display > Fuel Control > General.

ER509/890
Page 50 of 142
10.5 Analogue Outputs

Unless stated otherwise, configuration parameters detailed below are presented in the System
> Analogue Outputs menu.

10.5.1 Engine Speed 1

The engine speed 1 output represents the measured engine speed.

The rpm value in Min. Tacho1 Speed is represented by 4mA and the rpm value in Max. Tacho1
Speed is represented by 20mA. All positions between can be calculated on a linear basis.

10.5.2 Engine Speed 2

The engine speed 2 output represents the measured engine speed.

The rpm value in Min. Tacho2 Speed is represented by 4mA and the rpm value in Max. Tacho2
Speed is represented by 20mA. All positions between can be calculated on a linear basis.

10.5.3 PID Speed Controller Position

The PID speed controller position output represents the actuator output prior to any limitation.

Actuator position 0 is represented by 4mA and the actuator position value in PID Maximum Load
is represented by 20mA. All positions between can be calculated on a linear basis.

The output is filtered with the number of points being determined by PID Filter Stages.

10.5.4 Actuator Output Position

The actuator output position represents the actuator output with any limitations.

Actuator position 0 is represented by 4mA and the actuator position value in Act. Maximum Load
is represented by 20mA. All positions between can be calculated on a linear basis.

The output is filtered with the number of points being determined by Act. Filter Stages.

10.5.5 Least Fuel Limiter Position

The least fuel limiter position output represents the maximum actuator output available,
determined by the lowest resultant value of fuel limitation functions in the enabled or active
state.

Actuator position 0 is represented by 4mA and actuator position 10 is represented by 20mA. All
positions between can be calculated on a linear basis.

ER509/890
Page 51 of 142
10.5.6 Available Load

The available load output represents the calculated difference in actuator positions between the
least fuel limiter position and the actuator output position.

A minus 2 position resultant is represented by 4mA and a plus 6 resultant is represented by


20mA. All positions between can be calculated on a linear basis.

10.5.7 Ramped Setspeed

The ramped setspeed output represents the ramped setspeed.

The rpm value in Min. Ramp Setpeed is represented by 4mA and the rpm value in Max. Ramp
setspeed is represented by 20mA. All positions between can be calculated on a linear basis.

10.5.8 Load Setpoint

The load setpoint output is a main engine output used as a target load signal by an auxiliary
engine to load share with the main engine.

Configuration parameters for the load setpoint output are presented in the Loadshare > Load
Setpoint Output menu. The output will be maintained at 4mA while Drive Configuration item is
set to Disable.

While offload input is not energised, the output to the auxiliary engine will be proportional to this
main engine load, referenced from either generator kW % value or the fuelling rate reference %
value, according to the selection made in Drive Configuration item.

The main engine load reference is multiplied by Scaling Factor item value to provide
compensation for a different auxiliary engine size or generator output.

0% load setpoint is represented by 4mA output and 100% load setpoint is represented by 20mA.
All positions between can be calculated on a linear basis, for example:

A load reference of 20.00% and a Scaling Factor of 2.5 will give 50.00% output (12mA).

While circuit breaker closed input is energised and the Master / Slave loadshare mode select
items are not satisfied, if offload input is energised the current load setpoint output is ramped up
at Command Rate % / sec item value. This causes the auxiliary engine to take more load and
thus off load this main engine.

The trip circuit breaker output will be energised when the load reference value is below Off Load
Trip Level item value.

The output will be maintained at 4mA while the engine is stationary, the circuit breaker closed
input is not energised or while the selected main engine load reference signal is not available
due to:

- kW Load Transducer Failed alarm


- kW Transducer item in Loadshare > kW Balance > General set to Not Avail.
- Fuel Rack Transducer Failed alarm
- Rack Tx Availability item in Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Rack Position set to Not
Avail.

ER509/890
Page 52 of 142
10.6 Level Switch Outputs

10.6.1 Speed Switch Outputs

Three speed switch digital outputs are implemented. Configuration parameters detailed below
are presented in the System > Level Outputs menu.

Speed switch 1 output energises when measured engine speed increases above Speed 1 Level
rpm value. Speed switch 1 output de-energises when measured engine speed decreases below
Speed 1 Level - Speed 1 Hysterisis rpm values.

Speed switch 2 output energises when measured engine speed increases above Speed 2 Level
rpm value. Speed switch 2 output de-energises when measured engine speed decreases below
Speed 2 Level - Speed 2 Hysterisis rpm values.

Speed switch 3 output energises when measured engine speed increases above Speed 3 Level
rpm value. Speed switch 3 output de-energises when measured engine speed decreases below
Speed 3 Level - Speed 3 Hysterisis rpm values.

10.6.2 Load Switch Outputs

Two load switch digital outputs are implemented. Configuration parameters detailed below are
presented in the System > Level Outputs menu.

Load switch 1 output energises when the fuelling rate reference % value increases above Load
1 Level % value. Load switch 1 output de-energises when the fuelling rate reference % value
decreases below Load 1 Level - Load 1 Hysterisis % values.

Load switch 2 output energises when the fuelling rate reference % value increases above Load
2 Level % value. Load switch 2 output de-energises when the fuelling rate reference % value
decreases below Load 2 Level - Load 2 Hysterisis % values

ER509/890
Page 53 of 142
10.7 Real Time Clock

10.7.1 General

The real time clock is an independent timer and directly derived from the 32kHz oscillator clock. It can
be maintained running when power is turned off.

10.7.2 Synchronous Clock

Following steps are to set the date and time of the system clock.

1) Type appropriate date and time in the menu Edit > Hardware > Real Time Clock >
Synchronous RTC
2) Press Save button
3) Change ‘Synchronous Time’ item to ‘Enable’ in the menu Edit > Hardware > Real Time Clock
> Synchronous RTC
4) Press ‘Save’ button
5) Change ‘Synchronous Time’ item back to ‘Disable’ in the menu Edit > Hardware > Real Time
Clock > Synchronous RTC.
6) Press ‘Save’ button

Note: Whenever v35 see item ’Synchronous Time’ (in the menu Hardware > Real Time Clock >
Synchronous RTC) toggling from ‘Enable’ to ‘Disable’(above steps 3 to 6) the system clock
will be synchronised to the date and time typed in the menu Hardware > Real Time Clock >
Synchronous RTC

10.7.3 Adjust Clock

10.7.3.1 Make clock go faster or slower

The clock can be adjusted running slower or faster. To do this go to Edit > Hardware > Real Time
Clock > Adjust RTC

1) Increase the number in ‘RTC Prescaler’ to slow the clock down or decrease the number ‘RTC
Prescaler’ to make clock running faster.
2) Change ‘Adjust Prescaler’ item to ‘Enable’
3) Go to Edit > Configuration > General and highlight ‘Save All Edited Data’ by click second
column (Value column) of ‘Save All Edited Data’.
4) Press ‘Save’ button

The red LED will light up. The new value will be active after red LED turned off. If red LED does not
turn on repeat steps 3 and 4.

10.7.3.2 Add offset to the clock

10.7.3.2.1 Add offset once

The clock can be adjusted by adding time offset once. To do this go to Edit > Hardware > Real Time
Clock > Adjust RTC

1) Type desired offset number(minute) in item ‘Off Set Time’.


2) Go to Edit > Configuration > General and highlight ‘Save All Edited Data’ by click second
column (Value column) of ‘Save All Edited Data’.
3) Press ‘Save’ button.
4) Wait red LED turnning on and off. If red LED does not turn on repeat step 2 and 3.
5) Change ‘Adjust ByOffset Once’ item to ‘Enable’

ER509/890
Page 54 of 142
6) Press Save button

7) Change ‘Adjust ByOffset Once’ item back to ‘Disable’


8) Press Save button

Note: a) Negative offset number can be typed in item ‘Off Set Time’ to decrease the time.
b) To enable the function(Add offset once) again, ‘Adjust ByOffset Once’ item needs to be
toggled from ‘Enable’ to ‘Disable’(above steps 5 to 8) if offset number in item ‘Off Set
Time’ is unchanged. Otherwise repeat above step 1 to 8.

10.7.3.2.2 Auto add offset

The clock can be adjusted by adding time offset every x minutes(adjustable value). To do this go to
Edit > Hardware > Real Time Clock > Adjust RTC

1) Change ‘Auto Adjust ByOffset’ item to ‘Enable’


2) Type desired offset number(minute) in item ‘Off Set Time’.
3) Type desired time delay x (minute) in item ‘AdjustByOffset Delay’.
4) Go to Edit > Configuration > General and highlight ‘Save All Edited Data’ by click
second column (‘Value’ column) of ‘Save All Edited Data’.
5) Press ‘Save’ button

The red LED will light up. The offset time will be added to the clock every x minutes after red LED
turned off. If red LED does not turn on repeat step 4 and 5.

Note: a) Negative offset number can be typed in item ‘Off Set Time’ to decrease the time.
b) If offset number in item ‘Off Set Time’ or time delay x in item ‘AdjustByOffset Delay’ is
changed, above steps 2 or 3 to 5 are needed to effect the changes.
c) To disable the function change ‘Auto Adjust ByOffset’ item to ‘Disable’ then repeat
above steps 4 and 5.
d) The function ‘Auto Add Offset’ only works when the unit is powered up.

10.7.4 Display Clock

The current date and time are displayed in Display > Hardware > Real Time Clock > Current Time.
The status of adjusting clock are displayed in Display > Hardware > Real Time Clock > Adjust RTC.

ER509/890
Page 55 of 142
11. ENGINE TYPE SELECTION

The engine type can be selected from the Engine Types Selection menu in the Viking Vision
program. In addition to this the settings for any of the engine types can be adjusted.

The Every Other menu item is used to enable markers to be measured over two revolutions.
The type of input can be chosen for each of the pickups by selecting Low or High Frequency.
The pickups can also be individually enabled / disabled if required. The actuator mode can be
selected between normal and reverse acting. An offset can be applied to the actuator output for
V engines.

If the engine has a different configuration of markers/teeth than that shown in the menu, then the
following parameters should be adjusted:

1. If the signal is a low frequency type (i.e. from a marker) then the ‘markers’ value
requires adjustment.

2. If the signal is a high frequency type (i.e. from the starter ring) then both the ‘markers’
and ‘teeth’ values require adjustment.

Note :-

1. Disabling both pickups will prevent any speed measuring.


2. It is also possible to enable / disable individual pickups via the Pickups menu.
3. To simulate no engine type selected both pickups can be disabled in the Pickups menu.
4. If any changes are made to the engine types or a new type is selected a full save is
required to allow these changes to be initialised prior to use.
5. See Appendix A for engine marker recommendations.

ER509/890
Page 56 of 142
12 LOADSHARING

12.1 Loadsharing Overview

Unless stated otherwise, menu items associated with Loadsharing are presented in sub menu’s
of the following menu’s:

Edit > Loadshare


Display > Loadshare

12.1.1 Loadshare Modes

The primary mode of achieving engine loadshare is Master / Slave Isochronous (island)
Mode.

All engine governors are nodes on a CAN Bus communications network. Serial loadshare
information is communicated between all healthy governors.

The status of electrical and mechanical interconnections representing the generation and
propulsion machinery arrangement of each engine are hardwired to its governor in accordance
with the Regulateurs Europa recommended wiring scheme. The governors are able to
determine engine loadsharing groups from this information.

Within each group, one governor is established as the Master, which performs isochronous
speed governing for the group such that the system speed / electrical frequency is maintained
constant over the load range.

All other governors within the group are determined as Slaves. Slave governor fuelling rates are
the resultant of instruction from the Master modified by various load balance / following functions
processed at the slave to maintain sharing of load.

An alternative mode of achieving engine loadshare (under fault conditions or for manual control)
is Droop Mode. A serial communications bus is not required as no information is
communicated between governors

All governors perform speed control to a droop characteristic such that the system speed /
electrical frequency is not constant over load range.

The droop speed control function achieves stable load control of engines running in parallel, the
sharing of load being a function of the individual unit droop settings.

A Load Setpoint Function provides a further engine loadshare facility, though only between a
main engine and its auxiliary.

A main engine governor analogue output signal provides its auxiliary engine with a load target.
The analogue output signal is described in section 10.5.8.

ER509/890
Page 57 of 142
12.1.2 Mode Display on Viking25 display module

The current operating mode of this governor number unit is displayed, prefixed ‘L’.

Mode Mode Mode Description


Decimal Hexadecimal
Number Number
8 0x08 Slave + On Load
12 0x0C Slave + On Load + On MLL
24 0x18 Slave + Off Loading + On Load

40 0x28 Master + On Load


44 0x2C Master + On Load + On MLL

72 0x48 Masterless droop + On Load


74 0x4A Masterless isochronous + On Load

96 0x60 Droop
97 0x61 Droop + Ballhead
104 0x68 Droop + On Load

128 0x80 Isochronous


136 0x80 Isochronous + On Load
144 0x90 Isochronous + Off Loading

12.1.3 kW Load Measurement

If the engine is driving a shaft generator fitted with a kW load transducer, the kW Transducer
item in kW Balance > General should be selected to Available.

While the kW load analogue input is available and healthy the transducer output signal is
processed according to the items in the kW Balance > General menu. The Maximum kW Load
% and mA and Minimum kW Load % and mA items should be set to match the transducer
output signal range. The % values are referenced to the rated engine power, set in the Rated
kW item.

The scaled electrical load measurement for this governor is displayed in the kW Load items in
kW Load, displayed in both % and kW.

ER509/890
Page 58 of 142
12.2 Master / Slave Isochronous (island mode) Overview

The master / slave loadshare mode can support applications involving upto 8 engine systems.

This software version has been tested to support 4 engines and 3 interconnectors in the
generation and propulsion machinery arrangement illustrated below:

While an engine (ME 1-4) is running off load its operating mode will be isochronous, code 128

An engine running in isochronous mode will join the master / slave loadshare while its master /
slave loadshare mode select requirement is satisfied. It will become either a master or a slave
unit. Should the unit be determined a master, its operating mode will initially be code 40. Should
the unit be determined a slave, its operating mode will initially be code 8.

On load engines connected together through the following interconnectors represent a


loadshare group. The groups master performs speed control and the slaves follow the masters
fuelling:

- CL1 and CL2 through PROP1 gearbox


- CB1 and CB2 and Bus Tie
- CL3 and CL4 through PROP2 gearbox

While a slaves kW balance mode select requirement is satisfied it will perform kW balancing to
achieve precise sharing of generation load across shaft generators (G1 and G2) within the
loadshare group.

While a slaves input status matches the rack offset follow requirement it will perform rack offset
following to achieve open loop sharing of propulsion loads on shafts into the common gearbox
its shares with its ‘twin’ unit.

ER509/890
Page 59 of 142
12.2.1 CAN serial Communications

The Load Sharing CAN Bus network allows CAN communications between all governors
connected to the Bus. Units exchange information according to the Regulateurs Europa
communications protocol CANACE-2. This software utilises data set A.

Each governor has a unique governor number / network identity which is set in Governor
Number item in Loadshare > General. On governor power-up, communication will start after a
short time period.

Measurement, control, status and alarm information is exchanged between governors over the
network. This information is used for the load sharing operation and for display in the Display >
Engine Status > All Engines sub menus (section 13).

Unless stated otherwise, menu items associated with the CAN Bus communications are
presented in sub menu’s of the following menu’s:

Edit > Hardware > Serial > CAN


Display > Hardware > Serial > CAN

12.2.1.1 CAN Communication Faults

Once a unit (‘this unit) receives a message from another unit (‘other unit’), this unit considers the
other unit to be active on the CAN Bus and the Valid Status item in Display > Engine Status >
All Engines > Governor Number (other unit) > Status displays active. This unit maintains an
active status for the other unit until this unit is powered down or a masterless reset is applied to
the system.

A masterless reset is applied by energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input for a period
of >5seconds. Application of a masterless reset at this unit applies a pulsed masterless reset to
all units on the CAN Bus.

Governor ID Clash Alarm

If 2 or more active units have the same governor number / network identity the alarm will be
initiated and latched.

While the alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A34 indicated


- Governor Identity item in Alarm > CAN displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- This unit forced into Masterless mode

The alarm is reset by applying a masterless reset.

ER509/890
Page 60 of 142
Message Missed Alarm

While this unit considers another unit active, if this unit fails to receive a message from the other
unit on a number of consecutive protocol cycles that is greater than Max. No Single Reply item
in CAN Comms. Configure menu the alarm will be initiated and latched

While the alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A32 indicated


- Message Missed item in Alarm > CAN displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised

The alarm is reset by applying the reset alarm input or fault reset (pulse) input. If the fault is
intermittent the alarm may re-activate immediately.

Governor Lost Alarm

While this unit considers another unit active, if this unit fails to receive all messages from the
other unit for a period greater than Max. Gov. Lost Delay item in CAN Comms. Configure
menu the alarm will be initiated and latched

While the alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A33 indicated


- Governor Lost item in Alarm > CAN displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- This unit forced into Masterless mode

The alarm is reset by applying a masterless reset. If the fault is intermittent the alarm may re-
activate immediately.

Comms Failed Alarm

If this unit fails to receive all messages from all other units that it considers active for a period
greater than Max. No Comms. Delay item in CAN Comms. Configure menu the alarm will be
initiated and latched

While the alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A31 indicated


- Comms Failed item in Alarm > CAN displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- This unit forced into Masterless mode

The alarm is reset by applying a masterless reset. If the fault is intermittent the alarm may re-
activate immediately.

Note:- While any of the above alarms are active, this unit will continue to transmit messages at
20mS intervals

ER509/890
Page 61 of 142
12.2.1.2 CAN Communication Display Menu Items

The following menu items are provided diagnostic purposes only and are not required for normal
usage.

CAN State item is an indication of the status of the internal protocol. The item will display one of
the following :-

Stopped Protocol is disabled or has errors


Running Protocol is running (this does not indicate any message is being
received)

CAN Message item is an indication of the status of message reception from all units. The item
will display one of the following :-

Stopped No messages are being received


Started Messages are being received

CAN Group Message item is an indication of the status of message reception from all units in
the same group as this unit. The item will display one of the following :-

Stopped No group messages are being received


Started Group messages are being received

Clashed ID item is an indication of the governor number having same governor number /
network identity.

12.2.1.3 CAN Communication Edit Menu Items

The Governor Configure menu provides a facility for development purpose only:

By toggling this menu item (governor number N) from Disable to Enable it sends the
information that the governor (number N) has been removed from the bus temporarily to
all units. Then the governor number N (N = 1,2…8) lost alarm can be cleared by reset.

The CAN Comms. Configure menu provides the following:

CAN enable item can be used to enable / disable processing of the CAN communications

Reset Time Delay item defines the time delay for starting communication after a masterless
reset.

Max No Single Reply item – see section 12.2.1.1

Max No Comms Delay item – see section 12.2.1.1

Max Gov. Lost Delay item – see section 12.2.1.1


.

ER509/890
Page 62 of 142
12.2.1.4 CAN Bus Status Indication – Viking25 Display Module

The status of communications between units can be displayed on the 7 Segment display module
mounted on the V25 main board.

Mode Display item in System > General menu defines the method of display, the options being:

Disable: Suppresses display of status of communications between units

4 Engine: Includes display of status of communications between governor numbers /


network identities 1,2,3,4 in the 4 characters of the display module within a time
slot in the scrolling display of governor data.

8 Engine: Includes display of status of communications between governor numbers /


network identities 1,2,3,4, followed by 5,6,7,8 in the 4 characters of the display
module within 2 successive time slots in the scrolling display of governor data.

4 Engine No Scroll: Displays status of communications between governor numbers /


network identities 1,2,3,4 in the 4 characters of the display module (no other
governor data displayed).

8 Engine No Scroll: Displays status of communications between governor numbers /


network identities 1,2,3,4 followed by 5,6,7,8in the 4 characters of the display
module (no other governor data displayed).

Each character represents a governor, numbered left to right 1,2,3,4, and for 8 engine
configuration is followed by the status of the governors 5,6,7 and 8. The following interpretation
should be applied to the CAN Bus status indication display:

A number is displayed:
This unit is communicating with the governor whose number is shown

“-“ is displayed:
This unit is not communicating with the governor indicated by the position of the
symbol.

“=” is displayed:
The unit has the same number as the position of the symbol (i.e no status can
be displayed, since this would represent the status of communication with this
unit and itself).

ER509/890
Page 63 of 142
Example 1: 4 Engine Config:

Display = 2. 3. 4.

Interpretation:
This unit is Governor Number = 1.
Communication status is OK with Governors 2, 3 and 4.

Display 1. = 3. –

Interpretation:
This unit is Governor Number = 2.
Communication status is OK with Governors 1 and 3, but Governor number 4 is
NOT communicating.

Example 2: 8 Engine Config:

Display 1. - 3. 4. followed by….


5. 6. = 8.

Interpretation:
This unit is Governor Number = 7.
Communication status is OK with Governors 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 8 but governor
Number 2 is NOT communicating.

ER509/890
Page 64 of 142
12.2.2 Master / Slave Loadshare Groups

Engines that are on load and connected together through interconnectors represent a loadshare
group. A number of independent loadshare groups may exist at one time.

This Viking25 presents 3off Viking25 digital inputs to receive interconnector status, this enables
the software to support up to 4 loadshare groups: A,B,C,D.

An interconnector may represent a circuit breaker status or a combination of circuit breaker and
bus tie breaker status achieving electrical connections between engines. An interconnector may
also represent a combination of clutch status achieving mechanical connections between
engines through a gearbox. Interconnector wiring should be implemented in accordance with
Regulateurs Europa recommended wiring scheme.

While Intcon1 Config item in Groups is selected to Normal interconnector 1 will be considered
closed when digital Input #46 is high.

While Intcon1 Config item in Groups is selected to Inverted interconnector 1 will be considered
closed when digital Input #46 is low.

While Intcon2 Config item in Groups is selected to Normal interconnector 2 will be considered
closed when digital Input #47 is high.

While Intcon2 Config item in Groups is selected to Inverted interconnector 2 will be considered
closed when digital Input #47 is low.

While Intcon3 Config item in Groups is selected to Normal interconnector 3 will be considered
closed when digital Input #48 is high.

While Intcon3 Config item in Groups is selected to Inverted interconnector 3 will be considered
closed when digital Input #48 is low.

The Load Sharing Group item in Display > Engine Status > All Engines > Governor Number
(other unit) > Status provides indication of the group the unit is in.

ER509/890
Page 65 of 142
12.2.3 Initiation of Master / Slave Loadshare

While an engine is running in isochronous mode the unit will constantly check for the
requirement to enter master / slave loadshare.

With all items in the Mode Select Config menus selected to Yes, the requirement to enter
master / slave loadshare to share generator load is defined by the following conditions:

I/P #40 Loadshare energised AND


I/P #38 Bus Tie energised AND
I/P #33 Circuit Breaker energised

Selecting No in I/P #40 Loadshare menu item within the Master / Slave > Mode Select Config
menu removes this input from the requirement.

Selecting No in I/P #38 Bus Tie menu item within the kW Balance > Mode Select Config menu
removes this input from the requirement.

I/P #33 Circuit Breaker is always a requirement.

With all items in the Mode Select Config menus selected to Yes, the requirement to enter
master / slave loadshare to share propulsion load is defined by the following conditions:

I/P #40 Loadshare energised AND


I/P #34 Clutch Engaged energised

Selecting No in I/P #40 Loadshare menu item within the Master / Slave > Mode Select Config
menu removes this input from the requirement to enter master / slave loadshare.

I/P #34 Clutch Engaged is always a requirement.

The unit will process the master / slave loadshare functionality while there is a requirement to
enter master / slave loadshare to share either generator or propulsion load.

On entering master / slave loadshare, while conditions do not force masterless or droop mode,
the unit will determine whether it should run in master or slave mode.

The unit initially runs in slave mode. The unit will assess the preferred master and governor
number / network identity status of all other units in its loadshare group. If the required
conditions are satisfied for a short period of time this unit will achieve mastership and run in
master mode. The operating as master output will be energised while the unit runs in master
mode.

ER509/890
Page 66 of 142
12.2.4 Off-Loading

While the load reduction input is de-energised the load reduction output is de-energised.

If the load reduction input is energised while the Application Sel item in System > Clutch
Control menu selected to Multi Eng (this unit configured as part of a two engine - single shaft
gearbox installation) and both this unit and the twin unit clutches are engaged, the internal
reduce propulsion load requirement will be active and the load reduction output will be
maintained de-energised. Otherwise, while the load reduction input is energised the internal
reduce propulsion load requirement will not be active and the load reduction output and fuel
limitation output will be energised.

While the offload input is energised and this unit is not the only unit in its loadshare group, or the
internal reduce propulsion load requirement is active, this unit is forced to slave mode and code
L24 is displayed.

If it is the offload input that is energised load will be ramped off this unit by the reduction of
engine fuelling at the rate defined in Reduce Load Rate item in Master / Slave > General, to the
fuelling rate defined in Off Load Fuel Target item in Master / Slave > General. If the electrical
load measurement is available and healthy the trip breaker output will be energised when the
measured kW is below Off Load kW Trip item in Master / Slave > General.

The trip breaker output will be de-energised when the offload input is de-energised.

If it is the load reduction input that is energised load will be ramped off this unit by the reduction
of engine fuelling at the rate defined in Reduce Load Rate item in Master / Slave > General, to
the fuelling rate defined in Load Reduction Level item in Master / Slave > General.

Note that load reduction is not applied before energising the trip breaker output on a stop
initiation. Therefore the system may suffer a speed bump.

ER509/890
Page 67 of 142
12.2.5 Mastership

Units operating in slave mode continually assess the condition of all units on load in the same
loadshare group. If one the following conditions is maintained for a short period of time, this unit
will achieve mastership:

i.- This unit is the only unit on load in the loadshare group.

ii.- This unit is the only unit on load in the loadshare group that is selected as a preferred
master for the group.

iii.- This unit is selected as a preferred master for the loadshare group and its governor
number / network identity is the lowest of any other units on load in the group that
are selected as a preferred master for the group.

iv.- There are no units on load in the loadshare group that are selected as a preferred
master for the group and this unit has the lowest governor number / network
identity of all the units on load in the group

The operating as master output will be energised while the unit runs in master mode.

The Groups menu enables this unit preferred master status to be configured for each loadshare
group in the system. The following menu items are presented and can be selected to either
Preferred or Not Pref.:

Group A Pref. Master


Group B Pref. Master
Group C Pref. Master
Group D Pref. Master

A unit will be forced to relinquish mastership under the following conditions:

i. Engine stop condition


ii. Engine shutdown active
iii. Off-loading condition active
iv. Reversion to isochronous mode
v. Reversion to droop mode
vi. Reversion to masterless mode

The condition of more than 1 master in a loadshare group can be achieved following group
changes and preferred master changes. This condition will be detected and immediately
resolved by the action of the unit with the highest governor number / network identity being
forced into slave mode.

While running in master mode, performing the role of the speed controller in a loadshare group,
the master performs the following master / slave loadshare functions:

i.- Performs speed governing (controlling the speed / frequency of the loadshare group)
according to its current speed setting mode.

ii.- Collates individual kW load measurements of slaves considered to be on the Mean


Load Line and in the loadshare group and calculates the mean kW load for the
loadshare group.

ER509/890
Page 68 of 142
The master transmits its speed controller output (not affected by fuel limitation) for use by the
slaves in its loadshare group. This value can be filtered in one of two ways to reduce the effects
of governing ‘noise’ from reaching the slave governors. The Rack Filter item in General menu
enables filtering of the fuelling rate to be configured:

When selected to 0 the fuelling rate output will be filtered using a rolling average filter
algorithm. The number of stages can be configured by Rack Filter Stages item in
General, where a value of 1 results in no filtering. The maximum possible number
of stages is 50.

When selected to 1 the fuelling rate output will be filtered using a Bartlett low pass filter
algorithm. The characteristics of this filter are not adjustable.

ER509/890
Page 69 of 142
12.2.6 Slaveship

While running in slave mode the unit is not processing speed governing, slaves use their
masters fuelling rate for the basis of their own fuelling rate. Slaves process their own fuel
limitation.

On entering slave mode the unit will display code 8. The unit will initially ramp its fuelling rate to
match its masters fuelling, taking load as it does so, applying the ramp rate defined in Incoming
Match Ramp and General Match Ramp item in Master / Slave > General. The ramp rate
1
Incoming Match Ramp is used when engine enters master / slave loadshare (or ‘On Load
Condition’) first time; otherwise

- If the slave unit has matched to a master.

- If the slave unit has passed through master or masterless mode.

- If the slave unit has passed through droop or base mode plus On Load Condition.

General Match Ramp will be used.

Having matched its masters fuelling rate a slave will follow its masters fuelling rate and may
process either the kW balancing or rack offset following functions.

The slave setspeed demand may be adjusted while not in use. A slaves ramped setspeed is
maintained equal to its measured speed to ensure a bumpless exit from slave mode.

1
Please reference ‘section 12.2.3 (Initiation of Master / Slave Loadshare)’ for how to enter master /
slave loadshare (or ‘On Load Condition’).

ER509/890
Page 70 of 142
12.2.6.1 kW balancing

Slave units can perform a kW balancing function to achieve precise sharing of electrical load
across shaft generators within their loadshare group.

With all items in the Mode Select Config menus selected to Yes, the requirement for a slave
unit to perform the kW balancing function is defined by the following conditions:

I/P #40 Loadshare energised AND


I/P #38 Bus Tie energised AND
I/P #33 Circuit Breaker energised AND
I/P #42 kW Loadshare energised

Selecting No in I/P #40 Loadshare menu item within the Master / Slave > Mode Select Config
menu removes this input from the requirement.

Selecting No in I/P #38 Bus Tie menu item within the kW Balance > Mode Select Config menu
removes this input from the requirement.

I/P #33 Circuit Breaker is always a requirement.

Selecting No in I/P #42 kW Loadshare menu item within the kW Balance > Mode Select Config
menu removes this input from the requirement.

The unit will process the master / slave loadshare functionality while the above requirement is
satisfied and the following process conditions are satisfied:

i.- kW Transducer item in kW Balance > General selected to Available


ii.- kW Load Transducer Failed alarm is not active
iiii.- Unit is not offloading.
iv.- Unit has successfully matched its masters fuelling rate.

While a slave unit is performing kW balance the kW balancing (to twin unit) output is energised.

The load balance offset function may be used to allow a difference in KWatt load between the
generators to be created – see section 12.2.6.2

The kW balancing function generates a bias value based on the error between the slave units
kW load measurement and the mean load calculated by the master.

If NLG Enable item in kW Balance > Non Linear Gain menu is selected to enable the kW
balance non-linear gain function will be applied to the error.

The error is processed by the kW balance PID controller, using the gain constants in kW
Balance > PID Gains menu.

The error value can be limited by the user to the value in kW Balance Limit item in kW Balance
> General. The error value is also limited by the available actuator value

The resultant bias value is displayed in Rack Offset item in kW Load menu and is applied to the
masters fuelling rate. The lowest of this resultant and the slaves fuel limit functions determines
the slaves fuelling rate.

While kW balancing is active, the error value has not reached Rack Limit and the slave fuelling
rate has not reached its limits (pos 0 to pos10), the slave unit is considered to be on the Mean
Load Line and code L12 will be displayed.

ER509/890
Page 71 of 142
12.2.6.2 Load Balance Offset Function

To achieve a difference in KWatt load between generators performing kW balancing, prior to


opening the bus coupler, an adjustable offset can be applied to one of the units. The power
management system will apply an analogue load balance offset signal.

Unless stated otherwise, menu parameters associated with this function are presented in:

Edit > Loadshare > kW Balance > Load Balance Offset


Display > Loadshare > Load Balance Offset

The load balance offset function can be enabled / disabled manually through Load Balance
Offset.

While the load balance offset analogue input is enabled and healthy the signal is processed
according to menu items, where the current value in Minimum LB Offset mA represents a
negative offset value of Maximum LB Offset %, and the current value in Maximum LB Offset mA
represents a positive offset value of Maximum LB Offset %. The null offset mA point falls
halfway between Minimum LB Offset mA and Maximum LB Offset mA menu items.

If the analogue input signal fails the offset is forced to a value of 0%.

The % value is referenced to the rated engine power, set in the Rated kW item in Loadshare >
kW Balance > General menu. The input offset % and kW values are displayed in the Load
Balance Offset items.

The applied offset value is ramped to the offset input signal value at the %/second rate set in
Load Offset Rate. The ramped offset % and kW values are displayed in the Load Balance
Ramp items.

The ramped offset value is added to the kW load value, the resultant is limited to the Maximum
kW Load % and Minimum kW Load % items in Loadshare > kW Balance > General menu
range. The % and kW resultant values are displayed in the Adjusted kW Load items.

The kW balancing function operates such that:

- Application of a negative offset signal value into one unit will result in the kW load of
that unit increasing and the kW load of all other units running in parallel reducing.

- Application of a positive offset signal value into one unit will result in the kW load of that
unit decreasing and the kW load of all other units running in parallel increasing.

The magnitude of kW load increase / decrease is dependant on the offset value and the number
of generators running in parallel.

ER509/890
Page 72 of 142
12.2.6.3 Rack Offset Following

Slave units can perform a rack offset following function to achieve open loop sharing of
mechanical loads on shafts into the common gearbox its shares with its ‘twin’ unit.

This function is utilised in the specific machinery arrangement where a pair of engines are
mechanically connected together through a 2 into 1 gearbox and 1 engine only drives a shaft
generator.

A slave unit will perform rack offset following only while the following conditions are satisfied:

i.- Unit is not offloading.


ii.- Unit has successfully matched its masters fuelling rate.
iii.- Unit is not kW balancing.
iv.- Rack offset following input status is satisfied:
i.- Twin unit kW balancing energised.
ii.- This clutch engaged energised.
iii.- Twin clutch engaged energised.

The rack offset following function uses the rack offset value generated by the kW balance
function of its ‘twin’ unit as its bias value.

The bias value is displayed in Rack Offset item in kW Load menu and is applied to the masters
fuelling rate, the resultant determines the slaves fuelling rate.

ER509/890
Page 73 of 142
12.2.7 Masterless Mode

Master / Slave Isochronous loadshare relies on CAN Bus communications to be healthy,


supporting distribution of the master fuelling rate and the calculated mean load value.

All healthy units on the CAN Bus will revert to masterless mode should they detect that serial
information from one or more previously active units is no longer available on the CAN Bus, or
should they detect that two or more units are set with the same governor number / network
identity.

Masterless mode will be maintained while master / slave loadshare initiation requirements are
satisfied and one or more of the following alarms are active:

i.- Governor Lost Alarm


ii.- Comms Failed Alarm
iii.- Governor ID Clash Alarm

The Masterless Type item in General should be selected to Droop. The individual units will
revert to droop speed governing (section 12.3) by bumpless transfer, initially maintaining speed
and load levels. While operating in masterless droop mode the operating in droop digital output
will be energised and code L72 will be displayed.

Units running in parallel in droop mode achieve a stable load control system but introduce
changes in system speed / electrical frequency according to individual unit droop characteristics
when engine loads change. This can be compensated by applying raise / lower speed
commands according to the speed setting mode of the individual unit.

Units will exit masterless mode, returning to master / slave loadshare operation, when a
masterless reset applied at one unit successfully resets the above alarms.

Units achieve a bumpless speed transition back to master / slave loadshare by initially resetting
ramped setspeed to measured speed, then ramping ramped setspeed in accordance with the
current speed setting mode requirement.

ER509/890
Page 74 of 142
12.2.8 Loadshare Alarms

Rack Limit Alarm

As a result of the kW balancing function, if the fuelling rate bias value (processed error from
mean value – see section 12.2.6.1) has achieved the value of kW Balance Limit item in kW
Balance > General the alarm will be initiated and latched.

While the alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A12 indicated


- Rack Limit item in Alarm > Loadshare displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised

The alarm is reset by applying the reset alarm input or fault reset (pulse) input

Trip To Speed Control Alarm

While running in master / slave loadshare with circuit breaker closed input energised, the alarm
will be initiated and latched if the measured engine speed is greater than TTSC High Level item
or less than TTSC Low Level item in Loadshare > General

While running in master / slave loadshare with circuit breaker closed input not energised, the
alarm will be initiated and latched if the measured engine speed is more than TTSC Speed Band
+/- rpm away from its masters setspeed.

The trip to speed control check, and subsequent action, is designed to safeguard the engine
against runaway in the event of a speed control error during master / slave loadsharing

On alarm initiation the unit is forced into droop mode and setspeed and droop null are set to
maintain the instantaneous speed / load condition. While the alarm is active the following
conditions will be maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A13 indicated


- Trip To Speed Ctrl item in Alarm > Loadshare displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- This unit is forced into droop mode

The alarm is reset by applying the reset alarm input or fault reset (pulse) input

Multi Master Alarm

While the alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- V25 LED display alarm code A14 indicated


- Multi Master item in Alarm > Loadshare displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- This unit forced into Masterless mode

The alarm is reset by applying a reset

Engine Stationary Alarm

The alarm will be initiated and latched if engine is stationary with clutch engaged or circuit
breaker closed.

While the alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

ER509/890
Page 75 of 142
- V25 LED display alarm code A15 indicated
- Engine Stationary item in Alarm > Loadshare displays Warning
- General alarm output de-energised
- This unit will stay in isochronous mode

The alarm can be reset if reset is applied and alarm condition has been removed.

ER509/890
Page 76 of 142
12.3 Droop Loadshare Overview

In droop speed governing mode a unit performs speed control to a droop characteristic which
introduces a % modification (droop offset) of the setspeed demand as the engine fuelling rate
(engine load) increases. The Droop item in the dynamic parameter sets in Control > Control
Gains menu defines the % reduction in setspeed demand over the engine fuelling range.

The % droop value is with respect to the Nominal Speed item value in Speed Setting > General
menu. Therefore:

A Droop value of 5% and a Nominal Speed value of 500rpm results in a 25rpm


reduction in setspeed demand over the engine fuelling rate (engine load) range.

Note that a 0% Droop value is the equivalent of isochronous speed control and does not provide
the load control stability associated with the droop speed governing

The fuelling rate at which 0rpm droop offset is achieved is defined by the Droop Null item in the
dynamic parameter sets in Control > Control Gains menu. Therefore:

A Droop Null value of pos 5.0, A Droop value of 5% and a Nominal Speed value of
500rpm results in a droop characteristic of:

+12.5rpm droop offset applied to setspeed at fuelling rate pos 2


+0rpm droop offset applied to setspeed at fuelling rate pos 5
-12.5rpm droop offset applied to setspeed at fuelling rate pos 8

When entering droop mode the bumpless transfer function recalculates the units Droop Null
position (limited to the actuator output range) to shift the droop characteristic such that the initial
droop offset value matches the instantaneous speed error to achieve a balanced speed control
loop to maintain speed / load conditions. Shifting the droop characteristic will modify the speed /
load range capability of the unit while running in droop.

A unit is forced into droop mode when local speed setting mode is achieved (this is a digital
speed setting mode). Additionally the user can force a unit to run in droop mode, independently
of the speed setting mode, by one of the following actions:

i.- Selecting Droop Select item in General to Enable.


ii.- Energising droop mode digital input (while the engine is on load).

In digital speed setting modes, a system in which one or more droop speed governing units run
in parallel with an isochronous speed governing unit provides stable load control with maintained
system speed / electrical frequency. Droop unit load can be adjusted by applying raise / lower
speed signals to individual units.

In analogue speed setting modes (common setspeed signal to all units) a system in which one
or more droop speed governing units running in parallel with an isochronous speed governing
unit must be avoided as it may result on overload or reverse power conditions. If required to run
in droop in an analogue speed setting mode, the user must select all units running in parallel to
run in droop at the same instant.

A unit will automatically revert to droop speed governing while the trip to speed control alarm is
active. This alarm suggests that the unit has become electrically or and mechanically isolated
from its master.

A system in which one or more droop speed governing units run in parallel in isolation, provide
stable load control but introduce changes in system speed / electrical frequency according to
individual unit droop characteristics when engine loads change. This can be compensated by
applying raise / lower speed commands according to the speed setting mode of the individual
units.

ER509/890
Page 77 of 142
While operating in droop mode the units operating in droop digital output will be energised and
the units will display code L104.

Units achieve a bumpless speed transition back to isochronous speed setting by initially
resetting ramped setspeed to measured speed, then ramping ramped setspeed in accordance
with the current speed setting mode requirement.

ER509/890
Page 78 of 142
13 ALL ENGINES LOAD SHARING DISPLAY MENU

It is possible to view status information for all units that are active on the CAN bus. If a governor
number unit does not have active status all menu display items will indicate Invalid. The
information provided by the menu display items is described below.

NOTE: Some of the values will be unused on this contract.

Engine Status > All Engines > Governor Number X > Status >

Valid Status
Displays the status of this governor number unit. The text display will be one of the following

Inactive: - communications never been achieved with this unit


Active - communications with this unit are healthy
Lost - communications have been achieved with this unit but are not healthy.

Load Sharing Group


Displays the group number within which this governor unit is currently a member.

Rack Offset
Displays the rack offset being applied by this governor number unit. This applies to slave units
that are KW balancing or rack offset following. The value displayed is the percentage of
actuator output with 0.0 to 100.0% representing actuator divisions 0-10. The value displayed is
always 0 on a master unit.

Actuator
Displays the fuelling rate of this governor number unit, in divisions, range 0.00 to 10.00

Engine Load
Displays the loading of this governor number unit referenced to engine fuelling, in %, range
-33.3 to 133.3

Unlimited Load
Displays the unlimited PID output for this governor number unit. The value is displayed in
divisions, range 0.00 to 10.00.

KW Load
Displays the scaled KW load measurement for this governor number unit, in kW.

Adjusted KW Load
Displays the KW load reference for this governor number unit to be included in the mean load
calculation. This value may have been adjusted by the load balance offset function. The value
is displayed as % rated kW load.

Mean Load (kW)


Displays the kW value represented by the mean load % that is appropriate to this governor
number unit.

Mean Load (%)


Displays the calculated mean KW load for the group within which this governor unit is currently a
member. The value is displayed as % rated kW load.

Set Speed
Displays the set speed for this governor number unit.

Engine Speed
Displays the measured speed for this governor number unit.

ER509/890
Page 79 of 142
Engine Status > All Engines > Governor Number X > Mode >

Mode Code
Displays the operating mode of this governor number unit by numeric code. This is a replication
of the mode display on the Viking25 display module, section 12.1.2

Mode
Displays the operating mode of this governor number unit by text descriptor. The text display
will be one of the following:
Slave
Master
Masterless
Droop
Isochronous
Base Load

Mean Load Line


Provides indication when displaying On that this governor number unit has achieved ramp to
master output and is able to perform kW balancing or rack offset following.

Load
Provides indication when displaying On that this governor number unit is connected to electrical
loads through its breaker being closed or mechanical loads through its clutch being engaged.

Off Load
Provides indication when displaying Active that this governor number unit is processing the off
loading function.

Ballhead
Provides indication when displaying Active that this governor number unit ‘run on ballhead’
condition has been achieved such that backup governing is enabled.

Masterless Mode
Displays the mode selected for masterless mode at this governor number unit. The text display
will be one of the following:
Droop
Isochronous

ER509/890
Page 80 of 142
Engine Status > All Engines > Governor Number X > Error >

Error Code
Displays the error value of this governor number unit by a bit mapped number as below. The bit
mapped number displayed will be one of the following:

Bit Value Error


0 1 KW balancing rack deviation
1 2 KW transducer failed
2 4 Trip to speed control
3 8 Multi-master error
4 16 No Group Message Received
5 32 CAN comm. failure
6 64 Message miss

The details of the errors are displayed in the subsequent menu items as follows

Rack Limited menu item will display either No or Yes.

KW Trans menu item will display either Healthy or Alarm.

Trip To Speed menu item will display either No or Yes.

Multi Master menu item will display either Healthy or Alarm.

Group Message menu item will display either Healthy or Alarm.

Comms Status menu item will display either Healthy or Alarm.

Message Miss menu item will display either Healthy or Alarm.

ER509/890
Page 81 of 142
15. CLUTCH CONTROL

15.1 General

Editable parameters associated with clutch control are presented in the Edit > System > Clutch
Control menu.

Status parameters associated with clutch control are presented in the Display > System >
Clutch Control menu.

This software provides clutch control functionality for both single and multi engine applications.
The user must configure the software through the Edit menu Application Sel item to match the
application in which it is installed, selecting either Single Eng or Multi Eng option. The software
reads the Application Sel item once only, on power up, so the Viking power must be cycled after
editing for a new configuration to be processed. The configuration being processed is confirmed
in the Display menu Application Sel item

The clutch control functionality that is processed when Application Sel item is selected to Single
Eng supports installations in which ‘this unit’ can not be mechanically connected to a ‘twin unit’
through the clutch / gearbox arrangement. This covers single engine and two engine - twin shaft
installations.

The following hardwired input/output signals are not utilised in this software configuration:

Digital inputs:
i.- ‘twin unit’ Viking healthy
ii.- ‘twin unit’ circuit breaker closed
iii.- ‘twin unit’ clutch engaged

Digital outputs:
i.- ‘this unit’ Viking healthy
ii.- disengage ‘twin unit’ clutch

The clutch control functionality that is processed when Application Sel item is selected to Multi
Eng supports installations in which ‘this unit’ can be mechanically connected to a ‘twin unit’
through a clutch / gearbox arrangement. This covers two engine - single shaft installations. The
above Viking hardwired input/output signals are utilised in this software configuration and the
interconnections between ‘this unit’ and its ‘twin unit’ must be implemented correctly.

The user must configure the software in each unit through the Edit menu Twin Governor
Number item to match Governor Number item in Loadshare > General of the ‘twin unit’ that ‘this
unit’ can be mechanically connected to.

ER509/890
Page 82 of 142
15.2 Auto Clutch Disengagement

15.2.1 General

While Application Sel item is selected to Multi Eng, when both clutches are engaged the engines
are mechanically connected through the two engine - single shaft gearbox arrangement.

This software provides clutch control functionality for multi engine applications in which neither,
one or both units are fitted with shaft generators. The user must configure the software in each
unit through the Edit menu Shaft Gen Sel item to match the application in which it is installed,
selecting either Installed or Not Inst option. The software reads the Shaft Gen Sel item once
only, on power up, so the Viking power must be cycled after editing for a new configuration to be
applied. The configuration being processed is confirmed in the Display menu Shaft Gen Sel
item

While Shaft Gen Sel item is Installed, ‘this unit’ Shaft Generator serial data item is set true.
While Shaft Gen Sel item is Not Inst, ‘this unit’ Shaft Generator serial data item is set false.

Each Viking will continually assess the status of the ‘twin unit’ Shaft Generator serial data item to
determine the system shaft generator arrangement. The status will be displayed in Shaft Gen
Config item as follows:

Neither; while Shaft Gen Sel is Not Inst and ‘twin unit’ Shaft Generator is false.
This Only; while Shaft Gen Sel is Installed and ‘twin unit’ Shaft Generator is false.
Twin Only; while Shaft Gen Sel is Not Inst and ‘twin unit’ Shaft Generator is true.
Both; while Shaft Gen Sel is Installed and ‘twin unit’ Shaft Generator is true.

Note: While Application Sel item is selected to Single, Shaft Gen Config item displays Neither

While Application Sel item is selected to Multi Eng, should the ‘twin unit’ develop a major fault
condition such that its engine runs under backup governing ‘this unit’ will detect that ‘twin unit’
Viking healthy input has de-energised and will command the clutches of both units into an
arrangement in which the operation of the shaft generator(s) is secured. It is for this purpose
that ‘this unit’ receives the ‘twin unit’ circuit breaker and clutch status and is able to disengage
the ‘twin unit’ clutch.

ER509/890
Page 83 of 142
15.2.2 Auto Clutch Disengagement Logic

The Req Dis This Clutch and Req Dis Twin Clutch items represent the requirement to trip
clutches should the condition of both clutches engaged be achieved.

While either of the following conditions are true both items display False as there would be no
requirement for this function to disengage either clutch:

i.- ‘twin unit’ Viking healthy input is energised


ii.- Shaft Gen Config item displays Neither.

Should ‘twin unit’ Viking healthy input de-energise while Shaft Gen Config item displays
Both:
While the following conditions are true there would be a requirement to disengage ‘this
unit’ clutch should both clutches be engaged, therefore Req Dis This Clutch item would
display True:

‘this unit’ breaker closed input is energised and


‘twin unit’ breaker closed input is not energised

Otherwise there would be a requirement to disengage ‘twin unit’ clutch should both
clutches be engaged, therefore Req Dis Twin Clutch item would display True.

Should ‘twin unit’ Viking healthy input de-energise while Shaft Gen Config item displays
This Only:
While the following conditions are true there would be a requirement to disengage ‘this
unit’ clutch should both clutches be engaged, therefore Req Dis This Clutch item would
display True:

‘this unit’ breaker closed input is energised.

Otherwise there would be a requirement to disengage ‘twin unit’ clutch should both
clutches be engaged, therefore Req Dis Twin Clutch item would display True.

Should ‘twin unit’ Viking healthy input de-energise while Shaft Gen Config item displays
Twin Only there would be a requirement to disengage ‘twin unit’ clutch should both clutches be
engaged, therefore Req Dis Twin Clutch item would display True.

While both ‘this unit’ and ‘twin unit’ clutch engaged inputs are energised Both Clutch Engaged
item is set True. The auto clutch disengagement function will only energise a disengage clutch
output while both clutches are engaged.

While Both Clutch Engaged item displays True ‘this unit’ disengage clutch output will be
energised while Req Dis This Clutch item displays True.

While Both Clutch Engaged item displays True ‘twin unit’ disengage clutch output will be
energised while Req Dis Twin Clutch item displays True.
.

ER509/890
Page 84 of 142
15.3 Clutch Engagement

15.3.1 General

While clutch is disengaged and a prepare to clutch-in input pulse has not been detected the
clutch engagement processing is in the standby condition, indicated as follows:

Clutch Status item will display Disengaged


ClutchIn Process item will display Dormant
ClutchIn Unit item will display Dormant

Notes common to all clutch engagement sequences:

i.- A new request to engage clutch is not considered while stop, stationary or starting
conditions exist.

ii.- Any active clutch-in process will be aborted without alarm should a stop condition be
generated.

iii.- The ClutchIn Twin Status item displays This Clutch Eng while this unit clutch is
engaged. This is the ‘don’t care’ condition for the clutch-in process.

iv.- The ClutchIn Speed Control item is forced to Inactive while the run on ballhead
condition is achieved as the Viking is unable to force setspeed ramping.

ER509/890
Page 85 of 142
15.3.2 Single Engine Application

Application Sel item selected to Single Eng

Stage 1: Request To Engage Clutch

The ClutchIn Process item displays Requested on detection of a prepare to clutch-in input pulse
while the standby conditions exist.

An active clutch-in failure alarm is reset, the clutch-in failure output is de-energised and an
active clutch-in aborted alarm is reset.

The ClutchIn Unit item displays Single. The attempt progresses to stage 2 without delay.

Stages 2-4: Attempt Phase

The clutch-in process will be aborted should the speed setting mode change during the attempt
phase. The clutch-in aborted alarm will be initiated.

Stage 2: Pre Engage

The current demand set speed is logged.

The engine speed is required to be at Calc ClutchIn Speed item value before attempting clutch
engagement.

If in generator speed setting mode the Calc ClutchIn Speed item is set to the current demand set
speed, otherwise the Calc ClutchIn Speed item is set to Clutch-in Speed item value in Speed
Setting > General menu.

If not in local speed setting mode the ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to Active and the engine
set speed is ramped to Calc Clutch-In Speed. The ClutchIn Process item displays Pre Ramp.
When ramped set speed has achieved Calc ClutchIn Speed a period of Clutch-in Delay item is
processed. The ClutchIn Process item displays Pre Delay.
On Clutch-in Delay period timeout the engage clutch output is energised and the attempt
progresses to Stage 3.

If in local speed setting mode clutch engagement processing does not modify engine set speed,
ClutchIn Speed Control item remains Inactive. The attempt progresses to Stage 3.

Stage 3: Engage

The ClutchIn Process item displays Engage

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, the engage clutch output is energised

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Inactive, the engage clutch output is energised only while the
ramped set speed happens to be equal to Calc ClutchIn Speed.

If clutch engaged input is not energised to confirm clutch engaged status within Engage Period
item the attempt progresses to Stage 4a.

If clutch engaged input is energised to confirm clutch engaged status within Engage Period item
the attempt progresses to Stage 4b.

ER509/890
Page 86 of 142
Stage 4a: Failed Attempt

The engage clutch output is de-energised. The ClutchIn Failure alarm is initiated if the engage
clutch output was energised during the engage stage.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is not Active the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched and clutch
engagement processing returns to the standby conditions.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, if the current speed setting mode is an analogue speed
setting type, ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to Inactive. Normal speed control ramps the set
speed back to the analogue speed setting demand. The ClutchIn Process item displays Post
Ramp. When ramped set speed matches demand setspeed the attempt to engage clutch is
unlatched. Clutch engagement processing returns to the standby conditions.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, if the current speed setting mode is a digital speed
setting type the engine set speed is ramped to the speed value logged in stage 2, before the set
ClutchIn Speed Control was applied. The ClutchIn Process item displays Post Ramp.
When ramped set speed has achieved the logged speed value ClutchIn Speed Control item is
set to Inactive and the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched and clutch engagement processing
returns to the standby conditions.

Stage 4b: Successful Attempt

The engage clutch output is de-energised.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is not Active the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, indicating that the attempt to engage clutch process
applied a modification to the set speed demand, a period of Speed Ramp Delay item is
processed. The ClutchIn Process item displays Post Delay.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, on Speed Ramp Delay period timeout, if the current
speed setting mode is an analogue speed setting type, ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to
Inactive. Normal speed control ramps the set speed back to the analogue speed setting
demand. The ClutchIn Process item displays Post Ramp. When ramped set speed matches
demand setspeed the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, on Speed Ramp Delay period timeout, if the current
speed setting mode is a digital speed setting type the engine set speed is ramped to the speed
value logged in stage 2, before the set ClutchIn Speed Control was applied. The ClutchIn
Process item displays Post Ramp.
When ramped set speed has achieved the logged speed value ClutchIn Speed Control item is
set to Inactive and the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched.

The following indications are displayed following a successful attempt:

Clutch Status item will display Engaged


ClutchIn Process item will display Dormant
ClutchIn Unit item will display Dormant.

ER509/890
Page 87 of 142
15.3.3 Multi Engine Application – (First Engine)

Application Sel item selected to Multi Eng

ClutchIn Twin Status item displays the status of the clutch-in process interface between ‘this
unit’ and its ‘twin unit’:

i.- While the ‘twin unit’ CAN data items are available to ‘this unit’, Comms Healthy is
displayed.

ii.- Should the CANbus communications between ‘this unit’ and its ‘twin unit’ have failed
and Twin unit: Viking healthy input not energised, Twin Unit Failed is displayed.

iii.- Should the CANbus communications between ‘this unit’ and its ‘twin unit’ have failed,
Twin unit: Viking healthy input is energised and Twin unit: clutch engaged input not
energised, Twin Clutch Dis is displayed.

iv.- Should the CANbus communications between ‘this unit’ and its ‘twin unit’ have
failed, Twin unit: Viking healthy input energised and Twin unit: clutch engaged input
energised, Twin Clutch Eng is displayed.

Stage 1: Request To Engage Clutch

The ClutchIn Process item displays Requested on detection of a prepare to clutch-in input pulse
while the standby conditions exist.

An active clutch-in failure alarm is reset, the clutch-in failure output is de-energised and an
active clutch-in aborted alarm is reset.

Important note:
Should ClutchIn Twin Status item display Twin Unit Failed or Twin Clutch Dis during this stage,
ClutchIn Unit item will be forced to display Single and the clutch in process will progress to stage
2 of the single engine application sequence.

The following CAN clutch processing data items of the ‘twin unit’ are assessed.

i.- ‘twin unit’ Clutch Engagement Ongoing


ii.- ‘twin unit’ Clutch Engaged

If neither serial data item is true ClutchIn Unit item will display First and a delay of clutchin first
period (the resultant of governor number x 200mS), is processed.

On clutchin first period timeout ‘this unit’ Clutch Engagement Ongoing serial data item is set true
and the attempt progresses to stage 2.

Stages 2-4: Attempt Phase

The clutch-in process will be aborted should one of the following conditions be detected during
the attempt phase. The clutch-in aborted alarm will be initiated.

i.- Speed setting mode changes.

ii.- ‘twin unit’ Clutch Engaged CAN data item indicates twin clutch now engaged.

iii.- CANbus communications between ‘this unit’ and its ‘twin unit’ fail.

ER509/890
Page 88 of 142
Stage 2: Pre Engage

The current demand set speed is logged.

The engine speed is required to be at Calc ClutchIn Speed item value before attempting clutch
engagement.

If in generator speed setting mode the Calc ClutchIn Speed item is set to the current demand set
speed, otherwise the Calc ClutchIn Speed item is set to Clutch-in Speed item value in Speed
Setting > General menu.

If not in local speed setting mode the ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to Active and the engine
set speed is ramped to Calc Clutch-In Speed. The ClutchIn Process item displays Pre Ramp.
When ramped set speed has achieved Calc ClutchIn Speed a period of Clutch-in Delay item is
processed. The ClutchIn Process item displays Pre Delay.
On Clutch-in Delay period timeout the engage clutch output is energised and the attempt
progresses to Stage 3.

If in local setting mode clutch engagement processing does not modify engine setspeed,
ClutchIn Speed Control item remains Inactive. The attempt progresses to Stage 3.

Stage 3: Engage

The ClutchIn Process item displays Engage

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, the engage clutch output is energised

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Inactive, the engage clutch output is energised only while the
ramped set speed happens to be equal to Calc ClutchIn Speed.

If clutch engaged input is not energised to confirm clutch engaged status within Engage Period
item the attempt progresses to Stage 4a.

If clutch engaged input is energised to confirm clutch engaged status within Engage Period item
the attempt progresses to Stage 4b.

ER509/890
Page 89 of 142
Stage 4a: Failed Attempt

The engage clutch output is de-energised. The ClutchIn Failure alarm is initiated if the engage
clutch output was energised during the engage stage.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is not Active the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched and clutch
engagement processing returns to the standby conditions.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, if the current speed setting mode is an analogue speed
setting type, ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to Inactive. Normal speed control ramps the set
speed back to the analogue speed setting demand. The ClutchIn Process item displays Post
Ramp. When ramped set speed matches demand setspeed the attempt to engage clutch is
unlatched. Clutch engagement processing returns to the standby conditions.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, if the current speed setting mode is a digital speed
setting type the engine set speed is ramped to the speed value logged in stage 2, before the set
ClutchIn Speed Control was applied. The ClutchIn Process item displays Post Ramp.
When ramped set speed has achieved the logged speed value, ClutchIn Speed Control item is
set to Inactive and the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched and clutch engagement processing
returns to the standby conditions.

For all the above conditions, when the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched, ‘this unit’ Clutch
Engagement Ongoing serial data item is set false.

ER509/890
Page 90 of 142
Stage 4b: Successful Attempt

The engage clutch output is de-energised.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is not Active the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, indicating that the attempt to engage clutch process
applied a modification to the set speed demand, a period of Speed Ramp Delay item is
processed. The ClutchIn Process item displays Post Delay.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, on Speed Ramp Delay period timeout, if the current
speed setting mode is an analogue speed setting type, ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to
Inactive. Normal speed control ramps the set speed back to the analogue speed setting
demand. The ClutchIn Process item displays Post Ramp. When ramped set speed matches
demand setspeed the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, on Speed Ramp Delay period timeout, if the current
mode is constant speed setting mode (a digital speed setting type) the engine set speed is
ramped to Rated Speed item value in Speed Setting > General menu. The ClutchIn Process
item displays Post Ramp.
When ramped set speed has achieved Rated Speed, ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to
Inactive and the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, on Speed Ramp Delay period timeout, if the current
speed setting mode is any digital mode other than constant speed setting mode the engine set
speed is maintained at Calc Clutch-In Speed, the ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to Inactive
and the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched.

For all the above conditions, when the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched, ‘this unit’ Clutch
Engagement Ongoing serial data item is set false.

The following indications are displayed following a successful attempt:

Clutch Status item will display Engaged


ClutchIn Process item will display Dormant
ClutchIn Unit item will display Dormant.

ER509/890
Page 91 of 142
15.3.4 Multi Engine Application – (Second Engine)

Application Sel item selected to Multi Eng

ClutchIn Twin Status item displays the status of the clutch-in process interface between ‘this
unit’ and its ‘twin unit’:

i.- While the ‘twin unit’ CAN data items are available to ‘this unit’, Comms Healthy is
displayed.

ii.- Should the CANbus communications between ‘this unit’ and its ‘twin unit’ have failed
and Twin unit: Viking healthy input is not energised, Twin Unit Failed is displayed.

iii.- Should the CANbus communications between ‘this unit’ and its ‘twin unit’ have failed,
Twin unit: Viking healthy input is energised and Twin unit: clutch engaged input is not
energised, Twin Clutch Dis is displayed.

iv.- Should the CANbus communications between ‘this unit’ and its ‘twin unit’ have
failed, Twin unit: Viking healthy input is energised and Twin unit: clutch engaged input is
energised, Twin Clutch Eng is displayed.

Important note:
If the 2 units of a multi engine arrangement are to receive the prepare to clutch-in input pulse at
the same time, the units must receive the pulse within 50mS of each other, to avoid any
possibility of both units progressing the clutch-in procedure as First (as a result of CANbus
communication time period).

ER509/890
Page 92 of 142
Stage 1: Request To Engage Clutch

The ClutchIn Process item displays Requested on detection of a prepare to clutch-in input pulse
while the standby conditions exist.

An active clutch-in failure alarm is reset, the clutch-in failure output is de-energised and an
active clutch-in aborted alarm is reset.

Important note:
Should ClutchIn Twin Status item display Twin Clutch Eng. on detection of prepare to clutch-in
input pulse the clutch-in process will be aborted. The clutch-in aborted alarm will be initiated.
This condition indicates that the ‘twin unit’ clutch is engaged but its speed is not available to ‘this
unit’.
Should ClutchIn Twin Status item display Twin Unit Failed or Twin Clutch Dis on detection of
prepare to clutch-in input pulse, ClutchIn Unit item will be forced to display Single and the clutch
in process will progress to stage 2 of the single engine application sequence.

The following CAN clutch processing data items of the ‘twin unit’ are assessed.

i.- ‘twin unit’ Clutch Engagement Ongoing


ii.- ‘twin unit’ Clutch Engaged

If either serial data item is set true within clutchin first period (the resultant of governor number x
200mS), ClutchIn Unit item will display Not First.

While ‘twin unit’ Clutch Engagement Ongoing item is set true a delay of Ongoing period (the
resultant of 2 x Engage Period item) is processed. Should Ongoing period achieve timeout the
clutchIn aborted alarm is initiated, the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched and clutch
engagement processing returns to the standby conditions.

If ‘twin unit’ Clutch Engagement Ongoing item changes to false within Ongoing period, ‘twin unit’
Clutch Engaged item will be assessed. If ‘twin unit’ Clutch Engaged item has remained false the
clutchIn aborted alarm is initiated, the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched and clutch
engagement processing returns to the standby conditions.

During the delay period the clutch-in process will be aborted should one of the following
conditions be detected. The clutch-in aborted alarm will be initiated:

i.- CANbus communications between ‘this unit’ and its ‘twin unit’ fail.

ii.- Twin unit: clutch engaged input energised and Req Dis This Clutch item displays
True, therefore would result in an auto trip clutch on engagement.

If ‘twin unit’ Clutch Engaged item is initially set true, or is set true following a period of ‘twin unit’
Clutch Engagement Ongoing item being true, ‘this unit’ Clutch Engagement Ongoing item is set
true and the attempt progresses to stage 2.

ER509/890
Page 93 of 142
Stages 2-4: Attempt Phase

The clutch-in process will be aborted should one of the following conditions be detected during
the attempt phase. The clutch-in aborted alarm will be initiated.

i.- Speed setting mode changes.

ii.- ‘twin unit’ Clutch Engaged CAN data item indicates twin clutch now not engaged.

iii.- CANbus communications between ‘this unit’ and its ‘twin unit’ fail.

iv.- Twin unit: clutch engaged input energised and Req Dis This Clutch item displays
True, therefore would result in an auto trip clutch on engagement.

Stage 2: Pre Engage

The current demand set speed is logged.

The engine speed is required to be at Calc ClutchIn Speed item value before attempting clutch
engagement.

While ClutchIn Unit displays Not First the Calc ClutchIn Speed item is set to the resultant of
Clutch-In Speed serial data item value + Delta ClutchIn Speed (a positive or negative value)
item.

If not in local speed setting mode the ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to Active and the engine
set speed is ramped to Calc Clutch-In Speed. The ClutchIn Process item displays Pre Ramp.
When ramped set speed has achieved Calc ClutchIn Speed a period of Clutch-in Delay item is
processed. The ClutchIn Process item displays Pre Delay.
On Clutch-in Delay period timeout the engage clutch output is energised and the attempt
progresses to Stage 3.

If in local speed setting mode clutch engagement processing does not modify engine setspeed,
ClutchIn Speed Control item remains Inactive. The attempt progresses to Stage 3.

Stage 3: Engage

The ClutchIn Process item displays Engage

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, the engage clutch output is energised

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Inactive, the engage clutch output is energised only while the
ramped set speed happens to be equal to Calc ClutchIn Speed.

If clutch engaged input is not energised to confirm clutch engaged status within Engage Period
item the attempt progresses to Stage 4a.

If clutch engaged input is energised to confirm clutch engaged status within Engage Period item
the attempt progresses to Stage 4b.

ER509/890
Page 94 of 142
Stage 4a: Failed Attempt

The engage clutch output is de-energised. The ClutchIn Failure alarm is initiated if the engage
clutch output was energised during the engage stage.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is not Active the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched and clutch
engagement processing returns to the standby conditions.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, if the current speed setting mode is an analogue speed
setting type, ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to Inactive. Normal speed control ramps the set
speed back to the analogue speed setting demand. The ClutchIn Process item displays Post
Ramp. When ramped set speed matches demand setspeed the attempt to engage clutch is
unlatched. Clutch engagement processing returns to the standby conditions.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, if the current speed setting mode is a digital speed
setting type the engine set speed is ramped to the speed value logged in stage 2, before the set
ClutchIn Speed Control was applied. The ClutchIn Process item displays Post Ramp.
When ramped set speed has achieved the logged speed value, ClutchIn Speed Control item is
set to Inactive and the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched and clutch engagement processing
returns to the standby conditions.

For all the above conditions, when the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched, ‘this unit’ Clutch
Engagement Ongoing serial data item is set false.

ER509/890
Page 95 of 142
Stage 4b: Successful Attempt

The engage clutch output is de-energised.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is not Active the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, indicating that the attempt to engage clutch process
applied a modification to the set speed demand, a period of Speed Ramp Delay item is
processed. The ClutchIn Process item displays Post Delay.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, on Speed Ramp Delay period timeout, if the current
speed setting mode is an analogue speed setting type, ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to
Inactive. Normal speed control ramps the set speed back to the analogue speed setting
demand. The ClutchIn Process item displays Post Ramp. When ramped set speed matches
demand setspeed the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, on Speed Ramp Delay period timeout, if the current
mode is constant speed setting mode (a digital speed setting type) the engine set speed is
ramped to Rated Speed item value in Speed Setting > General menu. The ClutchIn Process
item displays Post Ramp.
When ramped set speed has achieved Rated Speed, ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to
Inactive and the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched.

If ClutchIn Speed Control item is Active, on Speed Ramp Delay period timeout, if the current
speed setting mode is any digital mode other than constant speed setting mode the engine set
speed is maintained at Calc Clutch-In Speed, the ClutchIn Speed Control item is set to Inactive
and the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched.

For all the above conditions, when the attempt to engage clutch is unlatched, ‘this unit’ Clutch
Engagement Ongoing serial data item is set false.

The following indications are displayed following a successful attempt:

Clutch Status item will display Engaged


ClutchIn Process item will display Dormant
ClutchIn Unit item will display Dormant.

ER509/890
Page 96 of 142
15.3.5 Clutch-in Failure Alarm

While the Clutch-in Failure alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- Viking 25 LED display alarm code A27 indicated


- Clutch-in Failure item in Alarm > General displays Warning
- Clutch-in failure output energised

Once the clutch engagement processing standby condition has been achieved the alarm can be
cleared either by energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse), or by energising the
prepare to clutch-in input (pulse).

15.3.6 Clutch-in Aborted Alarm

While the Clutch-in Aborted alarm is active the following conditions will be maintained:

- Viking 25 LED display alarm code A30 indicated


- Clutch-in Aborted item in Alarm > General displays Warning

The alarm can be cleared either by energising the reset alarm input or fault reset input (pulse),
or by energising the prepare to clutch-in input (pulse).

15.4 Multi Engine Application – CAN status update

While ‘this unit’ clutch engaged input is energised, CAN serial data item ‘this unit’ Clutch
Engaged is maintained set true. Should the input de-energise, the serial data item will be set
false.

While Application Sel item is selected to Multi Eng, ‘this unit’ clutch engaged input is energised
and ‘twin unit’ Clutch Engaged serial data item is false, serial data item Clutch-in Speed is set
to ‘this unit’ ramped setspeed.

While Application Sel item is selected to Multi Eng, ‘this unit’ clutch engaged input is energised,
‘twin unit’ Clutch Engaged serial data item is true and this unit is the master within the
loadshare system, serial data item Clutch-in Speed is set to ‘this unit’ ramped setspeed.

ER509/890
Page 97 of 142
16. VIKING HMI

16.1 Overview

The Viking HMI is used to display and reset alarms and edit or display the contract data. For
ease of access to the data three menus are used. The alarm menu holds any alarms that are
present in a list format. The display menu holds all of the display menu items and is in a tree
format. The edit menu holds all of the editable menu items and is in a tree format.

Example of the tree format used for part of the edit menu :-

Serial Actuator

RS Communications Setup Calibration

Port 1 Port 2 Force Mode 0.25 A Calibration

Type Type Force Output 0.75 A Calibration

Actuator Offset Calibration Enable

The current menu that is being displayed is shown by the lit MENU area text on the Viking HMI.

Refer to the HMI manual for detailed information.

ER509/890
Page 98 of 142
17. VIKING VISION ALARM MESSAGE LIST

Description of alarm initiations provided elsewhere in document

Alarm > Transducer > Combi1 Setspeed: Clear / Warning

Alarm > Transducer > Combi2 Setspeed: Clear / Warning

Alarm > Transducer > Fi-Fi Setspeed: Clear / Warning

Alarm > Transducer > Boost Pressure: Clear / Warning

Alarm > Transducer > Start Air Pressure: Clear / Warning

Alarm > Transducer > Fuel Rack Position: Clear / Warning

Alarm > Transducer > kW Load: Clear / Warning

Alarm > Transducer > Load Balance Offset: Clear / Warning

Alarm > Loadshare > Rack Limit: Clear / Warning

Alarm > Loadshare > Trip To Speed Ctrl: Clear / Warning

Alarm > Loadshare > Multi Master: Clear / Warning

Alarm > Loadshare > Engine Stationary: Clear / Warning

Alarm > Pickups > Pickup Fault: Clear / PICKUPS FAILED

Alarm > Pickups > Pickup 1 Fail: Clear / No Signal / Init Error / Over Range

Alarm > Pickups > Pickup 2 Fail: Clear / No Signal / Init Error / Over Range

Alarm > Pickups > Pickup Change: Clear / Warning

Alarm > General > Actuator Wirebreak: Clear / Warning

Alarm > General > Flash Memory Fail: Clear / Warning

Alarm > General > Main supply Fail: Clear / Warning

Alarm > General > Backup Supply Fail: Clear / Warning

Alarm > General > Fault Shutdown: Clear / Warning

Alarm > General > Ballhead: Clear / Warning

Alarm > General > Clutch-in Failure: Clear / Warning

Alarm > General > Viking Vision Stop: Clear / Warning

Alarm > General > Ballhead On Power Up: Clear / Warning

Alarm > General > Clutch-in Aborted: Clear / Warning

ER509/890
Page 99 of 142
Alarm > General > Gov No. Out Of Range: Clear / Warning

Alarm > General >Fuel Rack Control: Clear / Warning

Alarm > CAN > Comms Failed: Clear / Warning

Alarm > CAN > Message Missed: Clear / Warning

Alarm > CAN > Governor Lost: Clear / Warning

Alarm > CAN > Governor Identity: Clear / Warning

ER509/890
Page 100 of 142
18. VIKING LED DISPLAY MODULE ALARM MESSAGES

ALARM
DESCRIPTION
CODE
A1 Transducer Failed: Combi. 1 Setspeed
A2 Transducer Failed: Combi. 2 Setspeed
A3 Transducer Failed: Fi-Fi Setspeed
A4 Transducer Failed: Boost Pressure
A5 Transducer Failed: Start Air Pressure
A6 Transducer Failed: Fuel Rack Position
A7 Transducer Failed: kW Load
A8 Transducer Failed: Load Balance Offset

A12 Loadshare: Rack Limit


A13 Loadshare: Trip To Speed Control
A14 Loadshare: Multi Master
A15 Loadshare: Engine Stationary
A16 Pickups: Pickup Fault
A17 Pickups: Pickup 1 Failed
A18 Pickups: Pickup 2 Failed
A19 Pickups: Pickup Change

A21 General: Actuator Wire Break


A22 General: Flash Memory Failed
A23 General: Main Supply Failed
A24 General: Standby Supply Failed
A25 General: Fault Shutdown
A26 General: Ballhead
A27 General: Clutch-in Failure
A28 General: Viking Vision Stop
A29 General: Ballhead On Power Up
A30 General: Clutch-in Aborted
A31 General: Gov No. Out Of Range
A32 General: Fuel Rack Control

A41 CAN2: Comms Failed


A42 CAN2: Message Missed
A43 CAN2: Governor Lost
A44 CAN2: Governor ID Clash

NOTE For the display module mode messages (beginning with L) see the ALL ENGINES
LOAD SHARING DISPLAY MENU section.

ER509/890
Page 101 of 142
MENU AND PARAMETER RECORD

Hardware > Digital > Inputs > Standard Channel A > Configuration Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Force 1 Disable
Force Value 1 Off
Force 2 Disable
Force Value 2 Off
Force 3 Disable
Force Value 3 Off
Force 4 Disable
Force Value 4 Off
Force 5 Disable
Force Value 5 Off
Force 6 Disable
Force Value 6 Off
Force 7 Disable
Force Value 7 Off
Force 8 Disable
Force Value 8 Off
Force 9 Disable
Force Value 9 Off
Force 10 Disable
Force Value 10 Off
Force 11 Disable
Force Value 11 Off
Force 12 Disable
Force Value 12 Off
Force 13 Disable
Force Value 13 Off
Force 14 Disable
Force Value 14 Off
Force 15 Disable
Force Value 15 Off
Force 16 Disable
Force Value 16 Off

ER509/890
Page 102 of 142
Hardware > Digital > Inputs > Expanded Channel B > Configuration Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Force 17 Disable
Force Value 17 Off
Force18 Disable
Force Value 18 Off
Force 19 Disable
Force Value 19 Off
Force 20 Disable
Force Value20 Off
Force 21 Disable
Force Value 21 Off
Force 22 Disable
Force Value 22 Off
Force 23 Disable
Force Value 23 Off
Force 24 Disable
Force Value 24 Off
Force 25 Disable
Force Value 25 Off
Force 26 Disable
Force Value 26 Off
Force 27 Disable
Force Value 27 Off
Force 28 Disable
Force Value 28 Off
Force 29 Disable
Force Value 29 Off
Force 30 Disable
Force Value 30 Off
Force 31 Disable
Force Value 31 Off
Force 32 Disable
Force Value 32 Off

ER509/890
Page 103 of 142
Hardware > Digital > Inputs > Expanded Channel C > Configuration Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Force 33 Disable
Force Value 33 Off
Force34 Disable
Force Value 34 Off
Force 35 Disable
Force Value 35 Off
Force 36 Disable
Force Value 36 Off
Force 37 Disable
Force Value 37 Off
Force 38 Disable
Force Value 38 Off
Force 39 Disable
Force Value 39 Off
Force 40 Disable
Force Value 40 Off
Force 41 Disable
Force Value 41 Off
Force 42 Disable
Force Value 42 Off
Force 43 Disable
Force Value 43 Off
Force 44 Disable
Force Value 44 Off
Force 45 Disable
Force Value 45 Off
Force 46 Disable
Force Value 46 Off
Force 47 Disable
Force Value 47 Off
Force 48 Disable
Force Value 48 Off

Hardware > Digital > Inputs > miscellaneous > Configuration Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Force Actuator WB Disable
Force Value Act. WB Off

ER509/890
Page 104 of 142
Hardware > Digital > Outputs > Standard Channel A > Configuration Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Force 1 Disable
Force Value 1 Off
Force 2 Disable
Force Value 2 Off
Force 3 Disable
Force Value 3 Off
Force 4 Disable
Force Value 4 Off
Force 5 Disable
Force Value 5 Off
Force 6 Disable
Force Value 6 Off
Force 7 Disable
Force Value 7 Off
Force 8 Disable
Force Value 8 Off
Force 9 Disable
Force Value 9 Off
Force 10 Disable
Force Value 10 Off
Force 11 Disable
Force Value 11 Off
Force 12 Disable
Force Value 12 Off
Force 13 Disable
Force Value 13 Off
Force 14 Disable
Force Value 14 Off
Force 15 Disable
Force Value 15 Off
Force 16 Disable
Force Value 16 Off

ER509/890
Page 105 of 142
Hardware > Digital > Outputs > Expanded Channel B > Configuration Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Force 17 Disable
Force Value 17 Off
Force18 Disable
Force Value 18 Off
Force 19 Disable
Force Value 19 Off
Force 20 Disable
Force Value20 Off
Force 21 Disable
Force Value 21 Off
Force 22 Disable
Force Value 22 Off
Force 23 Disable
Force Value 23 Off
Force 24 Disable
Force Value 24 Off
Force 25 Disable
Force Value 25 Off
Force 26 Disable
Force Value 26 Off
Force 27 Disable
Force Value 27 Off
Force 28 Disable
Force Value 28 Off
Force 29 Disable
Force Value 29 Off
Force 30 Disable
Force Value 30 Off
Force 31 Disable
Force Value 31 Off
Force 32 Disable
Force Value 32 Off

ER509/890
Page 106 of 142
Hardware > Digital > Outputs > Expanded Channel C > Configuration Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Force 33 Disable
Force Value 33 Off
Force34 Disable
Force Value 34 Off
Force 35 Disable
Force Value 35 Off
Force 36 Disable
Force Value 36 Off
Force 37 Disable
Force Value 37 Off
Force 38 Disable
Force Value 38 Off
Force 39 Disable
Force Value 39 Off
Force 40 Disable
Force Value 40 Off
Force 41 Disable
Force Value 41 Off
Force 42 Disable
Force Value 42 Off
Force 43 Disable
Force Value 43 Off
Force 44 Disable
Force Value 44 Off
Force 45 Disable
Force Value 45 Off
Force 46 Disable
Force Value 46 Off
Force 47 Disable
Force Value 47 Off
Force 48 Disable
Force Value 48 Off

Hardware > Digital > Outputs > Miscellaneous > Configuration Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Force S.T.F Disable
Force Value S.T.F Off
Force P.H Disable
Force Value P.H Off

ER509/890
Page 107 of 142
Hardware > Actuator > Force Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Force 0 0 2
Force Position 0.00 0.00 10.00
Force Current 0 0 1000

Hardware > Actuator > set Up Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Sysytem Offset 0 -3.0 3.0

Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A > Configuration Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Type 1 4-20 mA
Type 2 4-20 mA
Type 3 4-20 mA
Type 4 4-20 mA
Type 5 4-20 mA
Type 6 4-20 mA
Type 7 4-20 mA
Type 8 4-20 mA

Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A > Force Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Enable 1 Disable
Value 1 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 2 Disable
Value 2 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 3 Disable
Value 3 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 4 Disable
Value 4 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 5 Disable
Value 5 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 6 Disable
Value 6 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 7 Disable
Value 7 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 8 Disable
Value 8 0.0 0.0 100.0

ER509/890
Page 108 of 142
Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A > Calibration > Current Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Raw Value 1 4mA 192 0 1023
Raw Value 1 20mA 945 0 1023
Raw Value 2 4mA 192 0 1023
Raw Value 2 20mA 945 0 1023
Raw Value 3 4mA 192 0 1023
Raw Value 3 20mA 945 0 1023
Raw Value 4 4mA 192 0 1023
Raw Value 4 20mA 945 0 1023
Raw Value 5 4mA 192 0 1023
Raw Value 5 20mA 945 0 1023
Raw Value 6 4mA 192 0 1023
Raw Value 6 20mA 945 0 1023
Raw Value 7 4mA 192 0 1023
Raw Value 7 20mA 945 0 1023
Raw Value 8 4mA 192 0 1023
Raw Value 8 20mA 945 0 1023

Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A > Calibration > Voltage > 0-5V Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Raw Value 1 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 1 5V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 2 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 2 5V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 3 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 3 5V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 4 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 4 5V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 5 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 5 5V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 6 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 6 5V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 7 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 7 5V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 8 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 8 5V 1023 0 1023

ER509/890
Page 109 of 142
Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A > Calibration > Voltage > 0-10V Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Raw Value 1 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 1 10V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 2 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 2 10V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 3 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 3 10V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 4 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 4 10V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 5 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 5 10V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 6 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 6 10V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 7 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 7 10V 1023 0 1023
Raw Value 8 0V 0 0 1023
Raw Value 8 10V 1023 0 1023

Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A > TX Fail Range > Current Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
A1 TX Check Status Enable Both
A1 Cecke High 21.0 4.0 50.0
A1 Ceck Low 3.0 0.0 20.0
A2 TX Check Status Enable Both
A2 Cecke High 21.0 4.0 50.0
A2 Ceck Low 3.0 0.0 20.0
A3 TX Check Status Enable Both
A3 Cecke High 21.0 4.0 50.0
A3 Ceck Low 3.0 0.0 20.0
A4 TX Check Status Enable Both
A4 Cecke High 21.0 4.0 50.0
A4 Ceck Low 3.0 0.0 20.0
A5 TX Check Status Enable Both
A5 Cecke High 21.0 4.0 50.0
A5 Ceck Low 3.0 0.0 20.0
A6 TX Check Status Enable Both
A6 Cecke High 21.0 4.0 50.0
A6 Ceck Low 3.0 0.0 20.0
A7 TX Check Status Enable Both
A7 Cecke High 21.0 4.0 50.0
A7 Ceck Low 3.0 0.0 20.0
A8 TX Check Status Enable Both
A8 Cecke High 21.0 4.0 50.0
A8 Ceck Low 3.0 0.0 20.0

ER509/890
Page 110 of 142
Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A > TX Fail Range > Voltage > 0-5V Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
A1 TX Check Status Enable Both
A1 Cecke High 6.0 0.0 13.0
A1 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 5.0
A2 TX Check Status Enable Both
A2 Cecke High 6.0 0.0 13.0
A2 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 5.0
A3 TX Check Status Enable Both
A3 Cecke High 6.0 0.0 13.0
A3 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 5.0
A4 TX Check Status Enable Both
A4 Cecke High 6.0 0.0 13.0
A4 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 5.0
A5 TX Check Status Enable Both
A5 Cecke High 6.0 0.0 13.0
A5 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 5.0
A6 TX Check Status Enable Both
A6 Cecke High 6.0 0.0 13.0
A6 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 5.0
A7 TX Check Status Enable Both
A7 Cecke High 6.0 0.0 13.0
A7 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 5.0
A8 TX Check Status Enable Both
A8 Cecke High 6.0 0.0 13.0
A8 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 5.0

ER509/890
Page 111 of 142
Hardware > Analogue > Inputs > Channel A > TX Fail Range > Voltage > 0-10V Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
A1 TX Check Status Enable Both
A1 Cecke High 11.0 0.0 20.0
A1 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 10.0
A2 TX Check Status Enable Both
A2 Cecke High 11.0 0.0 20.0
A2 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 10.0
A3 TX Check Status Enable Both
A3 Cecke High 11.0 0.0 20.0
A3 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 10.0
A4 TX Check Status Enable Both
A4 Cecke High 11.0 0.0 20.0
A4 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 10.0
A5 TX Check Status Enable Both
A5 Cecke High 11.0 0.0 20.0
A5 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 10.0
A6 TX Check Status Enable Both
A6 Cecke High 11.0 0.0 20.0
A6 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 10.0
A7 TX Check Status Enable Both
A7 Cecke High 11.0 0.0 20.0
A7 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 10.0
A8 TX Check Status Enable Both
A8 Cecke High 11.0 0.0 20.0
A8 Ceck Low 0.0 0.0 10.0

Hardware > Analogue > Outputs > Channel A > Configuration Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Type 1 4-20 mA
Type 2 4-20 mA
Type 3 4-20 mA
Type 4 4-20 mA
Type 5 4-20 mA
Type 6 4-20 mA
Type 7 4-20 mA
Type 8 4-20 mA

ER509/890
Page 112 of 142
Hardware > Analogue > Outputs > Channel A > Force Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Enable 1 Disable
Value 1 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 2 Disable
Value 2 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 3 Disable
Value 3 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 4 Disable
Value 4 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 5 Disable
Value 5 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 6 Disable
Value 6 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 7 Disable
Value 7 0.0 0.0 100.0
Enable 8 Disable
Value 8 0.0 0.0 100.0

Hardware > Analogue > Outputs > Channel A > Calibration > Current Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Raw Value 1 4mA 2450 0 4095
Raw Value 1 20mA 4079 0 4095
Raw Value 2 4mA 2450 0 4095
Raw Value 2 20mA 4079 0 4095
Raw Value 3 4mA 2450 0 4095
Raw Value 3 20mA 4079 0 4095
Raw Value 4 4mA 2450 0 4095
Raw Value 4 20mA 4079 0 4095
Raw Value 5 4mA 2450 0 4095
Raw Value 5 20mA 4079 0 4095
Raw Value 6 4mA 2450 0 4095
Raw Value 6 20mA 4079 0 4095
Raw Value 7 4mA 2450 0 4095
Raw Value 7 20mA 4079 0 4095
Raw Value 8 4mA 2450 0 4095
Raw Value 8 20mA 4079 0 4095

ER509/890
Page 113 of 142
Hardware > Analogue > Outputs > Channel A > Calibration > Voltage > 0-5V Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Raw Value 1 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 1 5V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 2 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 2 5V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 3 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 3 5V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 4 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 4 5V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 5 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 5 5V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 6 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 6 5V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 7 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 7 5V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 8 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 8 5V 4095 0 4095

Hardware > Analogue > Outputs > Channel A > Calibration > Voltage > 0-10V Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Raw Value 1 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 1 10V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 2 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 2 10V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 3 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 3 10V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 4 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 4 10V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 5 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 5 10V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 6 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 6 10V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 7 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 7 10V 4095 0 4095
Raw Value 8 0V 2048 0 4095
Raw Value 8 10V 4095 0 4095

Hardware > Real Time Clock > Synchronous RTC Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Synchronous Time Disable
Seconds 0 0 0
Minutes 0 0 59
Hours 0 0 23
Date 1 1 31
Month 1 1 12
Year 2007 2007 65535

ER509/890
Page 114 of 142
Hardware > Real Time Clock > Adjust RTC Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Adjust Prescaler Disable
RTC Precaler 0 -30706 1017867
Adjust ByOffset Once Disable
Off Set Time 0 -1200 1200
Auto Adjust ByOffset Disable
Month 0 0 14400

Hardware > Temperature Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Reset 0 0 0
Alarm Level 80 0 150

Hardware > Pickups Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Pickup 1 Enable Enable
Pickup 2 Enable Enable
Lowest RPM 20 10 100
Highest RPM 900 400 6000
Change Over Enable Enable

Hardware > Serial > RE Communications > Port 1 > Configuration Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Type RS232 RS232 RS232

Hardware > Serial > RS Communications > Port 2 > Configuration Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Type RS485

Hardware > Serial > CAN Bus > CAN Port 1 > Configure Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
CAN Enable Disable

ER509/890
Page 115 of 142
Hardware > Serial > CAN Bus > CAN Port 2 > Configure Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
CAN Enable Enable
Reset Time Delay 1 0 1200
Max No Single Replay 3 3 30
Max No Comms Delay 320 160 5000
Max Gov. Lost Delay 320 160 5000

Hardware > Serial > CAN Bus > CAN Port 3 > Configure Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
CAN Enable Disable

Hardware > Misc > Memory Test Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Memory Test Disable

Configuration > Engine Types > Selection Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Type Type 1

Configuration > Engine Types > Type 1 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 3 2 14
Teeth 245 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

ER509/890
Page 116 of 142
Configuration > Engine Types > Type 2 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 4 2 14
Teeth 245 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

Configuration > Engine Types > Type 3 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 9 2 14
Teeth 245 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

Configuration > Engine Types > Type 4 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 3 2 14
Teeth 286 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

ER509/890
Page 117 of 142
Configuration > Engine Types > Type 5 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 4 2 14
Teeth 286 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

Configuration > Engine Types > Type 6 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 9 2 14
Teeth 286 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

Configuration > Engine Types > Type 7 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 3 2 14
Teeth 309 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

ER509/890
Page 118 of 142
Configuration > Engine Types > Type 8 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 4 2 14
Teeth 309 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

Configuration > Engine Types > Type 9 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 3 2 14
Teeth 165 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

Configuration > Engine Types > Type 10 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 4 2 14
Teeth 165 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

ER509/890
Page 119 of 142
Configuration > Engine Types > Type 11 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 9 2 14
Teeth 165 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

Configuration > Engine Types > Type 12 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 3 2 14
Teeth 217 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

Configuration > Engine Types > Type 13 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 4 2 14
Teeth 217 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

ER509/890
Page 120 of 142
Configuration > Engine Types > Type 14 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 9 2 14
Teeth 217 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

Configuration > Engine Types > Type 15 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 3 2 14
Teeth 66 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

Configuration > Engine Types > Type 16 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Markers 3 2 14
Teeth 66 3 400
Every Other No
Pickup 1 Type Low Frequency
Pickup 1 Enable
Pickup 2 Type High Frequency
Pickup 2 Enable
Actuator Mode Non Bhd
Crankcase Offset 0.0 -3.0 3.0

Configuration > General Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Save Save

ER509/890
Page 121 of 142
Speed Setting > General Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Running Speed 200 80 500
Idle Speed 300 200 600
Clutch-in Speed 350 200 600
Rated Speed 500 400 1100
Nominal Speed 500 400 1100
Speed Step Offset 10 0 100
Speed Step Time 3.0 0.0 30.0

Speed Setting > Local Mode Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Up Ramp1 / s 10.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp3 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp1 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp3 / s 15.0 0.1 100.0
R1 / R2 Speed 385 200 1000
R2 / R3 Speed 685 200 1000
Maximum Setspeed 525 400 1100
Minimum Setspeed 350 200 900

Speed Setting > Emergency Mode Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Up Ramp1 / s 10.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp3 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp1 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp3 / s 15.0 0.1 100.0
R1 / R2 Speed 385 200 1000
R2 / R3 Speed 685 200 1000
Maximum Setspeed 525 400 1100
Minimum Setspeed 350 200 900
Emergency Speed 500 400 1100

ER509/890
Page 122 of 142
Speed Setting > SS Active Mode Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Up Ramp1 / s 10.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp3 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp1 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp3 / s 15.0 0.1 100.0
R1 / R2 Speed 385 200 1000
R2 / R3 Speed 685 200 1000
Maximum Setspeed 525 400 1100
Minimum Setspeed 350 200 900

Speed Setting > Const Speed Mode Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Up Ramp1 / s 10.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp3 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp1 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp3 / s 15.0 0.1 100.0
R1 / R2 Speed 385 200 1000
R2 / R3 Speed 685 200 1000

Speed Setting > Generator Mode Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Up Ramp1 / s 10.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp3 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp1 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp3 / s 15.0 0.1 100.0
R1 / R2 Speed 385 200 1000
R2 / R3 Speed 685 200 1000
Maximum Setspeed 525 400 1100
Minimum Setspeed 350 200 900
CB Offset Speed 10 -100 100
BT Offset Speed 10 -100 100

ER509/890
Page 123 of 142
Speed Setting > Bridge Control Mode Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Up Ramp1 / s 10.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp3 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp1 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp3 / s 15.0 0.1 100.0
R1 / R2 Speed 385 200 1000
R2 / R3 Speed 685 200 1000
Bridge Speed 500 400 1100

Speed Setting > Combi 1 Mode Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Up Ramp1 / s 10.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp3 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp1 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp3 / s 15.0 0.1 100.0
R1 / R2 Speed 385 200 1000
R2 / R3 Speed 685 200 1000
Tx Fail Monitor Current
mode
Max Setspeed / mA 20.0 12.0 20.0
Min Setspeed / mA 4.0 4.0 12.0
Max Setspeed / rpm 500 400 1100
Min Setspeed / rpm 300 200 600

Speed Setting > Combi 2 Mode Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Up Ramp1 / s 10.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp3 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp1 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp3 / s 15.0 0.1 100.0
R1 / R2 Speed 385 200 1000
R2 / R3 Speed 685 200 1000
Tx Fail Monitor Current
mode
Max Setspeed / mA 20.0 12.0 20.0
Min Setspeed / mA 4.0 4.0 12.0
Max Setspeed / rpm 500 400 1100
Min Setspeed / rpm 300 200 600

ER509/890
Page 124 of 142
Speed Setting > Fi-Fi Mode Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Up Ramp1 / s 10.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Up Ramp3 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp1 / s 0.7 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp2 / s 3.0 0.1 100.0
Down Ramp3 / s 15.0 0.1 100.0
R1 / R2 Speed 385 200 1000
R2 / R3 Speed 685 200 1000
Tx Fail Monitor Current
mode
Max Setspeed / mA 20.0 12.0 20.0
Min Setspeed / mA 4.0 4.0 12.0
Max Setspeed / rpm 500 400 1100
Min Setspeed / rpm 300 200 600

Control > Control Gains > S.F.L. Dynamics Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Droop 0.0 0.0 10.0
Droop Null 2.0 0.0 10.0
Prop. Gain 17.50 1.00 25.00
Integ. Gain 1.00 0.01 15.00
Deriv. Gain 0.0000 0.0000 5.0000

Control > Control Gains > Dynamics 1 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Local Droop 0.0 0.0 10.0
Droop 0.0 0.0 10.0
Droop Null 2.0 0.0 10.0
Prop. Gain 17.50 1.00 25.00
Integ. Gain 1.00 0.01 15.00
Deriv. Gain 0.0000 0.0000 5.0000

Control > Control Gains > Dynamics 2 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Local Droop 0.0 0.0 10.0
Droop 0.0 0.0 10.0
Droop Null 2.0 0.0 10.0
Prop. Gain 17.50 1.00 25.00
Integ. Gain 1.00 0.01 15.00
Deriv. Gain 0.0000 0.0000 5.0000

ER509/890
Page 125 of 142
Control > Control Gains > Dynamics 3 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Droop 0.0 0.0 10.0
Droop Null 2.0 0.0 10.0
Prop. Gain 17.50 1.00 25.00
Integ. Gain 1.00 0.01 15.00
Deriv. Gain 0.0000 0.0000 5.0000

Control > Control Gains > Dynamics 4 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Droop 0.0 0.0 10.0
Droop Null 2.0 0.0 10.0
Prop. Gain 17.50 1.00 25.00
Integ. Gain 1.00 0.01 15.00
Deriv. Gain 0.0000 0.0000 5.0000

Control > Control Gains > Dynamics 5 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Droop 0.0 0.0 10.0
Droop Null 2.0 0.0 10.0
Prop. Gain 17.50 1.00 25.00
Integ. Gain 1.00 0.01 15.00
Deriv. Gain 0.0000 0.0000 5.0000

Control > Control Gains > Gain Modifiers > Non-Linear Gain 1 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Data Point 0 0.00 0.00 0.00
Data Point 1 0.40 0.00 10.00
Data Point 2 0.90 0.00 10.00
Data Point 3 2.50 0.00 10.00
Data Point 4 3.30 0.00 10.00
Data Point 5 4.40 0.00 10.00
Data Point 6 5.50 0.00 10.00
Data Point 7 6.60 0.00 10.00
Data Point 8 7.70 0.00 10.00
Data Point 9 8.80 0.00 10.00
Data Point 10 10.00 0.00 10.00
Error Range 10.0 0.0 10.0
NLG Enable Enable

ER509/890
Page 126 of 142
Control > Control Gains > Gain Modifiers > Non-Linear Gain 2 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Data Point 0 0.00 0.00 0.00
Data Point 1 0.40 0.00 10.00
Data Point 2 0.90 0.00 10.00
Data Point 3 2.50 0.00 10.00
Data Point 4 3.30 0.00 10.00
Data Point 5 4.40 0.00 10.00
Data Point 6 5.50 0.00 10.00
Data Point 7 6.60 0.00 10.00
Data Point 8 7.70 0.00 10.00
Data Point 9 8.80 0.00 10.00
Data Point 10 10.00 0.00 10.00
Error Range 10.0 0.0 10.0
NLG Enable Enable

Control > Control Gains > Gain Modifiers > Non-Linear Gain 3 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Data Point 0 0.00 0.00 0.00
Data Point 1 0.40 0.00 10.00
Data Point 2 0.90 0.00 10.00
Data Point 3 2.50 0.00 10.00
Data Point 4 3.30 0.00 10.00
Data Point 5 4.40 0.00 10.00
Data Point 6 5.50 0.00 10.00
Data Point 7 6.60 0.00 10.00
Data Point 8 7.70 0.00 10.00
Data Point 9 8.80 0.00 10.00
Data Point 10 10.00 0.00 10.00
Error Range 10.0 0.0 10.0
NLG Enable Enable

Control > Control Gains > Gain Modifiers > Non-Linear Gain 4 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Data Point 0 0.00 0.00 0.00
Data Point 1 0.40 0.00 10.00
Data Point 2 0.90 0.00 10.00
Data Point 3 2.50 0.00 10.00
Data Point 4 3.30 0.00 10.00
Data Point 5 4.40 0.00 10.00
Data Point 6 5.50 0.00 10.00
Data Point 7 6.60 0.00 10.00
Data Point 8 7.70 0.00 10.00
Data Point 9 8.80 0.00 10.00
Data Point 10 10.00 0.00 10.00
Error Range 10.0 0.0 10.0
NLG Enable Enable

ER509/890
Page 127 of 142
Control > Control Gains > Gain Modifiers > S.F.L SVG Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Data Point 0 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 1 75.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 2 35.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 3 45.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 4 55.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 5 65.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 6 75.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 7 85.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 8 95.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 9 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 10 100.0 0.0 100.0
High RPM 350 100 1000
Low RPM 50 0 600
Proportional Enable Enable
Integral Enable Enable
Derivative Enable Enable

Control > Control Gains > Gain Modifiers > Speed Variable Gain 1 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Data Point 0 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 1 75.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 2 35.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 3 45.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 4 55.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 5 65.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 6 75.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 7 85.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 8 95.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 9 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 10 100.0 0.0 100.0
High RPM 500 400 1100
Low RPM 250 0 600
Proportional Enable Enable
Integral Enable Enable
Derivative Enable Enable

ER509/890
Page 128 of 142
Control > Control Gains > Gain Modifiers > Speed Variable Gain 2 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Data Point 0 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 1 90.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 2 80.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 3 70.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 4 55.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 5 37.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 6 20.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 7 10.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 8 0.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 9 0.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 10 0.0 0.0 100.0
High RPM 500 400 1100
Low RPM 250 0 600
Proportional Enable Disable
Integral Enable Disable
Derivative Enable Enable

Control > Control Gains > Gain Modifiers > Speed Variable Gain 3 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Data Point 0 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 1 75.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 2 35.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 3 45.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 4 55.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 5 65.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 6 75.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 7 85.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 8 95.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 9 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 10 100.0 0.0 100.0
High RPM 500 400 1100
Low RPM 250 0 600
Proportional Enable Enable
Integral Enable Enable
Derivative Enable Enable

ER509/890
Page 129 of 142
Control > Control Gains > Gain Modifiers > Additional SV Gain Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Additional SVG Stat. In Use
Data Point 0 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 1 75.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 2 35.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 3 45.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 4 55.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 5 65.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 6 75.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 7 85.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 8 95.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 9 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 10 100.0 0.0 100.0
High RPM 500 400 1100
Low RPM 250 0 600
Proportional Enable Disable
Integral Enable Disable
Derivative Enable Enable

Control > Control Gains > Gain Modifiers > Load Variable Gain 1 Menu[ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Data Point 0 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 1 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 2 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 3 80.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 4 60.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 5 40.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 6 20.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 7 10.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 8 0.1 0.0 100.0
Data Point 9 0.1 0.0 100.0
Data Point 10 0.1 0.0 100.0
Proportional Enable Disable
Integral Enable Disable
Derivative Enable Disable

ER509/890
Page 130 of 142
Control > Control Gains > Gain Modifiers > Load Variable Gain 2 Menu[ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Data Point 0 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 1 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 2 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 3 80.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 4 60.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 5 40.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 6 20.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 7 10.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 8 0.1 0.0 100.0
Data Point 9 0.1 0.0 100.0
Data Point 10 0.0 0.0 100.0
Proportional Enable Disable
Integral Enable Disable
Derivative Enable Disable

Control > Control Gains > Gain Modifiers > Load Variable Gain 3 Menu[ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Data Point 0 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 1 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 2 100.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 3 80.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 4 60.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 5 40.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 6 20.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 7 10.0 0.0 100.0
Data Point 8 0.1 0.0 100.0
Data Point 9 0.1 0.0 100.0
Data Point 10 0.1 0.0 100.0
Proportional Enable Disable
Integral Enable Disable
Derivative Enable Disable

Control > Control Gains > Actuator Control Menu[ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Integ. Gain 1.00 0.01 15.00
Bias Limit +/- 10.0 0.1 100.0
Alarm Enable Disable
Alarm Delay 10.0 0.1 600.0
Match Window +/- 1.0 0.1 100.0

ER509/890
Page 131 of 142
Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > Boost Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Enable Enable
Data Point 0 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 1 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 2 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 3 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 4 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 5 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 6 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 7 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 8 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 9 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 10 10.0 0.0 10.0
Maximum Boost / mA 20.0 12.0 20.0
Minimum Boost / mA 4.0 4.0 12.0
Maximum Boost / Bar 20.0 0.0 20.0
Minimum Boost / Bar 0.0 0.0 20.0

Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > Torque: 1 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Enable Disable
Data Point 0 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 1 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 2 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 3 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 4 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 5 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 6 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 7 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 8 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 9 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 10 10.0 0.0 10.0
High RPM 1060 400 1100
Low RPM 330 200 600
Limit Delay Period 2.0 0.0 30.0

ER509/890
Page 132 of 142
Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > Torque: 2 Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Enable Disable
Data Point 0 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 1 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 2 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 3 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 4 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 5 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 6 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 7 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 8 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 9 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 10 10.0 0.0 10.0
High RPM 1060 400 1100
Low RPM 330 200 600
Limit Delay Period 2.0 0.0 30.0

Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > Torque: Clutch-in Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Enable Disable
Data Point 0 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 1 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 2 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 3 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 4 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 5 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 6 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 7 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 8 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 9 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 10 10.0 0.0 10.0
High RPM 1060 400 1100
Low RPM 330 200 600
Limit Delay Period 2.0 0.0 30.0

ER509/890
Page 133 of 142
Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > Torque: fi-fi Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Enable Disable
Data Point 0 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 1 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 2 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 3 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 4 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 5 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 6 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 7 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 8 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 9 10.0 0.0 10.0
Data Point 10 10.0 0.0 10.0
High RPM 1060 400 1100
Low RPM 330 200 600
Limit Delay Period 2.0 0.0 30.0

Control > Fuel Control > Fuel Limits > General Menu[ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Emerg Start Fuel 5.5 1.0 9.0
Release Ramp rate 0.5 1 10
Reset Speed Margin 5.00 50 5000

Control > Fuel Control > Fuel rack Position Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Rack Tx Availability Not Avail
mA / Actuator Pos 8 16.8 12.0 20.0
mA / Actuator Pos 2 7.2 4.0 12.0
%Rack / Actuator Pos 8 80.0 50.0 150.0
%Rack / Actuator Pos 2 20.0 -50.0 60.0
Input Filter Stages 1 1 50

System > General Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Idle Hold Time 5.0 0.0 300.0
Stop Time 180.0 0.0 300.0
Actuator Wire Break Enable
Mode Display 4 Engine

ER509/890
Page 134 of 142
System > Level Outputs Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Speed 1 Level 400 50 1200
Speed 1 Hysterisis 5 0 100
Speed 2 Level 400 50 1200
Speed 2 Hysterisis 5 0 100
Speed 3 Level 400 50 1200
Speed 3 Hysterisis 5 0 100
Load 1 Level 50.0 0.0 100.0
Load 1 Hysterisis 5.0 0.0 20.0
Load 2 Level 50.0 0.0 100.0
Load 2 Hysterisis 5.0 0.0 20.0

System > Analogue Outputs Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Maximum Tacho1 Speed 700 0 1250
Minimum Tacho1 Speed 0 0 1250
Maximum Tacho2 Speed 700 0 1250
Minimum Tacho2 Speed 0 0 1250
PID Maximum Load 10.00 6.00 10.00
PID Filter Stages 20 1 50
Act. Maximum Load 10.0 6.00 10.00
Act. Filter Stages 20 1 50
Max. Ramped Setspeed 700 0 1250
Min. Ramped Setspeed 0 0 1250

System > Clutch Control Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Application selection Single Eng.
Twin Governor Number 2 1 8
Shaft Gen Selection Not Inst
Delta ClutchIn Speed 20 -100 100
ClutchIn delay 40.0 0.0 300.0
Engage Period 30.0 0.0 300.0
Speed Ramp Delay 20.0 0.0 300.0

ER509/890
Page 135 of 142
System > Start Control Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Hot Start Period 60 0 600
Start Air Level 50 10 90
Start Air Hysterisis 2 0 15
Maximum Fuel / mA 20.0 12.0 20.0
Minimum Fuel / mA 4.0 4.0 12.0
Maximum Fuel / % 100 0 100
Minimum Fuel / % 0 0 10
Start FL Stationary 4.5 1.0 9.0
Start FL Rotating 4.5 0 10.0
Firing Speed 50 20 200
Start Control Speed 70 50 300
Start Ramp1 / s 10.0 1.0 50.0
Start Ramp2 / s 20.0 1.0 50.0
Start Ramp3 / s 30.0 1.0 50.0
R1 / R2 Speed 150 50 500
R2 / R3 Speed 250 50 500
Start Air Rise Delay 0.000 0.000 600.000
Start Air Fall Delay 0.000 0.000 600.000

Loadshare > General Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Preset Factory Low Factory High PW


Limit Limit
Governor Number 1 1 8
Droop Select Disable
Masterless Type Isochronous
TTSC High Level 525.0 100.0 1200.0 Opmerking [x1]:
TTSC Low Level 475.0 100.0 1200.0 Opmerking [x2]:
Trip Speed Band 50.0 5.0 500.0
Rack Filter Stages 1 1 50
Opmerking [x3]:
Rack Filter Averaging Filter 0 1

Loadshare > Groups Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Group A Pref. Master Not Pref.
Group B Pref. Master Not Pref.
Group C Pref. Master Not Pref.
Group D Pref. Master Not Pref.
Intcon1 Config Normal
Intcon2 Config Normal
Intcon3 Config Normal

Loadshare > Master / Slave > Mode Select Config. Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
I/P #40: Loadshare Yes

ER509/890
Page 136 of 142
Loadshare > Master / Slave > General Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Incoming Match Ramp 20 1 100
General Match Ramp 100 1 150
Reduce Load Rate 0.0005 0.0001 0.0100
Off Load kW Trip 5.0 0.0 100.0
Off Load Fuel Target 2.00 0.00 10.00
Load Reduction Level 4.00 0.00 10.00

Loadshare > kW Balance > Mode Select Config. Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
I/P #38: Bus Tie Yes
I/P #42: kW Lshare Yes

Loadshare > kW Balance > PID Gains Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Factory High PW


Preset Low Limit Limit
Proportional 10.0 0.0 25.0
Integral 2.0 0.0 15.0
Derivative 0.0 0.0 5.0

Loadshare > kW Balance > Non-Linear Gain Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Data Point 0 0.00 0.00 100.0
Data Point 1 1.00 0.00 100.0
Data Point 2 2.00 0.00 100.0
Data Point 3 3.00 0.00 100.0
Data Point 4 4.00 0.00 100.0
Data Point 5 5.00 0.00 100.0
Data Point 6 6.00 0.00 100.0
Data Point 7 7.00 0.00 100.0
Data Point 8 8.00 0.00 100.0
Data Point 9 9.00 0.00 100.0
Data Point 10 10.00 0.00 100.0
Error Range 10.00 0.00 100.0
NLG Enable Disable

ER509/890
Page 137 of 142
Loadshare > kW Balance > Load Balance Offset Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Load Balance Offset Disable
Load Offset rate 2.0 0.1 100.0
Maximum Offset 20.0 12.0 20.0
Minimum Offset 4.0 4.0 12.0
Maximum Offset 100.0 10.0 100.0
Minimum Offset 0.0 0.0 0.0

Loadshare > kW Balance > General Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Factory High PW


Preset Low Limit Limit
KW Balance Limit 100.0 1.0 100.0
KW Transducer Available
Rated kW 1000 100 40000
Maximum kW Load 20.0 12.0 20.0
Minimum kW Load 4.0 4.0 12.0
Maximum kW Load 100.0 100.0 125.0
Minimum kW Load 0.0 -25.0 0.0
kW Load OOR Period 5.0 1.0 15.0

Loadshare > Load Setpoint Output Menu [ ]

Menu Item Factory Factory Low Factory High PW


Preset Limit Limit
Drive Configuration Disable
Load Offset rate 5.0 0.1 100.0
Maximum Offset / mA 3.3 12.0 20.0
Minimum Offset / mA 5.0 4.0 12.0

ER509/890
Page 138 of 142
Appendix A

When engine speed is measured from markers on the flywheel in order to minimise cyclic
effects, the number used depends on :

1) Number of cylinders
2) V angle

In some instances the software should be set to read Every Other marker as ½ a marker is not
possible.

In Line 4 Stroke

No. Of No. Of Every Other


Cylinders Markers
1 1 Yes
2 1 No
3 3 Yes
4 2 No
5 5 Yes
6 3 No
7 7 Yes
8 4 No

V Angle 4 Stroke

No. Of V Angle No. Of Every Other


Cylinders Markers
2 All angles 1 No
4 180q 2 No
4 Other than 180q 1 No
6 120q 3 No
6 Other than 120q 3 Yes
8 90q 4 No
8 Other than 90q 2 No
9 All angles 9 Yes
10 72q 5 No
10 Other than 72q 5 Yes
12 60q 6 No
12 Other than 60q 3 No
14 51.4q 7 No
14 Other than 51.4q 7 No
16 45q 8 No
16 Other than 45q 4 No
18 All angles 9 Yes
20 All angles 5 No

ER509/890
Page 139 of 142
Appendix B

Link Settings

PROCESSOR, MEMORY & PSU


LINK CONTRACT
POSITION (A) POSITION (B) POSITION
No.
1 Single chip mode A
2 Running mode Bootstrap loader mode A
4 N/A SRAM 5V B
Processor enabled Manual enabled flash
22 A
flash save save
54 Battery isolated Battery connected B
42 N/A N/A N/A

DIGITAL OUTPUTS
LINK CONTRACT
CHANNEL POSITION (NO) POSITION (NC) POSITION
No.
1 16 Normally open Normally closed x
2 15 Normally open Normally closed x
3 14 Normally open Normally closed x
4 13 Normally open Normally closed x
5 12 Normally open Normally closed x
6 11 Normally open Normally closed x
7 10 Normally open Normally closed x
8 9 Normally open Normally closed x

ANALOGUE INPUTS
LINK CONTRACT
CHANNEL POSITION (A) POSITION (B) POSITION
No.
79 0-5V range 0-10V range A
1
80 mA input mode Voltage input mode A
77 0-5V range 0-10V range A
2
78 mA input mode Voltage input mode A
75 0-5V range 0-10V range A
3
76 mA input mode Voltage input mode A
73 0-5V range 0-10V range A
4
74 mA input mode Voltage input mode A
71 0-5V range 0-10V range A
5
72 mA input mode Voltage input mode A
69 0-5V range 0-10V range A
6
70 mA input mode Voltage input mode A
67 0-5V range 0-10V range A
7
68 mA input mode Voltage input mode A
20 0-5V range 0-10V range A
8
21 mA input mode Voltage input mode A

ER509/890
Page 140 of 142
Continued

ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
LINK CONTRACT
CHANNEL POSITION (A) POSITION (B) POSITION
No.
64 0-5V range 0-10V range B
1 65 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
66 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
38 0-5V range 0-10V range B
2 39 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
40 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
35 0-5V range 0-10V range B
3 36 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
37 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
32 0-5V range 0-10V range B
4 33 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
34 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
29 0-5V range 0-10V range B
5 30 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
31 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
26 0-5V range 0-10V range B
6 27 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
28 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
23 0-5V range 0-10V range B
7 24 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
25 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
17 0-5V range 0-10V range B
8 18 Voltage output mode mA output mode B
19 Voltage output mode mA output mode B

MEAN LOAD
LINK CONTRACT
POSITION (A) POSITION (B) POSITION
No.
Normal analogue
47 Mean load mode A
mode
Normal analogue
48 Mean load mode A
mode
Normal analogue
49 Mean load mode A
mode

ER509/890
Page 141 of 142
SERIAL PORTS
LINK CONTRACT
CHANNEL POSITION (A) POSITION (B) POSITION
No.
RS485/422 mode
8 RS232 mode A
RS485/422 mode
50 RS232 mode A
1 RS485/422 mode
51 RS232 mode A
RS232 mode/not
43 RS485/422 terminated B
terminated
B
RS485/422 mode
52 RS232 mode B
RS485/422 mode
53 RS232 mode B
2 RS485/422 mode
55 RS232 mode A for end
RS232 mode/not
7 RS485/422 terminated units else
terminated
B

CANBUS PORT
LINK CONTRACT
POSITION (A) POSITION (B) POSITION
No.
5 Terminated Unterminated -

ER509/890
Page 142 of 142
Three-position Controller C5.05.05.09.16.01
Console Mounting

Three-position Controller

Console Mounting

en / 12.11.2008 FD024024 1/66


PLEIGER ELECTRONICS BG 0.00.6-98.14.00-06_en 362MC

Manual
ü Operation
ü Installation
ü Connection
ü Technical data
ü Hardware extensions
ü Functional extensions
ü Commissioning help

No. 9360000120
Edition: 2/00

Pleiger Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG


D-58456 Witten - Im Hammertal 51
D-58423 Witten - P.O.Box 32 63
Telephon (0 23 24) * 3 98- 0
Telefax (0 23 24) 3 98- 3 89
Internet www.pleiger.de/pe
e-mail info.pe@pleiger.de
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Contents Page
1 Introduction..................................................................................................... 4
2 Display and operating elements .................................................................... 5
2.1 Display .................................................................................................... 6
2.2 Operation ................................................................................................ 6
3 Operating modes............................................................................................ 7
3.1 Automatic mode ...................................................................................... 7
3.1.1 Setpoint entry ............................................................................... 7
3.2 Switching between Manual/Automatic.................................................... 7
4 Manual / Emergency manual mode ............................................................... 8
5 Commissioning extension .............................................................................. 9
5.1 Password entry ....................................................................................... 9
5.2 Commissioning menu ............................................................................. 10
5.3 Setpoint menu......................................................................................... 11
5.3.1 Explanatory note on setpoints ...................................................... 12
5.3.2 Explanatory note on the switching filter ....................................... 12
5.3.3 Explanatory note on the limit value alarm .................................... 12
5.4 Controller profile menu ........................................................................... 13
5.4.1 Entering parameters for two controllers ....................................... 13
5.4.2 Entering parameters for one controller only ................................. 13
5.5 Controller parameters menu ................................................................... 14
5.5.1 Explanatory note on controller types ............................................ 15
5.5.2 Explanatory note on controller structure ...................................... 17
5.5.3 Explanatory note on controller output parameters ....................... 18
5.6 Input menu .............................................................................................. 19
5.6.1 Explanatory note on calibration .................................................... 20
5.6.2 Explanatory note on scaling ......................................................... 20
5.7 Output menu ........................................................................................... 21
5.8 Display menu .......................................................................................... 22
5.8.1 Explanatory note on controller inputs/outputs.............................. 22
6 Monitoring functions and error messages ..................................................... 23
6.1 System monitoring functions .................................................................. 23
6.1.1 Explanatory note on Param error ................................................. 23
6.1.2 Explanatory note on ROM error and RAM error........................... 23
6.1.3 Explanatory note on the Reset function for the controller ........... 24
6.1.4 Explanatory note on Watchdog error ........................................... 24
6.2 Sensor monitoring functions ................................................................... 24
7 Service interface ............................................................................................ 25
7.1 Service programme McDiag ................................................................... 25
8 Installation ...................................................................................................... 26
9 Connection ..................................................................................................... 27
9.1 Terminal assignments ............................................................................. 27
9.2 Connection of supply voltage ................................................................. 28
9.3 Connection of the switching outputs ...................................................... 28
9.3.1 Connection with AC switching output contacts ............................ 28
9.3.2 Connection with floating switching output contacts ..................... 28
9.4 Connection of the alarm output .............................................................. 29
9.5 Connection of the binary inputs .............................................................. 29
9.6 Connection of the remote resistance-type sensor ................................. 29
9.7 Connection of a U/I measured-value transmitter.................................... 29

Page: 2 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Contents Page
9.8 Connection of the PT100 sensor ............................................................ 30
9.9 Connection of a I -value transmitter at the 1st linear input ..................... 30
9.10 Connecting cable ................................................................................... 30
10 Technical data ............................................................................................... 31

Appendix A: Reference overview


Appendix A1: Overview of menu structure for standard functions ..................... 32
Appendix A2: Parameters from A to Z for standard functions ............................ 33
Appendix A3: Value assignments from A to Z for standard functions ................ 34
Appendix A4: Error displays and messages from A to Z .................................... 35
Appendix A5: Symbols employed in this manual ................................................ 35

Appendix B: Hardware extensions for the 362MC


Appendix B1: Hardware extension - 2nd relay set ............................................... 36
Appendix B2: Hardware extension - Linear outputs ........................................... 37
Appendix B3: Hardware extension - RS485/RS422 communication interface .. 38

Appendix C: Functional extensions for the 362MC


Appendix C1: Special function - Trend compensation ........................................ 39
Appendix C2: Functional extension - Disturbance compensation ...................... 41
Appendix C3: Functional extension - Setpoint programme ................................ 45

Appendix D: Commissioning help


Appendix D1: Steps for commissioning .............................................................. 49
Appendix D2: Profile memories and factory presets........................................... 50
Appendix D3: Programme entries table for setpoint programmes ...................... 57

362MC Delivery configurations

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 3
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

1 Introduction
The Pleiger multi-function controller 263MC combines a large number of controller functions in a single
compact housing designed for installation in a control panel. A powerful microcontroller, a large param-
eter memory and a two-line alphanumeric display support simple and swift operation and commissioning
of the controller.
The 362MC incorporates the following controller functions in one unit:
• Two-point controller
• Three-point controller with separate parameter sets for both outputs
• Three-point step controller, with optional feedback of controller output
• Continuous controller
• Cascade step controller
Two independent control loops can be operated with one controller unit, provided that the controller is
permissible for the application concerned.
The 362MC incorporates a large number of special features, such as:
• an actual-value display and manual controller output adjustment which function
independently of the microcontroller to enable manual emergency operation for
switching controllers, even in the event of processor failure;
• a large non-volatile parameter memory to enable storage of up to 50 different controller
configurations for frequently required applications;
• a two-line alphanumeric LCD display for process data and easily comprehensible operating
prompting;
• a serial service interface which is accessible via the front panel of the controller, to enable
connection of a terminal or a PC to the Pleiger service programme 362McDiag.
In addition to the user-friendly operating and display functions, the 362MC does, of course, also provide
additional control functions to enable the safe and reliable control of complex systems, such as:
• differential trend compensation via the second measuring sensor, for enhanced control of
systems with large dead times;
• switch-over to a second setpoint via an external signal;
• inputs for an external setpoint and for logical adjustments and interlocks.
The 362 MC can be supplied in a configuration geared specifically to the application concerned, by
means of different voltage variants (230V AC, 115V AC) and different component variants for the
inputs (PT100, 0(4)-20mA, 0-(5)10V) and outputs (relays with supply voltage or floating contacts).
Hardware extensions are also available, such as
• a 2nd relay group for switching outputs,
• a module with 2 linear outputs - 0(4)-20mA or 0-10V,
• a module with RS 485/422 serial data interface
and functional extensions, such as
• additive disturbance compensation weighted via any characteristic with five interpolation
points for advance compensation of the controlled system and
• setpoint programmes for time-dependent setpoint adjustments.
In the appropriate configuration, the single 362MC unit is thus able to replace the Pleiger controllers and
supplementary modules 361-D, 362-D, 366-D and 366-V.

2 Display and operating elements


The 362MC controller incorporates a 2½-digit LED actual-value display for the 1st controller which is
clearly legible at a distance. For special applications, the display is also available as a 3½-digit variant
(with decimal digit or for special measuring ranges).

Page: 4 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

The 362MC additionally features an two lines LCD process data and parameter display. During normal
operation of the controller, this display is employed to display various process variables. The display also
provides easily comprehensible operator prompting for all entry operations.

LED actual-value display


LED Auto Actual value X of 1st controller
ON = Automatic mode without decimal place
OFF= Manual / Emergency (1st PT100 input direct)
manual mode
LCD display lines 1 + 2
(Operating display and
operator prompting)

Switching output buttons


+u = actuator OPEN
t- = actuator CLOSED
(only by Emergency
manual mode)
Selection + entry buttons
Man and Auto buttons p = Select+ increase value
Man = Manual / Emergency q = Select+decrease value
manual mode Prgm=Select+save
(only together with Exit) Exit =Cancel+abort
Auto = Automatic mode (Exit+Man=Manual /
Emergency manual mode)

Labelling field
for identification of
measuring points

Eight buttons are integrated in the foil of the front panel to control the display, to enter data, to switch the
operating mode and to activate emergency manual mode. The buttons are arranged in three groups.
A practical, replaceable labelling field is provided under the foil for identification of the measuring point.

After removing the front frame and


lifting the lower part of the foil, the
fuse for switching outputs and the
connector for the service interface
are also accessible after installation
of the controller.
Fuse F2 Connector for service interface Front frame The labelling field is simple to
replace.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 5
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

2.1 Display
On power up, the controller always displays the type and version no. first of all, before
switching to menu 1, the operational display. Here the process data are shown in the
Example of
two-line LCD display. Display lines 1 and 2 are visible in normal operating
operational display mode. By pressing the Prgm button, the display can be switched to a
Line 1 second mode (2nd line 1 and 2nd line 2)
Menu name
Line 2 for as long as the button is held.
The user can assign the process data
in the operational display to the lines via
2nd L1 the commissioning menu Display (5.8). Parameter name
2nd L2
Parameter value

2.2 Operation
Operation of the controller, configuration and setting of the controller Value entry
parameters are carried out with operator prompting in 3 selection levels. Example of display
Menu selection constitutes the highest selection level. In normal at selection and entry
operating mode the menu selection remains hidden and the process
data are shown on the LCD display. The desired menu is selected via the q and p buttons.
The menu name is now shown in the 1st line of the LCD display instead of the process data . Each menu
groups together entry items and parameters which are closely linked. The Prgm button can be used to
branch to the desired menu and the parameter selection function. The desired parameter is selected
here in the same manner, using the q and p buttons.
The 1st line of the display shows the name and the 2nd line the value of the selected parameter. If the
selected value now requires to be altered, the Prgm button must be pressed to branch to the parameter
entry function. Here the value can
be altered with the q and p buttons. Menu selection
The value is entered and saved via
the Prgm button. Menu n
Menu 1 Menu 2
If the Exit button is pressed at any
point, the current selection will be
aborted. From the parameter entry
Parameter selection

function the system will branch back


without altering the set value to Parameter
the parameter selection function, 1
Parameter entry
from parameter selection the system
will always branch back to he menu Value+1
Value
selection function, and from menu Parameter Param. 2
2 Value-1
selection menu 1 - the operational
display - will always be activated.
Should no button be pressed over a Save
value
period of 60 seconds during the
selection or entry process, the
operational display will be
re-activated automatically.

?
Parameter
n
On power up, the
362MC always
displays the type and version no.

Page: 6 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

3 Operating modes
The 362MC incorporates two operating modes - Automatic and Manual / Emergency manual mode. A
modified menu is provided for each operating mode. Both operating modes offer an extended version of
the menu for commissioning purposes. This extension to the menus for configuration and
parameterisation of the controller is protected by a password to prevent unauthorised use.
3.1 Automatic mode
The green Auto LED lights up; the controllers are operating in a closed-loop system. The setpoints can
be altered via the setpoint entry or the commissioning menus can be activated via the menu selection
function, provided that the valid password has been entered.
3.1.1 Setpoint entry Menu selection in automatic mode
After selecting the Setpoint Entry
Operational display Setpoint menu Password menu
menu under the menu selection
option in Automatic mode, the
setpoints and the alarm limits of
both controllers can be altered.
The 1st character of the name
displayed under the entry option with password
denotes the number of the entry to the
controller - 1 or 2. The letter A or commissioning
menu
B appears as the final character,
Abort

to distinguish between the main


setpoint (A) and the second setpoint Alter value
Value+1
(B) that becomes active in the case
of external setpoint switching.
Entry selection

The value for the lower alarm limit


of each controller is indicated by - Value-1

and the value for the upper alarm Save


limit is indicated by +. new value

See also Explanatory note on limit alarm (5.3.1).


This presentation of the setpoint entry procedure is based on the assumption that both controllers have
been configured as fixed setpoint controllers with setpoint type „fixed value“. The 1st controller setpoint is
101.0°C for Setp A and Setp B, irrespective of the setpoint switching function. 82.0°C is defined under
Setp A for the 2nd controller. When external setpoint switching applies, Setp B is set at 65.0°C. When a
different setpoint type is configured, the setpoint entry display has a different appearance.
Display example
In the case of the setpoint type external setpoint (extern), an external value connected
at the input becomes the setpoint. It is thus not possible to alter this value by entering a
different value. When the controller is implemented with a setpoint programme, the user
can switch between the stored programme numbers 1 to 5 (in this example 2).
See also Functional extensions (Appendix).
3.2 Switching between Manual/Automatic
Manual / Emergency Manual mode will only be activated if the user presses the Man and Exit button
simultaneously. This eliminates the possibility of Automatic mode being deactivated unintentionally or
by mistake. The green „AUTO“ LED turns off, and the text MANUAL is shown in the 1st line of the LCD
display in alternation with the process value. Manual operation of the outputs and emergency manual
mode for the switching output of the 1st controller are active.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 7
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Automatic mode is activated again by pressing the Auto button. The green LED marked „Auto“ lights up.

4 Manual / Emergency manual mode


When Manual / Emergency manual mode is active, buttons t- and +u are used to adjust the
1st controller´s switching output. When the +u button is pressed, the output is switched to +, as a result
of which the connected actuator is operated in OPEN direction. When the t- button is pressed, the
output is switched to -, as a result of which the actuator is operated in CLOSED direction.
This Emergency manual mode for the 1st controller operates irrespective of whether the micro-
controller is operational. The 2½-digit actual-value LED display of the 1st controller is also available for
Emergency manual mode independently of the microcontroller.
Manual mode is activated via the Manual menu to enable adjustment of a continuous controller output
of the 1st controller or to adjust a controller output of the 2nd controller. This menu can only be activated in
Manual mode, following the operational display.

Menu selection in Manual / Emergency manual mode


Operational display Manual menu Setpoint menu Password menu

Linear output Value+1


alternate 1st controller adjust to output
each second Switching or linear output
Abort

Emergency manual
adjust Value-1
with to output
Entry selection

2nd controller
Switching or linear output
Switching output
adjust

Outputs are adjusted immediately. The percentage output value of a linear output is altered from its
current value in accordance with the value entered by the user and is output directly. The switching
output on the 2nd controller is adjusted for as long as the button remains depressed.

? The buttons are provided only for the manual adjustment of switching
outputs on the 1st controller in Emergency manual mode, and have no other functions.

Page: 8 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

5 Commissioning extension
The menu selection option of the 362MC can be extended for the purposes of commissioning the con-
troller. The extended functions for altering the configuration or parameterisation are available in both
Automatic and Manual / Emergency manual mode. The menu extension is accessible after entering the
password. This password lock serves to provide protection against unauthorised use.
5.1 Password entry
If no password has been entered (PW-lock=On), the password lock will be deactivated to enable access
to the extended commissioning menu by entering the currently valid password.
To this end, digits 1 to 4 have to be set to the stored
Setpoint menu Password menu value for the password, in each case beginning from a
value of 0.

Value+1 Digit 1
Value entry
Abort

Value-1

Value+1 Digit 2
Value entry

Value-1

Value+1 Digit 3
Value entry

Value-1

Value+1 Digit 4
Value entry

Value-1

compare
value
(example)

After input of the 4th digit, shown in the example here as password 1234, the value is compared against
the stored password. If the entered value corresponds to the stored password, the password lock will be
deactivated (PW-lock=Off); if the entered value does not correspond to the stored password, the pass-
word lock will remain active.
The password status is retained when the voltage supply for the controller is switched on and off.

? On delivery, the password 0362 is stored for the 362MC.


Please alter this password to protect your specific settings.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 9
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

When the password entry function is selected while the password lock is deactivated (PW-lock=Off), the
password lock can be activated again or the stored password can be altered.

Activation of the password lock


Display menu Password menu When this function is selected, the current status:
password lock OFF or password lock ON, is shown in the
2nd line of the display. On activation of the password lock,
the system exits the commissioningmenu again.
Activation of the password lock

Password
lock
OFF
Abord

Password
lock
ON

Changing the Value+1 Digit 1


password
Value entry

Changing the password


A new password is selected and
Value-1 entered as already described in
Digit 2 to 4 detail under ‘Password entry’.
Value entry
Any number >=0000 and <=9999 is
permissible as the value for the
save password.
new
password
5.2 Commissioning menu
After entering the password (PW-lock=Off), the menu extensions can be selected for commissioning,
both in Automatic and Manual / Emergency manual mode, after entering the setpoint menu.

Example: Menu selection in Automatic mode

Operational display Setpoint menu Password menu

Menu extensions
for commissioning

Controller Controller Input Output Display


profile menu parameter menu menu menu menu

Page: 10 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

The following tables for the commissioning menus show the parameter (name), the value range (min/
max) and an appurtenant explanation (meaning/comment), together with the memory location in the
profile (= profile controller 1, ‚= profile controller 2) and a symbol I to denote ! Adjustment in
Manual mode only !

?
Many of the range limits (min/max value) stated in the following tables are dependent
on the scaling selected for the physical variables via the parameters Scale-0 and
Scale-F. See also explanatory note on scaling (5.6.2).
Setpoint
5.3 Setpoint menu menu

In addition to the described setpoint entry function (3.1.1), the setpoint types, SetpTyp, and
the filter times, T-Lowp, can be parameterised here in the commissioning menu.
Parameter Value (min Meaning Comment
1st Controller max)
I 1SpTypA fixed Setp. type A = fixed value See also Functional extension
extern = external input Setpoint programme (Appendix)
1Setp A 0.0°C Setpoint A for type A=fixed Setpoint here e.g. 0-200°C; see also
200.0°C extern for type A=extern Explanatory note on setpoints (5.3.1)
I 1SpTypB fixed Setp. type B = fixed value The second setpoint, B, is only
extern = external input active when an external switching
1Setp B 0.0°C Setpoint B for type B=fixed input has been parameterised for
200.0°C extern for type B=extern 2Setp in the Input menu.
1T-Lowp 0.0s Low pass filter time See also Explanatory note on
999.9s for setpoint switching switching filter (5.3.2)
1Alarm- -99.0°C Alarm limit=Setp.-amount 1Alarm- Lower alarm limit (ActVal < Setp)
0.0°C Alarm OFF See also Explanatory note on
220.0°C Alarm limit= 1Alarm- limit value alarm (5.3.3)
1Alarm+ -99.0°C Alarm limit=Setp.+amount 1Alarm+ Upper alarm limit (ActVal > Setp)
0.0°C Alarm OFF See also Explanatory note on
220.0°C Alarm limit= 1Alarm+ limit value alarm (5.3.3)
Parameter The following parameters for the 2nd controller are displayed only when
2nd Controller 2 controllers are selected in the Profile menu.

I 2SpTypA fixed Setp. type A = fixed value See also Functional extension
extern = external input Setpoint programme (Appendix)
2Setp A 0.0°C Setpoint A for type A=fixed Setpoint here e.g. 0-200°C; see also
200.0°C extern for type A=extern Explan. note on setpoints (5.3.1)
I 2SpTypB fixed Setp. type B = fixed value The second setpoint, B, is only
extern = external input active when an external switching
2Setp B 0.0°C Setpoint B for type B=fixed input has been parameterised for
200.0°C extern for type B=extern 2Setp in the Input menu.
2T-Lowp 0.0s Low pass filter time See also Explanatory note on
999.9s for setpoint switching switching filter (5.3.2)
2Alarm- -99.0°C Alarm limit=Setp.-amount 2Alarm- Lower alarm limit (ActVal < Setp)
0.0°C Alarm OFF See also Explanatory note on
220.0°C Alarm limit= 2Alarm- limit value alarm (5.3.3)
2Alarm+ -99.0°C Alarm limit=Setp.+amount 2Alarm+ Upper alarm limit (ActVal > Setp)
0.0°C Alarm OFF See also Explanatory note on
220.0°C Alarm limit= 2Alarm+ limit value alarm (5.3.3)

? Negative values for the alarm parameters relate to system deviations


(relative to the setpoint); positive values for the alarm parameters relate
to fixed alarm limits; alarm parameter = 0 = limit monitoring OFF.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 11
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

5.3.1 Explanatory note on setpoints


The table for the Setpoint menu shows a permissible range from 0-200°C for setpoints “Setp A” and
“Setp B” of each controller. This range is valid for PT100 inputs in standard configuration. Additional
setpoint ranges can also be set, in each case adapted via the scaling factor to the employed measuring
sensors and the physical variables to be controlled.
These settings are carried out in the Input menu via parameters Scale-F, Scale-0 and Dim.
Several examples of other value ranges are shown in the following table.
See also Input menu (5.6)

Measuring sensor Measuring Parameters Comment


for example: range Scale-F Scale-0 Dim Setp
PT100 0 to 500°C 500,0 0,0 °C 0 - 500,0 °C The required hardware
Pressure sensor -1 to 5 bar 6,0 -1,0 B -1,0 - 5,0 bar configuration for the
Displacement sensor 0 to 300 mm 300,0 0,0 mm 0 - 300,0 mm installed 362MC is to be
Rotation angle sensor 0 to 100% 100,0 0,0 % 0 - 100,0 % observed.

5.3.2 Explanatory note on the switching filter :


In order to avoid discontinuous transient conditions and overshoot
during setpoint switching, a switching low pass filter of the 2nd order
can be parameterised on the 362MC.
The time for the switching filter is set via the parameter Tf = T-Lowp.
7I W

5.3.3 Explanatory note on the limit value alarm Error display


Alarm limits can be parameterised to monitor the actual values and Operational
a permissible system deviation. These impose a lower alarm limit display

and an upper alarm limit on the permissible control band. If the alternate
actual value violates a fixed alarm limit for longer than 5s or a each second

relative alarm limit for longer than 60s, the alarm will be activated. Error
display
When an alarm is activated, the alarm relay is de-energised (Alarm ON) or
(closed-circuit principle) and the current display is switched to the
error display. This display remains active until the alarm is
acknowledged via the Exit button. The alarm relay is energised Alarm
again (Alarm OFF) when the actual values is insite the control band. acknowledge
For example: only
Operational display
Point 0: The 1st actual value attains the control band for the 1st time.
Alarm OFF; the alarm display function is started.
Point 1: The upper alarm limit is violated! The alarm is activated
Alarm ON
(Alarm ON) and the error indication ActV++ is displayed.
Point 2: The upper alarm range is left again. Alarm OFF
Alarm OFF; the alarm relay is energised.
Point 3: The lower alarm limit is violated. The alarm is activated Alarm ON
(Alarm ON) and the error indication ActV— is displayed.
Point 4: The lower alarm range is left again.
Alarm OFF; the alarm relay is energised.

?
If no other error: Alarm relay energised = actual value within alarm limits;
Alarm relay not energised = limit value alarm;
see also Monitoring functions and error messages (6).

Page: 12 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

5.4 Controller profile menu Controller


profile menu
On the 362MC, all the necessary settings for a controller are grouped together in
so-called profiles. Each profile thus contains all the parameters for a specific application.
The parameter memory of the 362MC contains 50 memory locations for different profiles, enabling
previously tested commissioning values to be stored as profiles for a large number of applications. The
commissioning procedure is then started by selecting the appropriate profile for the control task
concerned.
To this end, one of the controllers are first of all selected in the Profile menu via the parameter “DsplCtr”,
this controller´s profile is selected via “Prof-No” and its parameters are subsequently displayed and
altered in the following menus. Selection and entry points are marked accordingly on the display of the
362MC. The tables belonging to this description state which parameters are stored in which control menu.

Parameter Value (min Meaning Comment


max)
DsplCtr only 1 Display controller = only controller 1 activ Entry point marked è
1 of 2 Display controller = displ. controller 1 of 2 Entry point marked è
2 of 2 Display controller = displ. controller 2 of 2 Entry point marked ¬
The parameters which are stored
I Prof-No 1 Select controller profile for operation in a controller profile and are thus
50 Value = profile no. 1 to no. 50 available for subsequent selection
are indicated as follows
I Save as 1 Save current controller profile as  for controller 1 and
50 value = profile no. 1 to no. 50 ‚ for controller 2.

5.4.1 Entering parameters for two controllers


It is to be noted here that
- only the parameters of one profile and thus of one controller are displayed;
- the two controllers must always be assigned different profiles via “Prof-No”.
During commissioning, the display should thus be set specifically to the controller which is to be put into
operation; e.g. from DsplCtr = 1 of 2 for the 1st controller to DsplCtr = 2 of 2 for the 2nd controller and
vice-versa. It is not necessary to enter the profile no. assigned to the controller under “Prof-No” again
for this purpose.
5.4.2 Entering parameters for one controller only
When the 362MC is used for one controller only, “DsplCtr” should be switched to “1 only”.
This precludes any switching. The parameters for the 2nd controller will no longer be displayed.

?
If you save the selected profile to an available „Prof-No“ via the „Save as“ function
before commissioning, the parameters which have been altered in the course of
commissioning will be stored for you in this new profile. If possible, do not alter the
profile memory locations containing the factory presets (see Appendix), so as to
ensure that you will be able to access these profiles if necessary.

?
We urgently recommend you to alter the parameters marked with the I symbol
in the tables belonging to this description in „Manual“ mode only. This will avoid
unintentional activation of the actuator.

? With regard to the entry of parameters for the 2nd controller, the selection and entry
point is displayed as * to indicate controller 2 instead
of -> to indicate controller 1.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 13
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

5.5 Controller parameters menu Controller


parameter menu
This menu includes all the control-related parameters of the 362MC. In this menu the
controller type “CtrlTyp” is defined, the parameter set “ParSet” to be displayed and
possibly altered is selected and the structure of the controller “Struct” is set.
The parameters are then displayed directly in the same menu and, where appropriate, altered. The
menu thus ensures a complete overview of all values relating to the controller each time it is activated.
in the Parameter Value (min Meaning Comment
profile each controller max)
‚ CtrlTyp 2PntPW 2-Point controller with feedback See also Explanatory note on
I 3PntPW 3-Point controller with feedback controller types (5.5.1)
2Point 2-Point controller without feedback
3Point 3-Point controller without feedback
Step 3-Point step controller
Cont Continuous controller
CscStep Cascade step controller
Werte ParSet 1 Parameter set selection The values of both parameter sets for
‚ 2 No. 1 or 2 of the controller concerned each controller are stored in the profile.
Parameter (1)/(2) The selected parameter set of the
(each set) selected controller is displayed.
‚ Struct P Structure = P action only See also Explanatory note on
PI = PI action controller structure (5.5.2)
PD = PD action D component is always relative to
PID = PID action the system deviation and damped;
PD2 = PD action D2 component is always relative to
PID2 = PID action the controlled variable and damped.
‚ Kr -999.0 P gain See also Explanatory note on
999.0 controller structure (5.5.2)
‚ Tn 10s Reset time for I component See also Explanatory note on
10000s controller structure (5.5.2)
‚ Tv 0.1s Derivative action time for D component See also Explanatory note on
1000.0s controller structure (5.5.2)
‚ Vd 1.0 max. D gain for D component See also Explanatory note on
1000.0 controller structure (5.5.2)
‚ T drive 5.0s Actuator operating time for step controller See also Explanatory note on
1000.0s controller output parameters (5.5.3)
‚ Ts min 0.1s min. switching duration for switching output See also Explanatory note on
100.0s controller output parameters (5.5.3)
‚ T cycl 0.1s min. cycle time for 2-Point and 3-Point See also Explanatory note on
100.0s controller with feedback controller output parameters (5.5.3)
‚ Deadbd -1.0% Deadband for switching and continuous See also Explanatory note on
5.0% controller controller output parameters (5.5.3)
‚ Hyst 0.0% Hysteresis for 2-Point and 3-Point See also Explanatory note on
10.0% controller controller output parameters (5.5.3)
‚ Ymin -100% min. controller output See also Explanatory note on
100% controller output parameters (5.5.3)
‚ Ymax -100% max. controller output See also Explanatory note on
100% controller output parameters (5.5.3)
‚ Kw 0.0 Setpoint gain See also Explanatory note on
10.0 controller output parameters (5.5.3)
See also Functional extensions - Disturbance compensation or Setpoint programme (Appendix)

Page: 14 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

5.5.1 Explanatory note on controller types


The controller type “CtrlTyp” can be defined separately for each of the 362MC´s two controllers.
2-Point controller = switching controller with 2 switching output states, relay+ ON and relay+ OFF.
The 2-Point controller with feedback “2PntPW” operates internally as a continuous controller with
down-line pulse-width modulator and switching output. Its output corresponds to the ratio of ON period
to OFF period of relay+ of assigned relay set 1 or 2.
Controller 362MC Typ: 2PntPW Actuator Controlled system

PID
W xd Y X

In the case of the 2-Point controller without feedback “2Point” the pulse-width modulator is replaced by
a threshold switch with hysteresis.
Controller 362MC Typ: 2Point Actuator Controlled system

PID
W xd Y X

3-Point controller = switching controller with 3 switching output states, relay+ ON, relay+ and relay OFF
and relay- ON. The 3-Point controller with feedback “3PntPW” operates internally as a continuous
controller with two down-line pulse-width modulators and two switching outputs. Its output corresponds
to the ratio of ON period to OFF period of relay+ if the controller output is positive and relay- if negative,
both relay+ and relay- being from assigned relay set 1 or 2.
Controller 362MC Typ: 3PntPW Actuator Controlled system

PID
W xd Y X

In the case of the 3-Point controller without feedback “3Point” the pulse-width modulator is replaced by
a threshold switch with hysteresis.
Controller 362MC Typ: 3Point Actuator Controlled system

PID
W xd Y X

The two switching outputs can be parameterised separately, whereby the controller and output+ use the
complete 1st parameter set (1) and output- uses only the separate loop gain, Kr, and the parameters for
the switching outputs of the 2nd parameter set (2). See table:

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 15
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Parameter with
3-Point controller for with parameter
1st Parameter set 3-Point- CtrlTyp, Struct, Kr, Tn, Tv, Vd, Deadbd, Hyst, Ymin,Ymax, Kw (1)
switching output +
2nd Parameter set switching output - Kr, Deadbd, Hyst, Ymin,Ymax (2)

This enables adaption of the 3-Point controller to two different actuators for outputs + and -. External pa-
rameter switching is not applicable here.

3-Point step controller = step controller for I-actuators with 3PntPW output
In conjunction with the down-line integrating actuator, the internal controller “Step” simulates a continu-
ous controller and has a 3-Point output with feedback. It is thus only suitable for use in combination with
integrating actuators, such as motor actuators.
(The operational characteristics of “Step” correspond to those of Pleiger controller 362-D)
Controller 362MC Typ: Step Actuator Controlled system

PID I
W xd Y X

Continuous controller = controller with continuous output.


The controller output of the continuous controller “Cont” is supplied to the assigned analogue output.
The required hardware configuration of the 362MC is to be observed.
(The operational characteristics of “Cont” correspond to those of Pleiger controller 361-D).
Controller 362MC Typ: Cont Actuator Controlled system

PID
W xd Y X

Cascade step controller = internal interconnection of 2 controllers to create the cascade controller
“CscStep”. Controller output Y1 of the primary controller, with setpoint W and actual value X, is injected
into the secondary controller as setpoint V. In addition to the controlled setpoint V, the secondary 3-Point
step controller also receives secondary actual value U to form output Y2.
With setpoint gain KW2 of the secondary controller can be employed, for example, to bypass the primary
controller during commissioning (Kr1=0 switches PID off, Kw2 results in W=V).
Controller 362MC Typ: CscStep

Kw2 Actuator Controlled system

PID + PID I Part A Part B


W xd Y1 V Y2 U X

- -

Page: 16 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

When the cascade step controller “CscStep” is selected, the primary continuous controller always uses
the 1st parameter set (1) and the secondary 3-Point step controller uses the 2nd parameter set (2).

5.5.2 Explanatory note on controller structure


The parameterisable structures for the presented controller types are shown in the following table. On
selecting a controller type, the display always shows only the structures which are parameterisable in
accordance with this table!
CtrlTyp 2PntPW 3PntPW Step Cont CscStep ç when controller
or or prim. contrl. sec. contrl. of type
2Point 3Point (Cont) (1) (Step) (2)
Struct P P P P ç these structures
PI PI PI PI PI PI are possible
PD PD PD PD
PID PID PID PID PID PID
PD2 PD2 PD2 PD2
PID2 PID2 PID2 PID2 PID2 PID2

P controller (proportional-action controller) <


In the case of the P controller, a value of the controller output Y is P-Structure
directly proportionally assigned to each value of the system deviation
xd. The assigned value is set via the gain factor Kr (P gain).
Xp is frequently used instead of Kr. Xp=100 / Kr .U
PI controller (proportional-plus-integral action controller) W
In the case of the PI controller, the value of controller output Y is set
proportional to the system deviation xd (P component), and the
I component, which corresponds to the time integral of the system <
deviation, is added to this value. The I component is set via reset time PI-Structure
Tn, which corresponds to the time in which the I component effects a
change in the controller output of a magnitude corresponding to the
P component. .U
PD controller (proportional-plus-differential action controller) 7Q W
In the case of the PD controller, a D-component corresponding to the
time differential of the system deviation is added to the controller
output component (P component) which is proportional to system <

deviation xd. The D component is set via derivative action time Tv, PD-Structure
which specifies how much earlier the step response of a PD controller
corresponds to a value which is attained by a P controller. A low pass
with the time constant T=Tv / Vd is employed to limit the bandwidth of
the differential element.
.U

PD2 controller (proportional-plus-differential action controller) 7Y9G

This functions in the same manner as the PD controller, whereby the


D2 component corresponds not to the time differential of system
deviation xd but to the time differential of controlled variable X.
<

PID-Structure
PID controller (PI controller with added D component)
PID2 controller (PI controller with added D2 component)

Regarding the D component, see also:


.U

Special function - Trend compensation in the appendix.


W
7Q

7Y9G

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 17
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

PI step controller (proportional-plus-integral action step controller) PI-Step-Structure


PID step controller (PI step controller with added D component) <
In the case of the PI and PID step controller, the value of controller
output Y
can only be generated in conjunction with the I component
of the actuator. .U
As with the other PI and PID controllers, the P, I and D components are 7Q W
set via parameters Kr, Tn and TV/Vd. Operating time T drive of the
actuator controls the stepping function of the 3-Point output with feedback.
The display shows only the parameters contained in the following table, corresponding to the structure
defined in “Struct”.
Struct P PI PD PID ç when structure is
PD2 PID2
Parameter Kr Kr Kr Kr ç these parameters
Tn Tn are to be defined
Tv Tv
Vd Vd

The other control parameters are also displayed only when they are to be defined, checked or altered for
the selected controller type. Parameters which are not relevant are not shown. See table:
CtrlTyp 2PntPW 2Point Step Cont CscStep ç when controller
or or prim. contrl. sec. contrl. of type
3PntPW 3Point (Cont) (1) (Step) (2)
Para- T drive T drive ç these parameters
meter Ts min Ts min Ts min are to be defined
T cycl
Deadbd Deadbd Deadbd Deadbd Deadbd Deadbd
Hyst
Ymin Ymin Ymin Ymin
Ymax Ymax Ymax Ymax
Kw Kw Kw Kw Kw Kw

5.5.3 Explanatory note on controller output parameters


T drive
Operating time of the actuator for step
controllers which applies from feedback signal
OPEN to CLOSED in continuous drive mode.
<V 2PntPW <V 3PntPW
Ts min and T cycl 7] =R
Minimum pulse width Ts and minimum cycle 7V
time Tz for pulse-width modulated outputs, for 7V
[G
7V
[G
purpose of adjustment to actuator and controlled =R 7] =R 7]
system.
Deadbd
Deadband Zo as zero drive range for pulse-
<V 2Point <V 3Point
width modulated outputs and as threshold value
for OFF command of 2-Point and 3- Point
outputs without feedback. See also Cont [G [G
Hyst =R +\
Hysteresis Hy for ON commands of 2-Point and +\ +\
3-Point outputs without feedback. =R =R

Page: 18 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Ymin and Ymax <PLQ


Cont
<
Controller output limits for continuous controllers, including
the internally series-connected continuous controllers.
Kw
Setpoint gain, serves to compensate steady-state [G
deviation on P controllers.

?
=R

On other controllers Kw always = 1.


<PD[
5.6 Input menu Input
In the Input menu, the physical inputs of the 362MC are assigned to the various internal menu
input variables. This assignment is to be defined separately for each profile and thus for
each of the two controllers of the 362MC. Double assignments are possible, such as
assignment of external input “E1” to switch to the 2nd setpoint “2.Setp” in the profiles of both controllers,
for example. The table below shows the possible assignments.
The function Calibrate resistance input and the parameters for scaling and dimension assignment are
also located in the Input menu.
in the Parameter meaning Parameter Value (min Value meaning
profile each controller max)
‚ Main (primary) actual value ActValX NC No input assigned
for each parameter

I Secondary actual value (cascade) ActValU PT100-1 1st PT100 input (or 0(4)-20mA) see*1
free definable

Trend compensation Trend PT100-2 2nd PT100 input


Disturbance compensation Disturb Lin 0.. 3rd linear input as 0-20mA, 0-(5)10V,
External setpoint ExtSetp Lin 4.. or 4-20mA
Position feedback FeedBk Lin ..4 or 20-4mA
Resist 4 resistance input
th

Value Function: Calibration of the R scale Rmax Store R as Rmax for scaling
‚ resistance input; see Explanatory kalibr User factory setting for 0-200R
note on calibration (5.6.1) Rmin Store R as Rmin for scaling
‚ Switch to 2nd setpoint 2.Setp NC No input assigned
I Switch to 2nd parameter set 2.Param E1 External input 1
for each parameter

Relay PLUS continuous ON Rel+On E2 External input 2


free definable

Relay PLUS continuous OFF Rel+Off E3 External input 3


Relay MINUS continuous ON Rel-On E4 External input 4
Relay MINUS continuous OFF Rel-Off E5 External input 5
Manual Internal state: Manual mode
E6 External input 6
‚ Scaling factor Scale-F -1000.0
I 1000.0 See also Explanatory note on
‚ Scale zero point Scale-0 -1000.0 scaling (5.6.2)
I 1000.0
‚ Dimension Dim °C Dimension = degrees Celsius
No dimension
(Facility for assigning a physical mm Dimension = millimetre
unit of measurement to the % = per cent
scaled display value.) hP = hectopascal
See also Explanatory note on B = bar
scaling (5.6.2) °F = degrees Fahrenheit
*1 In special hardware-configuration the 1st PT100 input can be supplied as 0(4)-20mA input !

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 19
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

The following table presents an example of assignment of the physical inputs of the 362MC which would
correspond to the functions of a 362-D.

Parameter Value Meaning

ActValX PT100-1 Main actual value is 1st PT100 input


ActValU NC No input assigned
Trend PT100-2 Trend compensation with 2nd PT100 input
Disturb NC No input assigned
FeedBk Resist Position feedback via 4th resistance input
ExtSetp NC No input assigned

2.Setp NC No input assigned


2.Param NC No input assigned
Rel+On E1 Relay PLUS continuous ON via external input 1
Rel+Off E2 Relay PLUS continuous OFF via external input 2
Rel-On E3 Relay MINUS continuous ON via external input 3
Rel-Off E4 Relay MINUS continuous OFF via external input 4

5.6.1 Explanatory note on calibration


Via the Calibrate resistance input function, the 362MC supports the adjustment of its 4th analogue input
to the actual values of a connected resistor feedback sensor which is necessary during commissioning,
for example, in order to compensate fitting tolerances.
The following procedure is recommendable here:
1. Start the calibration process
Set parameter “R scale” to value “kalibr”; the factory setting for a resistor feedback sensor of
0 to 200R is employed for the display.
2. Calibration zero point
Move actuator to CLOSED position (e.g. in Manual mode) until the actuator is completely closed!
Set parameter “R scale” to value “Rmin”; the current value of the resistor feedback sensor will be
stored as 0%=zero point.
3. Calibration end position
Move actuator to OPEN position (e.g. in Manual mode) until the actuator is completely OPEN!
Set parameter “R scale” to value “Rmax”; the current value of the resistor feedback sensor will be
stored as 100%=end position.
Each entered value will be stored only when the following procedure is observed: select “R scale”,
select parameter entry with Prgm button and press Prgm to save the value.

5.6.2 Explanatory note on scaling


The parameters Scale-F = scale factor and Scale-0 = scale zero point are employed to scale physical
variables, such as those setpoints and parameter entries, within the 362MC´s internal value range from
0 to 1. When internal values with physical scaling are required for display purposes, the values
concerned are scaled back with the same parameters.
scaling Controller 362MC back scaling
internal Scale-F
Scale-0
Entrys Displays
(e.g. Setpoints) Scale-F (e.g. Parameters)
Scale-0

Page: 20 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Example
If a pressure transmitter with a physical measuring range from -1 bar to
+5 bar in accordance with the characteristic shown opposite is connected
at the input of the 362MC, scaling will be effected
in bar as follows: Scale-0 = -1 Scale-F = 6 Dim = B
in % as follows: Scale-0 = 0 Scale-F = 100 Dim = %
See also Explanatory note on setpoints (5.3.1)

? In standard configuration, the PT100 inputs of the 362MC are calibrated for 0-200°C.
In this case the scaling is always Scale-0 = 0, Scale-F = 200, Dim = °C.

5.7 Output menu Output


In the output menu, the internal output variables of the 362MC are assigned to the physical menu

outputs. This assignment is to be defined separately for each profile and thus for each of
the two controllers of the 362MC. Double assignments are not expedient and are thus not
permissible for entry. The following table shows the assignments for controller output and actual-value

?
output. The hardware configuration of the 362MC is to be observed in each case!
Attention: Avoid double assignment in case of changing the controller profile!

in the Parameter Value (min Meaning Comment


profile each controller max)
‚ OutputY NC No output assigned
1Relais 1st relay set (Rel+ and Rel-) 2nd relay set only when
2Relais 2nd relay set (Rel+ and Rel-) hardware extension installed
1Lin 0> 1st linear output 0-20mA (0-5/10V) 1st and 2nd linear output only when
1Lin 4> 1st linear output 4-20mA hardware extension installed
1Lin 0< 1st linear output 20-0mA (5/10-0V) > standard direction (Ymin=0%)
1Lin 4< 1st linear output 20-4mA 0-20mA, 4-20mA, 0-10V, 0-5V
2Lin 0> 2nd linear output 0-20mA (0-5/10V) < reversed direction (Ymin=0%)
2Lin 4> 2nd linear output 4-20mA 20-0mA, 20-4mA, 10-0V, 5-0V
2Lin 0< 2nd linear output 20-0mA (5/10-0V) Bidirectional output with 0>
2Lin 4< 2nd linear output 20-4mA (Ymin=-100%), ±20mA, ±10V, ±5V
‚ OutputX NC No output assigned
1Lin 0> 1st linear output 0-20mA (0-5/10V) 1st and 2nd linear output only when
1Lin 4> 1st linear output 4-20mA hardware extension installed
1Lin 0< 1st linear output 20-0mA (5/10-0V) > standard direction (Ymin=0%)
1Lin 4< 1st linear output 20-4mA 0-20mA, 4-20mA, 0-10V, 0-5V
2Lin 0> 2nd linear output 0-20mA (0-5/10V) < reversed direction (Ymin=0%)
2Lin 4> 2nd linear output 4-20mA 20-0mA, 20-4mA, 10-0V, 5-0V
2Lin 0< 2nd linear output 20-0mA (5/10-0V) Bidirectional output with 0>
2Lin 4< 2nd linear output 20-4mA (Ymin=-100%), ±20mA, ±10V, ±5V

The following example contains the assignment of the 362MC´s physical outputs which would correspond to the
functions of a 361-D or 362-D:
OutputY Relais1 362MC output assignment for 362-D function
OutputX NC
OutputY 1Lin 0> 362MC output assignment for 361-D function
OutputX NC

? In order to use the 2nd relay set or the linear outputs of the 362MC,
hardware extensions are required.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 21
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

5.8 Display menu Display


menu
The process variables which are to be shown in the two lines of the LCD display as the
operational display are selected in the Display menu. See also Display (2.1).
Pressing the Prgm button will switch the system to a second display level foras long as the
button remains depressed, thus enabling 4 process variables to be assigned. The operating language
“Lang” can also be selected in this menu. All text displays are then shown in the selected language.
The contrast adjustment function for the LCD display can also be selected in this menu.
Parameter Value (min Meaning Comment
general max)
Line 1 1Setp W Setpoint - controller 1
Line 2 1Setp V Setpoint secondary - controller 1 See also Explanatory note on
2nd L1 1ActV X Actual value - controller 1 controller inputs/outputs
2nd L2 1ActV U Actual value secondary - controller 1
1Dist Z Disturbance input - controller 1
1Tren D Trend input - controller 1
1Out+Y Switching control output - controller 1 Display with symbol <<, || or >>
1Feed+Y Position feedback in % - controller 1 Additional to switching output symbols
1Out%Y Continuous control output in % - controller 1 Display in xx.x%
2Setp w Setpoint - controller 2
2Setp v Setpoint secondary - controller 2 See also Explanatory note on
2ActV x Actual value - controller 2 controller inputs/outputs
2ActV u Actual value secondary - controller 2
2Dist z Disturbance input - controller 2
2Tren d Trend input - controller 2
2Out+y Switching control output - controller 2 Display with symbol <<, || or >>
2Feed+y Position feedback in % - controller 2 Additional to switching output symbols
2Out%y Continuous control output in % - controller 2 Display in xx.x%
Lang deutsch Language selection for all
english display texts
LCDcntr 1 Contrast setting for the
255 LCD display

5.8.1 Explanatory note on controller inputs/outputs


The two control diagrams illustrate the significance of the display parameters for
the controller inputs and outputs. The last letter appears on the display as an
Dist Z
upper case letter for controller 1 and as a lower case letter for controller 2.
Tren D
362MC Switching
Controller output Actuator Controlled
Setp W Out+Y Feed Y
or system
Linear Out%Y
output

ActV X
Controlled system

362MC Switching
Controller Controller output Actuator
Setp W Out+Y Feed Y
(primary) (secondary) or Part A Part B
Linear Out%Y
output

ActV U
ActV X

Page: 22 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

6 Monitoring functions and error messages


Numerous monitoring functions are integrated in the 362MC. These functions are executed during the
programme start or in the background during normal running of the programme, and monitor the
controller for correct, error-free functioning. When errors are established in a monitoring function, a
corresponding error message appears in text form on the LCD display.
In order to highlight the error message, the error is displayed in flashing mode (flashing cycle approx.
1 second), in alternation with the operational display. Should the established error be a serious error
which might impair the controller´s functions, an alarm will be activated and the control programme
will be stopped.
Upon activation of an alarm, the alarm relay is de-energised (closed-circuit principle).
See also Explanatory note on limit value alarm (5.3.3)

6.1 System monitoring functions


Basic system monitoring functions are executed each time the supply voltage is switched on and prior
to starting the standard controller programme. The appurtenant error messages are shown in the table
below. See also Explanatory notes
Display Contrl. Monitoring function Additional measures
indication Stop
ERROR Yes Check on contents of parameter memory Controller programme will not be started! It is
Param by 16-BIT CRC with generator polynominal urgently necessary to check all parameters !
Check the system again via Reset.
ERROR Yes Check on contents of programme memory Controller programme will not be started!
ROM by 16-BIT CRC with generator polynominal Error indicates external EMC disturbance
or component defect.
ERROR Yes Check on main memory Re-check system via Reset.
RAM by writing test pattern and check-reading In case of error after Reset - replace controller.
See also Explanatory note on Reset (6.1.3)
ERROR The programme run monitoring function has Controller programme is started! Error indicates
Watchdog initiated a programme restart; the system monitoring external EMC disturbance. Acknowledge error
function does not identify any errors during the start! with EXIT; check for any accumulations.

6.1.1 Explanatory note on Param error


When the parameters are loaded from the parameter memory, a check sum is generated as a 16-bit
CRC and compared against the stored check sum. If the two check sums are not identical, the error
signal will be output. This error may occur when the parameters are loaded during the programme start
or during commissioning, when loading profiles, for example. The controller programme cannot be
started.
When this error applies, the 362MC loads the factory presets as a precautionary measure. Please
check urgently, in the following order:
- the profiles of both controllers - incorrect profiles will be reloaded after entering the correct profile no.;
- the parameters in each profile and each parameter set - errors are corrected by entering the correct data;
- repeat the check by resetting the controller.
6.1.2 Explanatory note on ROM error and RAM error
When the programme is started, the check sum of the ROM programme memory is generated and
compared against the stored check sum. The main memory is also tested by writing test patterns and
check-reading. Should errors occur, it will not be possible to start the controller programme.
Repeat the test by resetting the controller. If the error occurs again, the controller is to be replaced.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 23
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

6.1.3 Explanatory note on the Reset function for the controller


Param, ROM and RAM errors can only be acknowledged by resetting the controller, after which the
system monitoring process is repeated.
Controller reset Programme start after reset
These buttons are to be These error messages show any multiple
pressed simultaneously. errors corresponding to the errors which
were displayed briefly during the system
monitoring process.
6.1.4 Explanatory note on Watchdog error
The 362MC incorporates a programme run monitoring function. The correctly running controller
programme regularly resets a watchdog timer. Should deviations occur during execution of the
programme, e.g. as a result of major external EMC disturbances, this resetting pulse will not be
transmitted for the timer. The watchdog timer will then initiate a programme restart. During the restart,
the cause Watchdog error is displayed. The controller programme is not stopped. This error is to be
acknowledged by pressing the EXIT button, in the same manner as other error messages.

6.2 Sensor monitoring functions


The 362MC continuously checks the measured-value inputs for interruptions, short-circuits or other
deviations from the measuring range in the background during normal running of the controller
programme. As a general principle, only those errors are monitored which could actually disturb
operations on the basis of the currently parameterised functions.
Unused inputs and inputs are only employed for display purpose are not monitored.
The following table provides an overview of the various error messages.

Display: Monitoring function Additional measures


ERROR
1.PT >1 The 1st PT100 input has a measured value If the input to which the error message
> measuring range (standard > 200°C). relates is in use as
1.PT <0 The 1st PT100 input has a measured value an actual-value input,
< measuring range (standard < 0°C). a setpoint input,
2.PT >1 The 2nd PT100 input has a measured value a trend input or
> measuring range (standard > 200°C). a disturbance input,
2.PT <0 The 2nd PT100 input has a measured value the controller programme will be stopped and
< measuring range (standard < 0°C). an alarm will be triggered. The sensor and the
Lin >1 The linear input has a measured value connection cabling are to be checked;
> measuring range (standard > 20mA). an wire breakage, short-circuiting or sensor
Lin <0 The linear input has a measured value defects are the most common causes of these
> measuring range (standard < 0(4)mA). errors. Beyond this, the measuring input of the
Resist>1 The resistance input has a measured value controller may be defective.
> calibrated range (> Rmax). This is to be checked with a PT100 simulator
Resist<0 The resistance input has a measured value or current source, for example.
< calibrated range (< Rmin). After error acknowledge, the test is repeated.

? An error which does not recur immediately after being acknowledged indicates
a major EMC disturbance. Make a note of such errors. Should the error recur
frequently, the cause of the error is to be eradicated.

? Errors at important inputs will lead to the controller programme being stopped and
initiation of an alarm, as safe and reliable operation of the controlled system is not
longer ensured. Please do not acknowledge the error message until the cause of
the error has been eradicated.

Page: 24 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

7 Service interface
The 362MC possesses a service interface which is accessible on the front of the controller. This inter-
face provides for more user-friendly operation and diagnosis of the controller. To this end, a PC and the
362MC service programme
“McDiag” are required.

The interface connector is accessible


on the installed controller after
removing the front frame and raising
the bottom labelling window. Fuse F2 Connector for service interface Front frame

7.1 Sevice programme McDiag


The service programme “McDiag” which has been developed for the 362MC controller can be run with
Windows 95/98 or NT4.0. The installation and operating instructions are provided on the data carrier.
Several operator interfaces of the programme McDiag are shown below by way of example.
A service package comprising McDiag data carrier and 362MC service interface cable is available for
the interface.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 25
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

8 Installation
The 362MC controller is delivered in a housing for installation in a control panel in accordance with
DIN 43700. The housing dimensions are 144 x 72 mm.
123456789012345678901234567890121
The required control panel cut-out is shown in the diagram. The
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
65,5 +0,5
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121 minimum overall installation depth including plug-in terminals is
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121 140 mm. The space for the connecting cable which is to be
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121 connected from the rear is to be added to this minimum dimension.
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121 The housing is fixed by means
of fixing two clamps which are
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121 offset relative to each other on
the top and bottom of the
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121 housing.
123456789012345678901234567890121
137 +0,5

123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121 When installing the controllers in
groups, a minimum spacing of
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121 15 mm should be observed
between the cut-outs in the
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121 control panel, as shown in the
diagram below.
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
144
123456789012345678901234567890121
The controller housing can also
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121 be fitted in any sloping or
inclined surfaces.
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121

Suitable wall-mounting boxes


are available for the local
installation of one or two
controllers.

72

1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
15
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901 1234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901 1234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901 1234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901 1234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901 1234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901 1234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901 1234567890
1234567890
140

1234567890123456789012345678901 1234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901 1234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901 1234567890
1234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901 1234567890
1234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901 1234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
123456789012345
123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901 123456789012345
123456789012345
15

1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901 123456789012345
123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345678901 123456789012345
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
123456789012345
123456789012345
123456789012345678901234567890121 1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
123456789012345678901234567890121
123456789012345678901234567890121 1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901
1234567890123456789012345678901

Page: 26 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

9 Connection
The connection points on the 362MC are grouped together on two screw-/plug terminals on the backside
of the controller. The voltage supply, the switching outputs, the alarm and the binary inputs are
connected via a 20-pole plug terminal; the linear inputs and the signals from supplementary modules are
connected via an 18-pole plug terminal.

9.1 Terminal assignments


The terminals are numbered from
no. 1 to no. 38 and identified by Connection table (362MC standard configuration)
symbols printed on the backside Terminal Signal name
of the controller.
1 L1 Voltage supply connection
The connection table below is
2 N Standard 230V-AC (or 115V-AC)
followed by several explanatory
3 SL Protective earth conductor or cabinet earth
notes on the controller connections.
4 N Output, 1st relay set
Additional explanatory notes on the 5 + (Open) Connection for 1st switching output
connection of hardware extensions 6 - (Closed)
are to be found under 7 N Output, 2nd relay set
Hardware extension (Appendix) 8 + Connection for 2nd switching output
9 - (See Hardware extension in appendix)
10 Common
11 Make contact Alarm relay
12 Break contact
13 SL Protective earth conductor or cabinet earth
14 E1
15 E2
16 E3 Binary inputs
17 E4 for function switching
18 E5
19 E6
20 EŸ (Common)
21 d
22 c Connection for extension module 2
23 b (See hardware extension in appendix)
24 a
25 d
26 c Connection for extension module 1
27 b (See hardware extension in appendix)
28 a
29 Linear input 4 (resistance)
30 Connection for resistor feedback sensor
31 - U/I Linear input 3 (current/voltage)
32 + Connection for measured-value transmitter
33 Linear input 2 (PT100)
34 (PT100-2) Connection for 2nd temperature sensor
35
36 Linear input 1 (PT100)
37 (PT100-1) Connection for 1st temperature sensor
38 (In special version for 0(4)-20mA)

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 27
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

9.2 Connection of supply voltage 362MC


In standard configuration, the 362MC controller Supply voltage to
is to be connected to a 230V AC voltage supply. AC-Switching outputs
The controller is also available as a special
version for connection to a 115V AC power supply.
The infeed system is prepared for connection via Supply voltage for F1 F2
a three-core cable. The shield of the connection the internal system Connection with
cable and the protective earth conductor SL are 3-Core cable
to be connected to the cabinet earth, +Shield
ensuring a substantial contact surface area. 362MC
The cable should be as short as possible and Supply voltage to
have an adequate cross-section. AC-Switching outputs

Should connection only be possible with a 2-core


cable, protective earth conductor terminal SL on
the controller is to be connected to cabinet earth. Supply voltage for F1 F2
Adequate earthing of the cabinet is imperative. the internal system Connection with
2-Core cable
Fuse F1 for the internal system voltage supply is
+Shield
accessible at the backside of the controller.
Fuse F2 for the power supply to the switching outputs is fitted under the front cover and can be replaced
from the front.
9.3 Connection of the switching outputs
In standard configuration, controller 362MC has one relay set, consisting of relay+ and relay-, as its
switching output. A 2nd relay set is available as a hardware extension. Two variants apply for connection
of the switching voltage.
9.3.1 Connection with AC switching output contacts The standard 362MC controller connects
362MC AC the infeed supply voltage to the actuator
actuator directly via the output relays. No additional
wiring is necessary. Fuse F2 is integrated
OP CL
for separate protection. This fuse is
+ - accessible under the front cover. The
M amperage on the identification plate is to
be observed.
1~

F2 Example: AC actuator
Supply
voltage
9.3.2 Connection with floating switching output contacts A special version of the 362MC controller is
362MC DC equipped with floating output contacts.
actuator This enables control at voltages other than
the supply voltage, e.g. for DC actuators.

OP
+
CL
-
The maximum permissible contact load
as specified on the data sheet is to be
observed!
The control/switching voltage is to be
provided with external fusing!

Supply Control Example: DC actuator


voltage voltage

Page: 28 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

9.4 Connection of the alarm output


The alarm output of the 362MC is provided as a 362MC
changeover contact. The alarm relay is operated
according to the closed-circuit principle. When the to alarm monitoring
controller is functioning correctly, the relay coil is system

energised. In the event of an error or power failure, Signal


the coil voltage will be cut. voltage
The alarm contact drops into its normal condition, as
illustrated on the symbol printed on the backside.

9.5 Connection of the binary inputs


internal
Contact
The 362MC possesses 6 binary inputs, which can
voltage K1 K2 be used for various functions and can be assigned
to functions as required via the parameters in the
Input menu.
In standard configuration, the inputs are to be
connected as floating contacts. The contact voltage
362MC is provided by the controller.
0(24)
+24V
As a special variant, the 362MC can be supplied
external with an input circuit for DC contacts for a nominal
K1 K2 Contact voltage of 24V DC. These inputs are to be
voltage connected to +24V and the reference potential 0(24)
is to be connected to terminal 20.

362MC

9.6 Connection of the resistor feedback sensor


The remote resistor feedback sensor is connected to
the 362MC at the 4th linear output, using a two-core 362MC
cable.
After mechanical adjustment of the sensor on the actuator,
calibration is carried out via parameter entry in the Input
menu.
See also Explanatory note on calibration (5.6.1)

9.7 Connection of a U/I measured-value transmitter


In the standard configuration of the 362MC, the 3rd linear Current input 362MC
input serves as a current input for currents from 0-20mA I= 0-20mA
4-20mA
or 4-20mA. The current input is configured as a differential
amplifier input. The max. common-mode voltage is +2V.

The 362MC is also available in a special version with a Voltage input


362MC
voltage input for 0-10V or 0-5V. The appropriate hardware U= 0-10V
0-5V
configuration is to be observed here.

See also Commissioning menu - Input (5.6)

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 29
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

9.8 Connection of the PT100 sensor


In the standard configuration of the 362MC, the 1st T 362MC
and 2nd linear inputs serve as PT100 inputs.
Connection is effected via a three-wire connection,
whereby the compensation for the line resistance
of 3 wires is based on 3 wires of the same cross-
section and the same length.
As the examples opposite show, it is also possible T 362MC
to connect a 4-wire PT100 sensor in 3-wire
configuration without any problems whatsoever.
If a 4-wire system is already installed, such as is
employed on the 362-D for example, the 4th wire
is not to be connected.
When using a 2-wire PT100 sensor, e.g. for trend
RL 362MC compensation, connection is to be carried out as
T shown in the example opposite.
The line resistance is not compensated in this
case; the absolute measured value is
consequently corrupted in many installations.
Installation via a 2-wire connection is sufficient for use as a differential trend input. Should you desire a
more accurate indication or wish to use the sensor as a main sensor, however, external compensation is
possible with a resistor between terminal 36 and 37. The resistance value for RL must correspond to the
resistance of one connecting wire.

9.9 Connection of a I -value transmitter at the 1st linear input


In the special configuration of the 362MC, the 1st
linear input serves as a current input for currents 1st linear input 362MC
from 0-20mA or 4-20mA. The current input is as current input
I= 0-20mA
configured as a differential amplifier input. 4-20mA
The max. common-mode voltage is +2V.

? All linear inputs are electrically interconnected and connected to protective earth.

9.10 Connecting cable


Shielded, twisted-pair cabling is to be used for the linear outputs (see Hardware extension), the
communication interface (see Hardware extension) and inputs 3 and 4 which are described here
(resistance and U/I). The cable cross-section must be at least 0.22mm².
Shielded cabling with a minimum cable cross-section of 0.5mm² is to be used for the binary inputs and
linear inputs 1 and 2 (PT100).
It is recommended that shielded cabling be used for the switching outputs.

? The shields of all connection cables are to be


362MC

connected to control cabinet earth, ensuring a


substantial contact surface area. The cabling
should be as short as possible and have an
adequate cross-section.

Page: 30 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

10 Technical data
Voltage supply Standard Optional
Input voltage 230V AC ±10% 115V AC ±10%
Frequency 50 - 60Hz ±5%
Stromaufnahme max. 100mA max. 200mA (+switching current)
Permissible ambient temperature
Operating temperature 0 - +60°C
Storage temperature -20 - +85°C
Protection type
Housing and terminals IP00
Frontside IP30
Housing
Type Housing for installation in Wall-mounting housing
Dimensions 144x72 mm acc.DIN 43700 Dimension sheet available
installation depth 140 mm on request
Control panel cut-out 137+0.5 mm x 65.5+0.5 mm
Weight approx. 1200 g
Linear inputs (only 1st input)
1 and 2 input (PT100 inputs)
st nd
Pt100 0(4) - 20mA
Measuring range 0 - 200°C 0 - 500°C 0-100%
Resolution 0.2°C 0.5°C 20µA
Measuring accuracy ±0.5%
3rd input (current/voltage input)
Measuring range 0(4) - 20mA 0 - 5V, 0 - 10V
Resolution 20µA 5 / 10mV
Measuring accuracy ±0.5%
Internal resistance 250 Ohm
4th input (resistance input)
Measuring range 0 - 200 Ohm
Resolution 0.2 Ohm
Measuring accuracy ±0.5%
Binary inputs
Type 6 x optocoupler inputs
for floating contacts for 24V DC nominal inputs
(electrically isolated switching (switching voltage external)
voltage supplied)
Operating threshold 12V ±4V
Switching current 1mA ±0.5mA
Switching outputs
Type 1 x relay set (expandable by 2nd relay set)
each with relay +(OPEN) and -(CLOSED)
Switching voltage = supply voltage floating contacts
(internal connected) (external supply and fusing)
Max. contact current 1A at 230V-AC max. 8A and max. 250V
2A at 115V-AC purely resistive load only
Type 1 x alarm relay with floating changeover contact
Linear outputs (hardware extension)
Type 2 x current output 2 x voltage output
Output range 0(4) - 20mA, ±20mA 0 - 10V, ±10V
Resolution 40µA 20mV
Accuracy ±0.5%
Load impedance max. 400 Ohm min. 1 kOhm
Communication interface (hardware extension)
Type RS485 isolated RS422 isolated

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 31
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix A1: Overview of menu structure for standard functions


Automatic mode

Operational display
Automatic mode 1Setp A PW-inp
1Setp B
1Alarm-
1Alarm+
2Setp A
2Setp B
2Alarm-
2Alarm+

Automatic mode
with
1SpTypA DsplCtr CtrlTyp ActValX OutputY Line 1 PW-lock
Menu extensions 1Setp A Prof-No ParSet ActValU OutputX Line 2 PW-chng
for commissioning 1SpTypB Save as Struct Trend 2nd L1
(after Password
input) 1Setp B Kr Disturb 2nd L2
1T-Lowp Tn ExtSetp Lang
1Alarm- Tv FeedBk LCDcntr
1Alarm+ Vd R scale
2SpTypA T drive 2.Setp
2Setp A Ts min 2.Param
2SpTypB T cycl Rel+On
2Setp B Deadbd Rel+Off
2T-Lowp Hyst Rel-On
2Alarm- Ymin Rel-Off
2Alarm+ Ymax Scale-0
Kw Scale-F
Dim
Manual mode

Output1 1SpTypA DsplCtr CtrlTyp ActValX OutputY Line 1 PW-lock


Operational display
Manual mode
Output2 1Setp A Prof-No ParSet ActValU OutputX Line 2 PW-chng
1SpTypB Save as Struct Trend 2nd L1
1Setp B Kr Disturb 2nd L2
1T-Lowp Tn ExtSetp Lang
1Alarm- Tv FeedBk LCDcntr
1Alarm+ Vd R scale
alternate
2SpTypA T drive 2.Setp
each second 2Setp A Ts min 2.Param
2SpTypB T cycl Rel+On
2Setp B Deadbd Rel+Off
2T-Lowp Hyst Rel-On
2Alarm- Ymin Rel-Off
2Alarm+ Ymax Scale-0
Kw Scale-F
Dim

Manual mode
without Output1 1Setp A PW-inp
Menu extensions Output2 1Setp B
for commissioning 1Alarm-
(Password lock
ON) 1Alarm+
2Setp A
2Setp B
2Alarm-
2Alarm+
Figure shows all possible displayed parameters; displayed parameters dependent on parameterised function!

Page: 32 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix A2: Parameters from A to Z for standard functions


These parameter names always appear in the 1st line of the LCD display.
Parameter Meaning in menu Point
1Alarm- Lower alarm limit, 1 controller
st
Setpt 5.3
1Alarm+ Upper alarm limit, 1st controller Setpt 5.3
1Setp A 1st setpoint, 1st controller Setpt 5.3
1Setp B 2nd setpoint, 1st controller Setpt 5.3
1SpTypA Setpoint type, 1st controller, 1st setp. Setpt 5.3
1SpTypB Setpoint type, 1st controller, 2nd setp. Setpt 5.3
1T-Lowp Filter time, 1st controller Setpt 5.3
2.Param Changeover to 2nd parameter set Input 5.6
2.Setp Changeover to 2nd setpoint Input 5.6
2Alarm- Lower alarm limit, 2nd controller Setpt 5.3
2Alarm+ Upper alarm limit, 2nd controller Setpt 5.3
2nd L1 2nd display line 1 Display 5.8
2nd L2 2nd display line 2 Display 5.8
2Setp A 1st setpoint, 2nd controller Setpt 5.3
2Setp B 2nd setpoint, 2nd controller Setpt 5.3
2SpTypA Setpoint type, 2nd controller, 1st setp. Setpt 5.3
2SpTypB Setpoint type, 2nd controller, 2nd setp. Setpt 5.3
2T-Lowp Filter time, 2nd controller Setpt 5.3
ActValU Secondary actual value Input 5.6
ActValX Primary actual value Input 5.6
CtrlTyp Controller type CtrlPar 5.5
Deadbd Deadband CtrlPar 5.5
Dim Dimension Input 5.6
Disturb Disturbance compensation Input 5.6
DsplCtr Display selection Controller no. Profile 5.4
ExtSetp External setpoint Input 5.6
FeedBk Position feedback Input 5.6
Hyst Hysteresis CtrlPar 5.5
Kr P gain CtrlPar 5.5
Kw Setpoint gain CtrlPar 5.5
Lang Language changeover Display 5.8
LCDcntr Contrast setting, LCD display Display 5.8
Line 1 Display line 1 Display 5.8
Line 2 Display line 2 Display 5.8
Output1 Actuating output, 1st controller Manual 4
Output2 Actuating output, 2nd controller Manual 4
OutputX Actual-value output Output 5.7
OutputY Controller output Output 5.7
ParSet Select parameter set CtrlPar 5.5
Prof-No Select controller profile no. Profile 5.4
PW-chng Change password Passwrd 5.2
PW-inp Password entry Passwrd 5.1
PW-lock Activate password lock Passwrd 5.2
R scale Calibration - resistance input Input 5.6
Rel+Off Relay Plus continuous OFF Input 5.6
Rel+On Relay Plus continuous ON Input 5.6
Rel-Off Relay Minus continuous OFF Input 5.6
Rel-On Relay Minus continuous ON Input 5.6
Save as Save controller profile no. Profile 5.4
Scale-0 Scale zero point Input 5.6
Scale-F Scale factor Input 5.6
Struct Controller structure CtrlPar 5.5
T cycl Min. switching cycle CtrlPar 5.5
T drive Actuator operating time CtrlPar 5.5
Tn Reset time CtrlPar 5.5
Trend Trend compensation Input 5.6
Ts min Min. switching duration CtrlPar 5.5
Tv Derivative action time CtrlPar 5.5
Vd Max. D gain CtrlPar 5.5
Ymax Max. Controller output CtrlPar 5.5
Ymin Min. Controller output CtrlPar 5.5

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 33
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix A3: Value assignments from A to Z for standard functions


These value assignments are always shown in the 2nd line of the LCD display.
Value Meaning in menu Point
No dimension Input 5.6
% Dimension per cent Input 5.6
°C Dimension degrees Celsius Input 5.6
°F Dimension degrees Fahrenheit Input 5.6
1 of 2 Display, controller 1 of 2 Profile 5.4
1ActV U Actual value, secondary controller 1 Display 5.8
1ActV X Actual value, controller 1 Display 5.8
1Dist Z Disturbance, controller 1 Display 5.8
1Feed+Y Position feedback in %, controller 1 Display 5.8
1Lin 0< 1st linear output 20-0mA (5/10-0V) Output 5.7
1Lin 0> 1st linear output 0-20mA (0-5/10V) Output 5.7
1Lin 4< 1st linear output 20-4mA Output 5.7
1Lin 4> 1st linear output 4-20mA Output 5.7
1Out%Y Continuous output in %, controller 1 Display 5.8
1Out+Y Switching output, controller 1 Display 5.8
1Relais 1st relay set (Rel+ and Rel-) Output 5.7
1Setp V Setpoint, secondary controller 1 Display 5.8
1Setp W Setpoint, controller 1 Display 5.8
1Tren D Trend input, controller 1 Display 5.8
2 of 2 Display, controller 2 of 2 Profile 5.4
2ActV u Actual value, secondary controller Display 5.8
2ActV x Actual value, controller 2 Display 5.8
2Dist z Disturbance, controller 2 Display 5.8
2Feed+y Position feedback in %, controller 2 Display 5.8
2Lin 0< 2nd linear output 20-0mA (5/10-0V) Output 5.7
2Lin 0> 2nd linear output 0-20mA (0-5/10V) Output 5.7
2Lin 4< 2nd linear output 20-4mA Output 5.7
2Lin 4> 2nd linear output 4-20mA Output 5.7
2Out%y Continuous output in %, controller 2 Display 5.8
2Out+y Switching output, controller 2 Display 5.8
2PntPW 2-Point controller with feedback CtrlPar 5.5
2Point 2-Point controller without feedback CtrlPar 5.5
2Relais 2nd relay set (Rel+ and Rel-) Output 5.7
2Setp v Setpoint, secondary controller 2 Display 5.8
2Setp w Setpoint, controller 2 Display 5.8
2Tren d Trend input, controller 2 Display 5.8
3PntPW 3-Point controller with feedback CtrlPar 5.5
3Point 3-Point controller without feedback CtrlPar 5.5
B Dimension bar Input 5.6
Cont Continuous controller CtrlPar 5.5
CscStep Cascade step controller CtrlPar 5.5
deutsch Display texts in German Display 5.8
E1 External input 1 Input 5.6
E2 External input 2 Input 5.6
E3 External input 3 Input 5.6
E4 External input 4 Input 5.6
E5 External input 5 Input 5.6
E6 External input 6 Input 5.6
english Display texts in English Display 5.8
extern Setpoint type external setpoint Setpt 5.3
fixed Setpoint type fixed setpoint Setpt 5.3
hP Dimension hectopascal Input 5.6
kalibr Use factory preset for 0-200R Input 5.6
Lin 0.. 3rd linear input as 0-...mA/V Input 5.6
Lin 4.. 3rd linear input as 4-20mA Input 5.6
Lin ..4 3rd linear input as 20-4mA Input 5.6
Manual Internal state: Manual mode Input 5.6
mm Dimension millimetre Input 5.6
NC No input assigned Input 5.6
NC No output assigned Output 5.7
Off Status - password lock is OFF Passwrd 5.1

Page: 34 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix A3: Continued


These value assignments are always shown in the 2nd line of the LCD display.

Value Meaning in menu Point


On Assignment - password lock ON Passwrd 5.1
only 1 Display controller 1 only Profile 5.4
P Controller structure P CtrlPar 5.5
PD Controller structure PD CtrlPar 5.5
PD2 Controller structure PD with D2 CtrlPar 5.5
PI Controller structure PI CtrlPar 5.5
PID Controller structure PID CtrlPar 5.5
PID2 Controller structure PID with D2 CtrlPar 5.5
PT100-1 1st linear input as PT100 (0(4)-20mA) Input 5.6
PT100-2 2nd linear input as PT100 Input 5.6
Resist 4th linear input as resistance Input 5.6
Rmax Save R as Rmax for scaling Input 5.6
Rmin Save R as Rmin for scaling Input 5.6
Step 3-Point step controller CtrlPar 5.5

Appendix A4: Error displays and messages from A to Z


These items of information are shown in the 1st or 2nd line of the LCD display.
Display Meaning in menu Point
—- Adjustment - 1 switching output
st Manual 4
(via emergency operating buttons only)
|| Adjustment - switching output =0 Manual 4
<< Adj. - switching output CLOSED=- Manual 4
>> Adj. - switching output OPEN=+ Manual 4
0—- Start password entry (4-digit) Passwrd 5.1
1.ActV— Error, 1st actual value above upper alarm limit 5.3.3
1.ActV++ Error, 1st actual value below lower alarm limit 5.3.3
1.PT <0 Error, 1st PT100 below measuring range 6.2
1.PT >1 Error, 1st PT100 above measuring range 6.2
2.ActV— Error, 2nd actual value above upper alarm limit 5.3.3
2.ActV++ Error, 2nd actual value below lower alarm limit 5.3.3
2.PT <0 Error, 2nd PT100 below measuring range 6.2
2.PT >1 Error, 2nd PT100 above measuring range 6.2
362MC Controller type, display during start 2.2
ERROR Error indication, for error in 1st line 6
Lin <0 Error, linear input below measuring range 6.2
Lin >1 Error, linear output above measuring range 6.2
PAR ERR Parameter error during reset 6.1.3
Param Error, parameter monitoring 6.1
RAM Error, RAM monitoring 6.1
RAM ERR RAM error during reset 6.1.3
Resist<0 Error, R input below measuring range 6.2
Resist>1 Error, R input above measuring range 6.2
ROM Error, ROM monitoring 6.1
ROM ERR ROM error during reset 6.1.3
Vx.xx Software status x.xx, display during start 2.2
Watchdog Error, watchdog monitoring 6.1

Appendix A5: Symbols employed in this manual


These symbols always have the same meaning throughout the manual.
Symbol Meaning
 Values stored in profile of controller 1
‚ Values stored in profile of controller 2
X1 Value X in 1st parameter set of a controller
X2 Value X in 2nd parameter set of a controller

?
I Please alter values in Manual mode only!
Particularly important information

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 35
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix B1: Hardware extension - 2nd relay set


The hardware of the 362MC can be extendet at the factory via the addition of a 2nd set of switching
output relays, comprising one relay+ and one relay-.
Terminal assignments
Connection table (362MC hardware extension)
(excerpt) - 2nd relay set - Connection is carried out via terminals
Terminal Signal name 7-9 marked Relay 2, as specified in
the connection table opposite.
7 N Output, 2nd relay set
8 + (Open) Connection for 2nd switching output
9 - (Closed)

Connection and wiring


Two connection modes apply for the switching voltage, as already described for the 1st relay set under
Connection of switching outputs (9.3).
362MC AC In standard configuration, the infeed supply
actuator voltage is also connected directly to the
actuator via these output relays.
OP CL No additional wiring is necessary, therefore.
+ -
As in the case of the 1st relay set, the
N M
1~
incorporated F2 fuse is employed for
(Terminal No. 2) separate protection
L1
(Terminal No. 1)
F2

362MC DC In the special version, the 2nd relay set is


actuator also available with floating output contacts.
This again enables control with voltages
OP CL
other than the supply voltage, e.g. for DC
+ - actuators.
The maximum permissible contact load
as specified on the data sheet is to be
external observed!
Control The control/switching voltage is to be
voltage provided with external fusing!

The use of shielded cabling is recommended.


See also Connection of switching outputs (9.3) and Connecting cable (9.10).

Parameterisation
The outputs are parameterised as controller output according to their respective tasks in the Output
commissioning menu. In the course of parameterisation, the output is assigned to the desired controller.
See also Output menu (5.7).

? When the extendet version with a 2nd relay set is installed, the F2 fuse unit is rated
for the max. switching capacity of both relay sets together, and is fitted with a 2AT fuse
for the standard 230V AC version or a 4AT fuse for the special 115V AC version.

Page: 36 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix B2: Hardware extension - Linear outputs


A module incorporating 2 linear outputs is available as a hardware extension for the 362MC which can
be installed at the factory. The module incorporates the respective D/A converters and the isolated
output stages, which in standard configuration are provided as current outputs. Voltage outputs are also
available as a special variant.
Terminal assignments
Connection table (362MC hardware extension)
(excerpt) - linear outputs - Connection is carried out by means of
Terminal Signal name terminals 21-24, which are marked
Module 2, in accordance with the
21 d + linear output 1 0(4)-20mA, ±20mA table opposite. The extension is
22 c - (in special version 0-10 V, ±10 V) available only with 2 x current output
23 b + linear output 2 0(4)-20mA, ±20mA or 2 x voltage output.
24 a - (in special version 0-10 V, ±10 V)

Connection and wiring 2 x Current output


I= 0-20mA
The diagrams opposite show the connection 4-20mA 362MC
configuration. Connection is carried out with ±20mA +
I1
shielded, twisted-pair cabling with a min. wire RL max. 400R RL
-
cross-section of 0.22mm². +
I2
Parameterisation RL -
The outputs are parameterised in the Output
commissioning menu as controller output or
outputs for external actual-value indication, 2 x Voltage output
according to their respective tasks. The output U= 0-10 V
362MC
range 0-20mA / 4-20mA or, with opposite ±10 V
RI min. 1k RI U1 +
effective direction 20-0mA / 20-4mA, is
assigned by the user as required. The same -
applies to the voltage outputs. The outputs +
are defined as unipolar or bipolar outputs via -
RI U2
appropriate parameterisation of the controller
output limiting parameters, Ymin and Ymax.
The following table shows several examples of
definitions for the output range. See also Controller parameters menu (5.5) and Output menu (5.7).

Output Parameters output Comment


assignment Ymin Ymax type range
1Lin 0> 0% 100% current 0-20mA
2Lin 4> 0% 100% current 4-20mA
1Lin 0< 0% 100% voltage 10-0 V reversed effective direction
2Lin 0> 0% 50% voltage 0-5 V
1Lin 4< 0% 100% current 20-4mA reversed effective direction
2Lin 0> -100% 100% current ±20mA

? The shields of all connection cables are to be


connected to control cabinet earth, ensuring a
362MC

substantial contact surface area. The cabling


should be as short as possible and have an
adequate cross-section.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 37
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix B3: Hardware extension - RS485/RS422 communication interface


A module incorporating a communication interface is available for the 362MC, for installation at the
factory. The interface is isolated, and in the standard version it is wired up as an RS485 interface
(2-wire). A special variant with RS422 interface (4-wire) is available. The communication interface
enables the transmission of process data and setpoints from the two controllers of the 362MC.

Terminal assignments
Connection table (362MC hardware extension)
(excerpt) - RS485/RS422 communication interface - Connection is carried out by means of
Terminal Signal name terminals 25-28, which are marked
Module 1, in accordance with the
25 d +Rx/Tx > transmitted and received data, RS485 table opposite.
26 c - Rx/Tx (in RS422 version Rx = received data)
27 b +Rx/Tx < transmitted and received data, RS485 Connection and wiring
28 a - Rx/Tx (in RS422 version Tx = transmitted data) The diagrams below show the
connection configuration. Connection
is carried out with shielded, twisted-pair cabling with a min. wire cross-section of 0.22mm². 120 ohm is
recommended as the terminating impedance for the RS485 interface.
Example: RS485-Interface
çè

RS485
Master
120R

362MC 362MC 362MC


Slave n Slave 2 Slave 1

Parameterisation Example: RS422-Interface


The transmission speed “Baudr” and the
user address “Slave no” of the controller è +Rx
-Rx
are set via two additional parameters in
362MC
RS422
Master

ç
Slave

the Profile commissioning menu: +Tx


-Tx
Parameter Value
Baudr 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
SlaveNo 1...127

Overview of communication protocols

Data direction: Master -> 362MC Data direction: 362MC -> Master
- setpoints and alarm limits, controller 1 - confirmation setpoint message, controller 1
- setpoints and alarm limits, controller 2 - confirmation setpoint message, controller 2
- request process data and status, controller 1 - process data and status, controller 1
- request process data and status, controller 2 - process data and status, controller 2
A description of the transmission procedures and the protocol assignments is available on request.

Page: 38 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix C1: Special function - Trend compensation


The standard software of the 362MC incorporates a special function for the enhanced control of systems
with large dead times. This special trend compensation function, a traditional feature of Pleiger
controllers, enables the differential activation of a second measuring sensor.
Differential adjustment of this measured value, applied to the controller, enables early adjustment of the
controller output, before the primary measuring sensor is able to detect the trend of the controlled
system as a system deviation - this detection being delayed as a result of the large dead time. The
expected trend of the controller output is thus compensated in advance.

Selection
The special trend compensation function is selected via the “Trend” parameter in the Input
commissioning menu (5.6).
When the value “NC” is assigned to the Trend parameter, the special trend compensation function is
passive.

362MC without trend compensation


P- (Structure with D) in input menu:
controller ActValX = PT100-1
Tend = NC

Switching Out+Y
I- Actuator Controlled
Setp W dx output Out%Y Feed Y ActV X
controller or system
- Linear
output

D-
controller

362MC
P- (Structure with D2)
controller
D component (without trend compensation)
The normal D component of the standard controller
without trend compensation is generated in Switching
I-
accordance with the diagrams shown here when Setp W dx controller
output
or
controller structure with D or D2 component is - Linear
selected in the “Struct” controller parameter. ActV X output

D2-
controller

When an input, such as the 2nd measured value input “PT100-2” is assigned to the “Trend” parameter,
however, the special trend compensation function is active.

The D component of the controller with trend compensation is generated in accordance with the
diagrams shown as follows when controller structure with D or D2 component is selected in the “Struct”
controller parameter.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 39
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

D2-Anteil bei Tendenzaufschaltung

362MC with trend compensation


P- (Structure with D2) in input menu:
controller ActValX = PT100-1
Tend = PT100-2

Switching Out+Y
I- Actuator Controlled
Setp W dx output Out%Y Feed Y ActV X
controller or system
- Linear
output

D2- Tend D
controller

Parameterisation
As in the case of the standard controller, the D component for the controller with activated trend
compensation is also set via the control parameters Tv and Vd.
See also Controller parameters menu (5.5)

Example
The circuit diagram below shows a typical example of the use of the special trend compensation
function. Here, an inlet temperature sensor (TIN) has been added to the outlet temperature control (TOUT)
of a main engine. The effects of the dead time between the outlet temperature sensor and the mixing
valve are reduced substantially by means of the special trend compensation function
(parameter Trend = PT100-2).

362MC
Setp W
3-Point Out+Y
step controller 1Relay
-

ActV X Tend D
PT100-1 PT100-2

TOUT TT TT TIN M
PT100 PT100
Main engine

Cooler

Page: 40 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix C2: Functional extension - Disturbance compensation


The standard functions of the 362MC software can be extendet by additional software, which is to be
installed at the factory. Necessary internal hardware extensions, such as extensions to memory areas,
etc. are installed at the same time.
The functional extension disturbance compensation involves applying a disturbance which affects the
controlled system directly to the controller, so as to compensate the expected effects of this disturbance
on the control process in advance.
The disturbance is weighted via a definable characteristic, delayed via a 1 st order low pass and added to
the output of the controller. In a special variant for 3-Point step controllers, disturbance compensation is
effected via addition to the controller setpoint (see Compensation).

Selection
The special disturbance compensation function is selected in controllers which are equipped with the
functional extension by assigning an input, e.g. the 3rd linear input “Lin 4..” (with 4-20mA measuring
range), to the “Disturb” parameter in the Input commissioning menu, instead of assigning the value
“NC” (= special function passive). See also Input menu (5.6).

Parameterisation
For the purposes of the disturbance compensation function, the “CtrlPar” commissioning menu
(controller parameters) is extended automatically to include the entry options shown in the table below.
See also Controller parameters menu (5.5)

in the Parameter Value (min Meaning Comment


profile each controller max)
Parameter (1) following parameter Kw The 1st parameter set of the controller is
1st parameter set used for disturbance compensation
‚ Tz 0.1s Filter time for 1st order low pass Delays the compensation function.
1000.0s for disturbance compensation See Compensation delay
‚ Kz 0% -100.0% Characteristic for disturbance weighting
Weighting of the disturbance
100.0% Compensation at 0%-disturbance value compensation function is effected
‚ Kz 25% -100.0% via the characteristic which can be
100.0% Compensation at 25%-disturbance value parameterised here.
‚ Kz 50% -100.0% The characteristic is defined via the
100.0% Compensation at 50%-disturbance value interpolation points, Kz. The values
‚ Kz 75% -100.0% between the points are determined
100.0% Compensation at 75%-disturbance value via linear interpolation.
‚ Kz100% -100.0%
100.0% Compensation at 100%-disturbance value See also Characteristic

Compensation
The special disturbance compensation function is not equally applicable or expedient for all
parameterisable controller types. The following notes on application of the disturbance signal thus relate
to the controller types of the 362MC which are selectable under “CtrlTyp” in the Controller parameters
menu.

CtrlTyp = 2-Point and 3-Point


Disturbance compensation is not expedient for these switching controllers without feedback,
and is thus not installed in the 362MC. Selecting this function when these controllers are active
will have no effect on the controller output or the setpoint.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 41
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

CtrlTyp = 2PntPW, 3PntPW and Cont


Depending on the type of controlled system, disturbance compensation may be expedient when
operating switching controllers with feedback and the continuous controller. After being
weighted via the characteristic and delayed by the low pass, the disturbance is added to internal
controller output Y of the continuous PID controller. It thus has a direct effect on the pulse-
width modulated switching output (PW) or the linear output of the controller.
Example for controller type CtrlTyp = 2PntPW, 3PntPW and Cont

362MC PID Switching Actuator Controlled


Setp W dx Y output PW Out+Y Feed Y system ActV X
or
- + Linear Out%Y
output
Z
Dist Z

disturbance
compensation

CtrlTyp = CscStep
Disturbance compensation is highly expedient in many applications when using the cascade
step controller. A measured value “Dist Z” from the system controlled by the secondary
controller may serve as the disturbance variable, for example. After being weighted via the
characteristic and delayed by means of the low pass, this disturbance is added to the
internal controller output Y = setpoint “Setp V” of the secondary controller. It thus has a direct
effect on the control process of the secondary controller.
Example for controller type CtrlTyp = CscStep
362MC Kw2 Controlled system
PID + PID Actuator
Setp W dx Y Setp V Out+Y Feed Y Part A ActV U Part B ActV X
Switching I
- + - output PW

disturbance
compensation
Dist Z

?
In the case of the cascade step controller, the primary continuous PID controller always
uses the 1st parameter set (1) and the secondary 3-Point step controller always uses
the 2nd parameter set (2).
External changeover to the 2nd parameter set is thus not possible.

?
When the disturbance compensation function acts on a setpoint (Setp V), as is the
case with the cascade step controller, the % compensation is also proportional to
the scaling of the control range. When a scale from 0-200°C applies, a 1.0%
weighting for the disturbance compensation function (Z) will thus correspond to a
setpoint increase of 2.0°C.

Page: 42 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

CtrlTyp = Step , CscStep


Disturbance compensation is not expedient with the 3-Point step controller, either, and is thus
not implemented in the 362MC. Selecting this function for controller type “Step” will have no
effect. A 3-Point step controller with setpoint compensation can be implemented via special
parameterisation of a “CscStep” controller, however. After being weighted via the characteristic
and delayed by the low pass, the disturbance is added to “Setp W” to generate “Setp V”.
In this way, the disturbance leads directly to an increase or reduction in the setpoint.
Condition: Parameter of 1st parameter set Kr1=0, Kw1=1, other parameters not in use,
parameter of 2nd parameter set Kw2=1, other parameters to be set for step controller,
parameter in Input menu ActV X=NC, ActV U=PT100-1
Example for controller type CtrlTyp = CscStep (setpoint compensation)
362MC Kw2
(PID) + PID Actuator Controlled
Setp W Y Setp V Out+Y Feed Y
Switching I system ActV U
Kr1=0 + - outputPW
Kw1=1 (Part A)
Z

disturbance
compensation
Dist Z

Characteristic
The characteristic to weight the influence of the disturbance is defined via 5 interpolation points
distributed evenly over the value range. The values between the interpolation points are determined via
linear interpolation.
Example of the values of a characteristic: Graph of the characteristic:
(arbitrary values used for purpose of illustration)
Kz 0% = 10.0% 100 %
Kz 25% = 40.0%
Weighting (added to controller output)

Kz 50% = 50.0% 80 %

Kz 75% = 70.0%
Kz100%= 50.0% 60 %

In accordance with this characteristic, the contoller 40 %

output is increased by +40% points at a disturbance


factor of 25%, for example, and by +70% points at a 20 %

disturbance factor of 75%. 0%


If the controller output is limited by Ymin and Ymax, 0% 25 % 50 % 75 % 100 %

these limits will continue to apply.


disturbance value

Compensation delay
Application of the disturbance to the controller
output is delayed by time Tz.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 43
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Example
The following circuit diagram shows a typical example of use of the special disturbance compensation
function. The outlet temperature (TOUT) of a main engine is controlled using a cascade step controller
(CtrlTyp=CscStep), whereby the secondary control circuit reduces the turbo-charger´s disturbing effects
on the inlet temperature (TIN). By means of the special disturbance compensation function (parameter
Disturb = Lin 4..), a measured value for engine output (TS) is weighted via the characteristic and
delayed by means of the low pass and then added to controller output Y of the primary controller. In this
way, the setpoint for the inlet temperature is adjusted before the disturbance is able to manifest itself in
the form of an altered outlet temperature.

362MC Kw2

+
Continuous 3-Point Out+Y
Setp W Y Setp V
PID controller step controller
1Relais
- primary + - secondary

ActV X Z ActV U

Dist Z

PT100-1 Lin 4.. PT100-2

engine output value TIN M


TOUT TT TS TT
(4-20 mA)
PT100 PT100
Main engine Turbo charger

Cooler

A possible characteristic for this application: Graph of the characteristic:


(arbitrary values used for purpose of illustration) disturbance value
0% 25 % 50 % 75 % 100 %
Kz TS Value Z Setp V 0% 0°C

mA % °C °C
Weighting (added to controller output)

Weighting (added to setpoint)

- 2% - 4°C
0% 4 0.0 0.0 80.0
25% 8 - 6.0 -12.0 68.0 - 4% - 8°C

50% 12 - 8.0 -16.0 64.0


75% 16 - 5.0 -10.0 70.0 - 6% - 12°C

100% 20 - 3.5 - 7.0 73.0 - 8% - 16°C

The values for Setp V apply for Setp W=80.0°C, - 10 % - 20°C


Kw2=1 and Setp W=ActV X (Y=0 compensated).

Page: 44 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix C3: Functional extension - Setpoint programme

The standard functions of the 362MC software can be extendet by additional software in the form of the
Setpoint programme, which is to be installed at the factory. Necessary hardware extensions, such as ex-
tensions to memory areas, etc., are carried out at the same time.
The functional extension Setpoint programme which is described here enables the setpoint control of
ramps, whereby the setpoints, gradients and hold times are stored step by step in the setpoint pro-
grammes and can be recalled as a time-controlled automatic programme.
5 programmes containing 20 individual steps each are available for this purpose.

Selection
The special Setpoint programme function is selected in controllers which are equipped with the
functional extension by assigning a setpoint programme “SpPrgNo” (1 to 5) to the “SpTyp” parameters
in the extended Setpoint menu. This assignment is possible for both the 1st controller (1SpTypA) and
the 2nd controller (2SpTypA) of the 362MC. If a changeover input for changeover to the 2nd setpoint has
been assigned to one or both controllers, setpoint programmes can be assigned to the 2nd setpoints
(1SpTypB, 2SpTypB), too. See also Parametrisation and Display.
If setpoint type 1SpTypA=StpPrg1 is set for the 1st controller, for example, the entire sequence of
setpoint programme 1 will be started and the various time setpoints resulting from the programme will be
controlled by the 1st controller.

Programme structure
The basic structure of a setpoint programme is illustrated below by reference to an example. In this
example, a temperature is to be transformed via the setpoint programme into a fixed value for control.
The scaling for the controller has been set at Scale-0=0 and Scale-F=200 for PT100 input and the
dimension has been defined as Dim=°C. See also explanatory note on Scaling (5.6.2)
The following setpoint programme has been stored:

Step 1 Setp1 60.0°C Time1 Time2 Time3 Time4

Time1 10s 100 °C

Step 2 Setp2 80.0°C Setp4


Time2 45s 90 °C

Step 3 Setp3 80.0°C


Time3 180s 80 °C
Setpoint

Setp2 Setp3
Step 4 Setp4 95.0°C
Time4 60s
70 °C

Step 5 Setp5 0.0°C


60 °C
Time5 0s Setp1

50 °C
0s 50s 100s 150s 200s 250s 300s 350s
Time

If the setpoint programme is now started, the process concerned will be continued smoothly from the last
setpoint, in the example at approx. 50°C, and the 1st step will be executed. In the example, the setpoint
is increased to 60°C in 10s. In the following 2nd step, the setpoint is increased to 80°C in 45s, i.e. at a
gradient of 0.44°C/s. In the 3rd step a hold time of 180s has been defined for the attained level of 80°C.
In the 4th step the setpoint is then increased from 80°C to 95°C in 60s, i.e. at a gradient of 0.25°C/s. As
no value has been programmed in the 5th step, the value of 95°C will be retained as a fixed value.
See also Programme functions.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 45
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Parameterisation
The setpoint programme is activated and entries effected in the extended Setpoint menu:
Parameter Value (min Meaning Comment
1st controller max)
I 1SpTypA fixed Setpoint type A = fixed value Extension for selection of Setpoint
extern = external input programme in addition to types fixed
StpPrg1 = setpoint and external
StpPrg2 programme The programme no. 1 to 5 to be
StpPrg3 programme no. 1 executed is selected directly here.
StpPrg4 to programme no. 5 The fixed-value entry 1SetpA is
StpPrg5 omitted when SetpPrg is selected.

I 1SpTypB fixed Setpoint type B = fixed value As in the case of 1SpTypA, a


extern = external input a setpoint programme can also be
StpPrg1 = setpoint assigned for the second setpoint B,
ò programme no. 1 if the changeover function is active.
StpPrg5 to programme no. 5 See Setpoint menu, 5.3
1T-Lowp Filter time for setpoint changeover
1Alarm- See 5.3 lower alarm limit See Setpoint menu, 5.3
1Alarm+ upper alarm limit

Parameter The following parameters for the 2nd controller are only displayed when
2nd controller 2 controllers have been selected in the Profile menu.
I 2SpTypA fixed Setpoint type A = fixed value As for the 1st controller, a setpoint
extern = external input programme can also be assigned to
StpPrg1 = setpoint to the 2nd controller.
ò programme no. 1 See 1SpTypA (above)
StpPrg5 to programme no. 5
I 2SpTypB fixed Setpoint type B = fixed value
extern = external input
StpPrg1 = setpoint See 1SpTypB (above)
ò programme no. 1
StpPrg5 to programme no. 5
2T-Lowp Filter time for setpoint changeover
2Alarm- See 5.3 lower alarm limit See Setpoint menu, 5.3
2Alarm+ upper alarm limit
I* SpPrgNo 1 Programme selection for entry The selected setpoint programme is
5 Programme no. 1 to 5 is loaded in the Entry field.
Setp1 0.0°C 1st step Entries for the 20 steps of the loaded
200.0°C Setp1 - temperature per example setpoint programme.
Time1 -5s Time1 - 1-9999s; (time 0 or negative Setpoint here e.g. 0-200°C; see also
9999s see Programme functions) Explanatory note on setpoints
Setp2 See above 2nd step (5.3.1)
Time2
ò to See also Programme structure,
Setp20 See above 20th step Programme entry and
Time20 (last step) Programme functions
I* If a setpoint programme is selected via “SpPrgNo” in order to carry out changes to the
programming of the steps and if this programme has been activated under 1SpTypA, 1SpTypB,
2SpTypA or 2SpTypB, the changes should be carried out in manual mode only.

Page: 46 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Programme entry
As shown in the table under ‘Parameterisation’, the number (1 to 5) of the programme to be created or
edited is first of all selected in the parameter “SpPrgNo”. The selected programme is then loaded into
the entry field. The individual steps, each defined by “Setp” (value) and “Time” (value) (1 to 20), are
then displayed and can be entered or edited.

Programme functions
In addition to starting, stopping and ending a setpoint programme, the following additional special
programme functions are also available:

Programme start: When a setpoint programme is activated it starts beginning at step 1.


The activation can either be triggered by an external switchover of the setpoint to
a setpoint programme or
by changing the type of the current setpoint to a setpoint programme StpPrg(1-5).
This selection should be carried out in Manual operating mode -
MANUAL = controller stop, after which the programme is started in Automatic
mode by pressing the Auto button.

Programme stop: If the controller is switched to Manual mode by pressing the Man and Exit buttons
(simultaneously), the setpoint programme will be stopped at the last time setpoint.
It will subsequently be resumed on pressing the Auto button for Automatic mode.

Programme end: When Time = 0s is programmed in a step, the setpoint programme will be ended
in the preceding step. The final setpoint programmed in this preceding step will
continue to be controlled as a fixed value.

Programme call: When Time = negative (-1 to -5) is programmed in a step, the corresponding
setpoint programme (1 to 5) will be called and started at step 1.

Programme loop: If the same setpoint programme is called within a programme call, e.g. in the final
programme call (Time = -(own StpPrg No), the setpoint programme will be
started again at step 1, thus creating a continuous programme loop.

Display
To display the state of the setpoint programme during execution a special display function is provided.
This function displays the number (1 to 5) and the current step (1 to 20) of the setpoint programme in a
single line.

The following figures show some examples how to use this function.

Example controller 1 In the 1st example the current setpoint of the pro-
1. Line: StpPrg1 in step 4 gramme is displayed in the second line. This shows
2. Line: current setpoint (1Setp W) the run of the setpoint between the different steps.

Example controller 2
1. Line: SwPrg3 in step 15
2. Line: controller output (2Feed+y)

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 47
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Parameterisation of display function


If one setpoint type SpTyp is set to a StpPrg(1 to 5) the display function for setpoint programmes are
selectable in the extended Display menu (5.8). The extended display menu are shown in the following
table.
Parameter Value (min Meaning Comment
general max)
Line 1 1Setp W Setpoint - controller 1
Line 2 1SpPrg Setpoint programme - controller 1
2nd L1 1Setp V Setpoint secondary - controller 1 See also Explanatory note on
2nd L2 1ActV X Actual value - controller 1 Display menu (5.8)
1ActV U Actual value secondary - controller 1
1Dist Z Disturbance input - controller 1
1Tren D Trend input - controller 1
1Out+Y Switching control output - controller 1 Display with symbol <<, || or >>
1Feed+Y Position feedback in % - controller 1 Additional to switching output symbols
1Out%Y Continuous control output in % - controller 1 Display in xx.x%
2Setp w Setpoint - controller 2
2SpPrg Setpoint programme - controller 2
2Setp v Setpoint secondary - controller 2 See also Explanatory note on
2ActV x Actual value - controller 2 Display menu (5.8)
2ActV u Actual value secondary - controller 2
2Dist z Disturbance input - controller 2
2Tren d Trend input - controller 2
2Out+y Switching control output - controller 2 Display with symbol <<, || or >>
2Feed+y Position feedback in % - controller 2 Additional to switching output symbols
2Out%y Continuous control output in % - controller 2 Display in xx.x%
Lang deutsch Language selection for all
english display texts
LCDcntr 1 Contrast setting for the
255 LCD display
Example
The functions of the setpoint programme are illustrated below by reference to a possible application for
the 362MC functional extension Setpoint programme in conjunction with changeover to a 2nd setpoint.
In this example, the speed of a motor is to be selectable in two speed ranges, fast and slow, via a
changeover selector. The transitions between the speeds, slow>fast and fast>slow, are to be effected
gently and in several steps during changeover.
To this end, the parameter 2Setp has been assigned to input E5 in the Input menu and a slow
changeover contact of the changeover selector has been connected to this binary input. The value
range has been selected in the Input menu as Scale-0=0, Scale-F=100 and Dim=%. In the Setpoint
menu, the value StpPrg1 (slow>fast) has been assigned to parameter 1SpTypA and the value StpPrg2
(fast>slow) has been assigned to 1SpTypB. The two setpoint programmes are defined as shown in the
following tables. The resultant functional sequence is shown in the diagram.
StpPrg1 StpPrg2
E5=Changeover
Setp1 50.0% Setp1 75.0%
fast slow fast
90%
Time1 40s Time1 35s 80%
Setp2 70.0% Setp2 55.0% 70%
Time2 20s Time2 18s
Setpoint

60%
Setp3 85.0% Setp3 40.0% 50%
Time3 10s Time3 5s 40%
Setp4 0.0% Setp4 0.0% 30%
Time4 0s Time4 0s 0s 40s 80s 0s
Time
40s 80s 0s 40s 80s

Page: 48 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix D1: Steps for commissioning

The 362MC controller incorporates profile memories whose parameters have been pre-parameterised at
the factory for commissioning. This factory set-ups are based on decades of experience in controller
applications. Using the profile memories will place these experiences at your disposal and save your
commissioning time. The following procedure is to be observed:
ð set the controller to Manual mode (press Man and Exit buttons simultaneously);
ð select an appropriate profile for the control task concerned, activate the profile memory and
save to an available profile memory via the Save as function (see 5.4);
ð check the input and output assignments and correct if necessary (see 5.6 + 5.7);
ð check functions assigned to the LCD displays and adjust if necessary (see 5.8);
ð check correct acquisition of the measured values;
ð check the actuator for correct functioning in Manual mode (see 4);
ð switch the controller to Automatic mode (Auto button) and start up the controlled system
(adjusting the parameters, if appropriate).
Adjusting the parameters
In most applications only minor adaptations of the factory set-up is necessary. The most important
adaptations concern the controller parameters Kr and Tn. The aim is to make the controlled
system stable and reduce control deviations as fast as required and possible. We recommend the
following steps, starting with the factory set-up:

è1 To test the behaviour of the controlled system it


should be stimulated using a small change of the
setpoint W to W* (up or down).
Go on with è2 or è3.

è2 If the controlled system is not stable (swinging),


decrease P-gain Kr by steps and loop with step è1
and è2 until the system is stable and shows only a
little or no overshot.
After that go on with è4.

è3 If the controlled system is already stable (no swinging),


increase P-gain Kr by steps and loop with step è1
and è3 until the system shows a little or no overshot
and is still stable to.
After that go on with è4.

è4 If the control deviation decreases to slowly in the stable


system, decrease reset time Tn by steps and loop with
step è1 and è4 until the system so fast as required
and possible.
Pay attention to the stability of the system and if
required, go on again with è2.

ð at the end of the commissioning procedure, document the parameter changes,


e.g. in copies of the profile memory tables in Appendix D2.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 49
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix D2: Profile memories and factory presets

The factory-preset profile memories are assigned to profile nos. 1 to 19. Profiles 20 to 50 can be used to
store the changes carried out in the course of commissioning.

The following table presents the factory presets for the general parameters and profile memory nos. 1
to 6, whose settings will facilitate the commissioning start-up procedure for several important control
tasks.

The contents of the profiles are as follows:

Profile no. 1 Basic temperature control with PT100 input, motor control valve and controller 1;
(e.g. control of the outlet temperature in the cooling circuit of a main engine).
Factory-preset for controller 1

Profile no. 2 Basic temperature control with PT100, motor control valve and controller 2;
(e.g. control of tank heating in conjunction with 1st controller + profile no. 1).
>Hardware extension - 2nd relay set - required<
Factory-preset for controller 2

Profile no. 3 Temperature control with 2 x PT100 input, motor control valve and controller 1 with
additional differential trend compensation of the 2nd PT100 measuring sensor;
(e.g. control of the outlet temperature of a cooling circuit in a main engine with trend
compensation for the inlet temperature).
See also Appendix C1

Profile no. 4 Temperature control with 2 x PT100 input, motor control valve and controller 1 as
cascade step controller with additional disturbance compensation for a 4-20mA signal
from a measured-value transmitter;
(e.g. primary control of outlet temperature in the cooling circuit of a main engine with
secondary control of inlet temperature, whereby a signal proportional to the machine
output is applied as the disturbance variable).
>Functional extension - Disturbance compensation - required<
See also Appendix C2

Profile no. 5 Differential pressure control with 4-20mA input, motor control valve and controller 1;
(e.g. control of throttle valve position down-line of a pump according to pressure
difference between inlet and outlet of the pump)
>hardware configuration - Linear input 1 as 0(4)-20mA input - required<

Profile no. 6 Temperature control with PT1pp input, pneumatic control valve and controller 1;
(e.g. control of outlet temperature in the cooling circuit of a main engine)
>hardware extension - Linear outputs - required<

?
Profile no. 1 for 1st controller and profile no. 2 for 2nd controller
are factory-preset.

Page: 50 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Factory Changes Catchword:Basic temperature control


presets (Save as) with controller 1
(or similar control set-ups)
DsplCtr selected as only 1
Prof-No 1
general Factory Changes
Baudr 9600 Parameter presets
RS485
/422

SlaveNr 1 1SpTypA fixed


Factory Changes 1Setp A 60.0°C

for 1st controller


Profile
1 controller
st presets 1SpTypB fixed
CtrlTyp Step 1Setp B 60.0°C
ParSet 1 1T-Lowp 0.0s
Struct PID 1Alarm- 0.0°C
Kr 17.0 1Alarm+ 0.0°C
Tn 220s Profile Factory Changes
Tv 0.1s 1 controller presets
st

Vd 1.0 ActValX PT100-1


1st parameter set

T drive 90.0s ActValU NC


Ts min 1.0s Trend NC
x T cycl 10.0s Disturb NC
Deadbd 0.0% ExtSetp NC
x Hyst 1.0% FeedBk Resist
x Ymin 0% R scale kalibr Rmin Rmax
x Ymax 100% 2.Setp E6
Kw 1 2.Param NC
Struct PID Rel+On NC
Kr 17.0 Rel+Off NC
Tn 220 Rel-On NC
Tv 0.1 Rel-Off NC
Scale-F 200.0
2nd parameters set

Vd 1.0
T drive 90.0s Scale-0 0
Ts min 1.0s Dim °C
x T cycl 10.0s Profile Factory Changes
Deadbd 0.0% 1 controller presets
st

x Hyst 1.0% OutputY 1Relais


x Ymin 0% OutputX NC
x Ymax 100% general Factory Changes
Kw 1 Parameter presets
x Tz 0.0s Line 1 1Setp W
x Kz 0% 0% Line 2 1Feed+Y
compensation
Disturbance

x Kz 25% 0% 2nd L1 1Tren D


x Kz 50% 0% 2nd L2 1ActV X
x Kz 75% 0% Lang deutsch
x Kz100% 0% x = not active at this CtrlTyp and Struct preset
Please use a copy of this sheet to document your settings and changes.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 51
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Factory Changes Catchword:Basic temperature control


presets (Save as) with controller 2
(or similar control set-ups)
DsplCtr by selection as 2 of 2 Hardware extension
2nd Relay set required
Prof-No 2
general Factory Changes
Baudr Factory presets and
Parameter presets
RS485
/422

SlaveNr changes see 1st controller 2SpTypA fixed


Factory Changes 2Setp A 60.0°C

for 2nd controller


‚Profile
2 nd
controller presets 2SpTypB fixed
CtrlTyp Step 2Setp B 60.0°C
ParSet 1 2T-Lowp 0.0s
Struct PID 2Alarm- 0.0°C
Kr 17.0 2Alarm+ 0.0°C
Tn 220s ‚Profile Factory Changes
Tv 0.1s 2nd
controller presets
Vd 1.0 ActValX PT100-2
1st parameter set

T drive 90.0s ActValU NC


Ts min 1.0s Trend NC
x T cycl 10.0s Disturb NC
Deadbd 0.0% ExtSetp NC
x Hyst 1.0% FeedBk NC
x Ymin 0% R scale kalibr Rmin Rmax
x Ymax 100% 2.Setp NC
Kw 1 2.Param NC
Struct PID Rel+On NC
Kr 17.0 Rel+Off NC
Tn 220 Rel-On NC
Tv 0.1 Rel-Off NC
Scale-F 200.0
2nd parameters set

Vd 1.0
T drive 90.0s Scale-0 0
Ts min 1.0s Dim °C
x T cycl 10.0s ‚Profile Factory Changes
Deadbd 0.0% 2 nd
controller presets
x Hyst 1.0% OutputY 2Relais
x Ymin 0% OutputX NC
x Ymax 100%
Kw 1 general Factory presets and
Parameter changes see 1 controller
st

x Tz 0.0s
x Kz 0% 0%
compensation
Disturbance

x Kz 25% 0%
x Kz 50% 0%
x Kz 75% 0%
x Kz100% 0% x = not active at this CtrlTyp and Struct preset
Please use a copy of this sheet to document your settings and changes.

Page: 52 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Factory Changes Catchword:Temperature control with controller 1


presets (Save as) and trend compensation

DsplCtr selected as only 1


Prof-No 3
general Factory Changes
Baudr 9600 Parameter presets
RS485
/422

SlaveNr 1 1SpTypA fixed


Factory Changes 1Setp A 60.0°C

for 1st controller


Profile
1 controller
st presets 1SpTypB fixed
CtrlTyp Step 1Setp B 60.0°C
ParSet 1 1T-Lowp 0.0s
Struct PID 1Alarm- 0.0°C
Kr 17.0 1Alarm+ 0.0°C
Tn 220s Profile Factory Changes
Tv 0.1s 1 controller presets
st

Vd 1.0 ActValX PT100-1


1st parameter set

T drive 90.0s ActValU NC


Ts min 1.0s Trend PT100-2
x T cycl 10.0s Disturb NC
Deadbd 0.0% ExtSetp NC
x Hyst 1.0% FeedBk Resist
x Ymin 0% R scale kalibr Rmin Rmax
x Ymax 100% 2.Setp E6
Kw 1 2.Param NC
Struct PID Rel+On NC
Kr 17.0 Rel+Off NC
Tn 220 Rel-On NC
Tv 0.1 Rel-Off NC
Scale-F 200.0
2nd parameters set

Vd 1.0
T drive 90.0s Scale-0 0
Ts min 1.0s Dim °C
x T cycl 10.0s Profile Factory Changes
Deadbd 0.0% 1 controller presets
st

x Hyst 1.0% OutputY 1Relais


x Ymin 0% OutputX NC
x Ymax 100% Factory
general Changes
Kw 1 Parameter presets
x Tz 0.0s Line 1 1Setp W
x Kz 0% 0% Line 2 1Feed+Y
compensation
Disturbance

x Kz 25% 0% 2nd L1 1Tren D


x Kz 50% 0% 2nd L2 1ActV X
x Kz 75% 0% Lang deutsch
x Kz100% 0% x = not active at this CtrlTyp and Struct preset
Please use a copy of this sheet to document your settings and changes.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 53
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Factory Changes Catchword:Temperature control with controller 1


presets (Save as) and disturbance compensation

DsplCtr selected as only 1 Functional extension


Disturbance compensation required
Prof-No 4
general Factory Changes
Baudr 9600 Parameter presets
RS485
/422

SlaveNr 1 1SpTypA fixed


Factory Changes 1Setp A 60.0°C

for 1st controller


Profile
1 controller
st presets 1SpTypB fixed
CtrlTyp CscStep 1Setp B 60.0°C
ParSet 1 1T-Lowp 0.0s
Struct PI 1Alarm- 0.0°C
Kr 0.0 1Alarm+ 0.0°C
Tn 220s Profile Factory Changes
x Tv 0.1s 1 controller presets
st

x Vd 1.0 ActValX PT100-1


1st parameter set

xT drive 90.0s ActValU PT100-2


x Ts min 1.0s Trend NC
x T cycl 10.0s Disturb Lin 4..
Deadbd 0.0% ExtSetp NC
x Hyst 1.0% FeedBk Widerst
Ymin 0% R scale kalibr Rmin Rmax
Ymax 100% 2.Setp E6
Kw 1 x 2.Param NC
Struct PID Rel+On NC
Kr 17.0 Rel+Off NC
Tn 220 Rel-On NC
Tv 0.1 Rel-Off NC
Scale-F 200.0
2nd parameters set

Vd 1.0
T drive 90.0s Scale-0 0
Ts min 1.0s Dim °C
x T cycl 10.0s Profile Factory Changes
Deadbd 0.0% 1 controller presets
st

x Hyst 1.0% OutputY 1Relais


x Ymin 0% OutputX NC
x Ymax 100% Factory
general Changes
Kw 1 Parameter proposal
Tz 0.0s Line 1 1Setp W
Kz 0% 3% Line 2 1Feed+Y
compensation
Disturbance

Kz 25% 4% 2nd L1 1Setp V


Kz 50% 5% 2nd L2 1ActV U
Kz 75% 6% Lang deutsch
Kz100% 6% x = not active at this CtrlTyp and Struct preset
Please use a copy of this sheet to document your settings and changes.

Page: 54 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Factory Changes Catchword:Diff. pessure control with controller 1


presets (Save as) (or similar control set-ups)
Hardware modification
DsplCtr selected as only 1 1st Linear input as 0(4)-20mA input
required
Prof-No 5
general Factory Changes
Baudr 9600 Parameter presets
RS485
/422

SlaveNr 1 1SpTypA fixed


Factory Changes 1Setp A 50.0%

for 1st controller


Profile
1 controller
st presets 1SpTypB fixed
CtrlTyp Step 1Setp B 60.0%
ParSet 1 1T-Lowp 0.0s
Struct PI 1Alarm- 0.0%
Kr 10.0 1Alarm+ 0.0%
Tn 350s Profile Factory Changes
x Tv 0.1s 1 controller presets
st

x Vd 1.0 ActValX PT100-1


1st parameter set

T drive 90.0s ActValU NC


Ts min 1.0s Trend NC
x T cycl 10.0s Disturb NC
Deadbd 2.5% ExtSetp NC
x Hyst 1.0% FeedBk NC
x Ymin 0% R scale kalibr Rmin Rmax
x Ymax 100% 2.Setp E6
Kw 1 2.Param NC
Struct PI Rel+On E4
Kr 10.0 Rel+Off NC
Tn 350 Rel-On NC
x Tv 0.1 Rel-Off NC
Scale-F 100.0
2nd parameters set

x Vd 1.0
T drive 90.0s Scale-0 0
Ts min 1.0s Dim %
x T cycl 10.0s Profile Factory Changes
Deadbd 2.5% 1 controller presets
st

x Hyst 1.0% OutputY 1Relais


x Ymin 0% OutputX NC
x Ymax 100% general Factory Changes
Kw 1 Parameter proposal
x Tz 0.0s Line 1 1Setp W
x Kz 0% 0% Line 2 1Out+Y
compensation
Disturbance

x Kz 25% 0% 2nd L1 1Setp W


x Kz 50% 0% 2nd L2 1ActV X
x Kz 75% 0% Lang deutsch
x Kz100% 0% x = not active at this CtrlTyp and Struct preset
Please use a copy of this sheet to document your settings and changes.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 55
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Factory Changes Catchword:Temperature control with controller 1


presets (Save as) and pneumatic contol valve
(or similar control set-ups)
DsplCtr selected as only 1 Hardware extension
Linear outputs required
Prof-No 6
general Factory Changes
Baudr 9600 Parameter presets
RS485
/422

SlaveNr 1 1SpTypA fixed


Factory Changes 1Setp A 60.0°C

for 1st controller


Profile
1 controller
st presets 1SpTypB fixed
CtrlTyp Cont 1Setp B 60.0°C
ParSet 1 1T-Lowp 0.0s
Struct PID2 1Alarm- 0.0°C
Kr 17.0 1Alarm+ 0.0°C
Tn 220s Profile Factory Changes
Tv 0.1s 1 controller presets
st

Vd 5.0 ActValX PT100-1


1st parameter set

xT drive 90.0s ActValU NC


x Ts min 1.0s Trend NC
x T cycl 10.0s Disturb NC
Deadbd 0.0% ExtSetp NC
x Hyst 1.0% FeedBk NC
Ymin 0% R scale kalibr Rmin Rmax
Ymax 100% 2.Setp E6
Kw 1 2.Param NC
Struct PID2 Rel+On NC
Kr 17.0 Rel+Off NC
Tn 220 Rel-On NC
Tv 0.1 Rel-Off NC
Scale-F 200.0
2nd parameters set

Vd 5.0
xT drive 90.0s Scale-0 0
x Ts min 1.0s Dim °C
x T cycl 10.0s Profile Factory Changes
Deadbd 0.0% 1 controller presets
st

x Hyst 1.0% OutputY 1Lin 4>


Ymin 0% OutputX NC
Ymax 100% general Factory Changes
Kw 1 Parameter proposal
x Tz 0.0s Line 1 1Setp W
x Kz 0% 0% Line 2 1Out%Y
compensation
Disturbance

x Kz 25% 0% 2nd L1 1Tren D


x Kz 50% 0% 2nd L2 1ActV X
x Kz 75% 0% Lang deutsch
x Kz100% 0% x = not active at this CtrlTyp and Struct preset
Please use a copy of this sheet to document your settings and changes.

Page: 56 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Appendix D3: Programme entries table for setpoint programmes


Functional extension Setpoint programme required (factory preset > all values = 0)

SpPrgNo 1 2 3 4 5
Setp1
Time1
Setp2
Time2
Setp3
Time3
Setp4
Time4
Setp5
Time5
Setp6
Time6
Only if Functional extension Setpoint programme installed

Setp7
Time7
Setp8
Time8
Setp9
Time9
Setp10
Time10
Setp11
Time11
Setp12
Time12
Setp13
Time13
Setp14
Time14
Setp15
Time15
Setp16
Time16
Setp17
Time17
Setp18
Time18
Setp19
Time19
Setp20
Time20
Please use a copy of this sheet to document your settings and changes.

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 57
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Note

Page: 58 Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications
Pleiger Elektronik
GmbH & Co. KG

Note

Manual for 362MC Nr. 9360000120 Edition: 2/00 Subject to modifications Page: 59
PLEIGER ELECTRONICS 362MC

Controller 362MC Delivery configurations

Functional extension Hardware extension


Setpoint programme communication interface
RS 422

Special version Hardware extension Special adjustment


Functional extension
Power supply communication interface LED-Display with 3½ digits
Disturbance compensation
UE = 115 V-AC (Solution 0,1°C or 0,1%)
RS 485

Standard functions Power supply without


for 1 or 2 controllers UE = 230 V-AC communication interface
> 2-Point controller
> 3-Point controller
> 3-Point step controller
> Cascade step controller 1st Linear input Special version Special version
> Continuous controller PT100 1st Linear input PT100 1st Linear input 0(4)-20mA
Measuring range 0-200°C Measuring range 0-500°C Measuring range 0-100%

2nd Linear input


Controller 362MC PT100
Measuring range 0-200°C
Standard
configuration 3rd Linear input Special version
0(4)-20mA 3rd Linear input 0-10V
Measuring range 0-100% Measuring range 0-100%

Service interface 4th Linear input


RS 232 resistance input
Measuring range 0-200R

Alarm relais 6 x Binary inputs Special version


1 x change contact as logical inputs for 6 x Binary inputs for
floating floating contacts 24 V-DC signals

1st relay set with


UE = 230/115 V-AC without without
connected contacts 2nd relay set Linear outputs

Special version Hardware extension Hardware extension Controller 362MC


1st relay set with 2nd relay set with UE = Linear outputs
floating contacts 230/115V-AC-contacts 2 x 0(4)-20mA special configurations
and extensions
Hardware extension Hardware extension
2nd relay set with UE = Linear outputs (additional configurations
floating contacts 2 x 0-10V on request)

Your FAX-Request for the offer to 0049- 23 24 / 3 98- 3 89

Name Position

Company Telephone No.

Fax No.

No. of pieces Date for delivery Comment

If you need special versions or extensions in addition to the


standard, please mark the -squares obove.
Pleiger Elektronik
PL 0.00.6-98.14.00-06_en GmbH & Co. KG

Catchword: Basic temperature control with controller 1 (or similar control set-ups)
Factory Changes (also usual for change a 362-D, 0-200°C without
presets (Save as) trend compensation against a 362MC controller)
DsplCtr selected as only 1
Prof-No 1
RS485

Baudr 9600
/422

SlaveNo 1 Factory Changes


general Param. presets
Factory Changes 1SpTypA fixed

for 1st controller


st
Profile 1 controller presets 1Setp A 60.0°C
CtrlTyp Step 1SpTypB fixed
ParSet 1 1Setp B 60.0°C 80.0 °C
Struct PID 1T-Lowp 0.0s
Kr 10.0 1Alarm- 0.0°C
Tn 150s 1Alarm+ 0.0°C
Tv 0.1s Factory Changes
1st parameter set

st
Vd 1.0 Profile 1 contr. presets
T drive 90.0s ActValX PT100-1
Ts min 1.0s ActValU NC
T cycl 10.0s Trend NC
Deadbd 0.0% Disturb NC
Hyst 1.0% ExtSetp NC
Ymin 0% FeedBk Resist
Ymax 100% R scale kalibr Rmin Rmax
Kw 1 2.Setp E6
Struct PID 2.Param E5
Kr 10.0 Rel+On E4
Tn 150s Rel+Off E3
Tv 0.1s Rel-On E2
2nd parameters set

Vd 1.0 Rel-Off E1
T drive 90.0s Scale-F 200.0
Ts min 1.0s Scale-0 0
T cycl 10.0s Dim °C
Deadbd 0.0% Factory Changes
Hyst 1.0% Profile 1stcontr. presets
Ymin 0% OutputY 1Relais
Ymax 100% OutputX NC
Kw 1 Factory Changes
general Param. presets
Tz 0.0s Line 1 1Setp W
compensation
Disturbance

Kz 0% 0% Line 2 1Feed+Y
Kz 25% 0% 2nd L1 1Tren D
Kz 50% 0% 2nd L2 1ActV X
Kz 75% 0% Lang deutsch
Kz100% 0% = not active at this CtrlTyp and Struct preset

Please use a copy of this sheet to document your settings and changes.

Profiles for 362MC Version 2.11e Edition: 3/02 Subject to modifications Page: 1
Electrical Equipment C5.05.05.10.30.30
-

M32

Electrical Equipment

en / 19.04.2011 FD045434 1/209


         
2IIHQGHUVZLOOEHKHOGOLDEOHIRUWKHSD\PHQWRIGDPDJHV$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHGLQWKHHYHQWRIWKHJUDQWRIDSDWHQWXWLOLW\PRGHORURUQDPHQWDOGHVLJQUHJLVWUDWLRQ F &DWHUSLOODU0RWRUHQ*PE+ &R.*

$GGUHVV

&DWHUSLOODU0RWRUHQ
)DOFNHQVWHLQHU6WUDVVH
'.LHO
7HO  
)D[   *PE+ &R.*
7KHFRS\LQJGLVWULEXWLRQDQGXWLOL]DWLRQRIWKLVGRFXPHQWDVZHOODVWKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQRILWVFRQWHQWVWRRWKHUZLWKRXWH[SUHVVHGDXWKRULVDWLRQLVSURKLELWHG

0DULQH(TXLSPHQW  ((48,30(17(1*,1(

'UDZLQJ1R  $

3URMHFW3DUW3ODQW  &21752/ 021,725,1*

(QJLQH7\SH  0D.',(6(/(1*,1(;0&

.LQGRI3URSXOVLRQ  0$,1(1*,1(&33

5HVSRQVLEOHIRU3URMHFW  %HKQNHQ 6WDWH  

&UHDWHGWKH  
&KDQJHGRQWKH   IURP $EEUHYLDWLRQ  0=/ 1XPEHURI3DJHV  


 '$7(  &$7(53,//$502725(1 3$*( 
5
((48,30(17(1*,1( $  2) 
86(5 0=/
*PE+ &R.* 7,7/(6+((7
&+(&. %HKQNHQ &DWHUSLOODU&RQILGHQWLDO *5((1
&21752/ 021,725,1* 3$*( 
&+$1*( '$7( 1$0( 67$1' ),567 &5($7(')25 &5($7('%<
7KHFRS\LQJGLVWULEXWLRQDQGXWLOL]DWLRQRIWKLVGRFXPHQWDVZHOODVWKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQRILWVFRQWHQWVWRRWKHUZLWKRXWH[SUHVVHGDXWKRULVDWLRQLVSURKLELWHG
2IIHQGHUVZLOOEHKHOGOLDEOHIRUWKHSD\PHQWRIGDPDJHV$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHGLQWKHHYHQWRIWKHJUDQWRIDSDWHQWXWLOLW\PRGHORURUQDPHQWDOGHVLJQUHJLVWUDWLRQ F &DWHUSLOODU0RWRUHQ*PE+ &R.*

&+$1*(


67$7(

'$7(

'$7(

1$0(


86(5
'$7(

67$1'
&+(&.
0=/
%HKQNHQ



),567
5(9,6,21'(6&5,37,21

*PE+ &R.*
&DWHUSLOODU&RQILGHQWLDO *5((1


&$7(53,//$502725(1

&5($7(')25
5


&5($7('%<
((48,30(17(1*,1(


5(9,6,2167$7(

5(9,6,2167$7(



$


&21752/ 021,725,1*

5(9,625


3$*( 
2)

3$*( 

         
2IIHQGHUVZLOOEHKHOGOLDEOHIRUWKHSD\PHQWRIGDPDJHV$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHGLQWKHHYHQWRIWKHJUDQWRIDSDWHQWXWLOLW\PRGHORURUQDPHQWDOGHVLJQUHJLVWUDWLRQ F &DWHUSLOODU0RWRUHQ*PE+ &R.*

3$*( '(9,&( /2&$7 6+((7 '(6,*1$7,21 5(9 '$7(

  7,7/(6+((7 

  5(9,6,2167$7( 

  &217(176 

  &217(176 

  &217(176 
7KHFRS\LQJGLVWULEXWLRQDQGXWLOL]DWLRQRIWKLVGRFXPHQWDVZHOODVWKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQRILWVFRQWHQWVWRRWKHUZLWKRXWH[SUHVVHGDXWKRULVDWLRQLVSURKLELWHG

  &217(176 

  &217(176 

  &217(176 

  &217(176 

 +5  H3/$1(/(&75,&$/'2&80(17$7,21+2:725($' 

 $ $ *(1(5$/9,(:2)'(9,&( 

 $ $ &$%/,1*%<7+(<$5'*(1(5$/9,(: 

 $  785%2&+$5*(5530,1',&$725)52176,'(9,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  67$57$,535(6685(,1',&$725)52176,'(9,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  (1*,1(63((',1',&$725)52176,'(9,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  %$55,1*(48,3023(5$7,1*3$1(/6:,7&+%2;9,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  (0(5*(1&<6723386+%877216,'(9,(:7239,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  5306:,7&+81,7)52176,'(9,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  3527(&7,216<67(0)52179,(:7239,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  7(03(5$785(&21752//(5)52176,'(9,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  &21752/3$1(/)52179,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  &21752/3$1(/7(50,1$/675,3;,167$//'1R$B 

 $  &21752/3$1(/)52179,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  &21752/3$1(/7(50,1$/675,3;,167$//'1R$B 

 $  3527(&7,213$1(/)52179,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  3527(&7,213$1(/7(50,1$/6675,3,167$//'1R$B 

 $  7(03(5$785(6(16256,'(9,(:7239,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  35(6685(6:,7&+)52176,'(9,(:,167$//'1R$ 

 $  0$67(563(('6(16253,&.83)52176,'(9,(:,167$//=1R$ 

 $  &211(&7,21%2;)52176,'(9,(:,167$//=1R$$ 

 
 '$7(  &$7(53,//$502725(1 3$*( 
5
((48,30(17(1*,1( $  2) 
86(5 0=/
*PE+ &R.* &217(176
&+(&. %HKQNHQ &DWHUSLOODU&RQILGHQWLDO *5((1
&21752/ 021,725,1* 3$*( 
&+$1*( '$7( 1$0( 67$1' ),567 &5($7(')25 &5($7('%<
         
2IIHQGHUVZLOOEHKHOGOLDEOHIRUWKHSD\PHQWRIGDPDJHV$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHGLQWKHHYHQWRIWKHJUDQWRIDSDWHQWXWLOLW\PRGHORURUQDPHQWDOGHVLJQUHJLVWUDWLRQ F &DWHUSLOODU0RWRUHQ*PE+ &R.*

3$*( '(9,&( /2&$7 6+((7 '(6,*1$7,21 5(9 '$7(

 $  )&7&21752/&$%,1(7,167$//'1R$ 

 $  '28%/(*29(51255(,167$//'1R$ 

 $  

 $  )81&7,21$/',$*5$0 

 $  '(9,&($55$1*(0(17&21752/3$1(/(1*,1( 
7KHFRS\LQJGLVWULEXWLRQDQGXWLOL]DWLRQRIWKLVGRFXPHQWDVZHOODVWKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQRILWVFRQWHQWVWRRWKHUZLWKRXWH[SUHVVHGDXWKRULVDWLRQLVSURKLELWHG

 $  6(16256$&78$7256$55$1*(0(17(1*,1(*(1(5$/9,(: 

 $  6(16256$&78$7256$55$1*(0(17(1*,1(*(1(5$/9,(: 

 $  29(59,(:0($685,1*32,17(1*,1( 

 $  -81&7,21%2;35(6685(6:,7&+3/$7((1*,1( 

 $  -81&7,21%2;*(1(5$/9,(: 

 836 /  81,17(55837,%/(32:(56833/<6(1625,&683(59,6,21 

 836 /  81,17(55837,%/(32:(56833/<23(5$7,1*&21752/ 

 836 /  81,17(55837,%/(32:(56833/<23(5$7,1*&21752/ 

 -% (  %8602'8/(6-81&7,21%2; 

 -% (  6(1625,&3,&.83(1*,1(63(('-81&7,21%2;5306:,7&+81,7 

 -% (  6(1625,&7(03(5$785(6(16256-81&7,21%2;3527(&7,216<67(0 

 -% (  &5$1.&$6(2,/0,67'(7(&72567239$/9(-81&7,21%2;3527(&7,216<67(0 

 -% (  6(1625,&1,9($86(1625-81&7,21%2;$/$506<67(0 

 -% (  6(1625,&-81&7,21%2;2,/'(7(&725 

 -% (  6(1625,&7(03(5$785(6(16256-81&7,21%2;$/$506<67(0 

 -% (  6(1625,&35(6685(6:,7&+-81&7,21%2;3803&21752/$/$50 

 -% (  6(1625,&35(6685(6:,7&+-81&7,21%2;3527(&7,216<67(0 

 -% (  6(1625,&35(6685(6(16256-81&7,21%2;$/$506<67(0 

 -% (  6(1625,&35(6685(6:,7&+-81&7,21%2;568$/$506<67(0 

 -% (  6(1625,&785%2&+$5*(5530,1',&$7,21(1*,1(785%,1(-81&7,21%2; 

 -% (  (1,*,1(683(59,6,217(50,1$/%2; 

 -% (  %8602'8/(6-81&7,21%2; 

 -% (  6(1625,&7+(502&283/(-81&7,21%2;(;+$867*$67(03(5$785(6<67(0 

 -% (  6(1625,&7+(502&283/(-81&7,21%2;(;+$867*$67(03(5$785(6<67(0 

 -% (  6(1625,&7+(502&283/(&+$5*($,57(03(5$785(&21752/-81&7,21%2;7& 

 
 '$7(  &$7(53,//$502725(1 3$*( 
5
((48,30(17(1*,1( $  2) 
86(5 0=/
*PE+ &R.* &217(176
&+(&. %HKQNHQ &DWHUSLOODU&RQILGHQWLDO *5((1
&21752/ 021,725,1* 3$*( 
&+$1*( '$7( 1$0( 67$1' ),567 &5($7(')25 &5($7('%<
         
2IIHQGHUVZLOOEHKHOGOLDEOHIRUWKHSD\PHQWRIGDPDJHV$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHGLQWKHHYHQWRIWKHJUDQWRIDSDWHQWXWLOLW\PRGHORURUQDPHQWDOGHVLJQUHJLVWUDWLRQ F &DWHUSLOODU0RWRUHQ*PE+ &R.*

3$*( '(9,&( /2&$7 6+((7 '(6,*1$7,21 5(9 '$7(

 -% (  67$57672381,7-81&7,21%2; 

 -% (  67$57672381,7-81&7,21%2; 

 -% (  67$57672381,7%,67$%/(5(/$<6-81&7,21%2; 

 -% (  ,138762873876-81&7,21%2; 

 -% (  $&78$7253,&.83-81&7,21%2; 


7KHFRS\LQJGLVWULEXWLRQDQGXWLOL]DWLRQRIWKLVGRFXPHQWDVZHOODVWKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQRILWVFRQWHQWVWRRWKHUZLWKRXWH[SUHVVHGDXWKRULVDWLRQLVSURKLELWHG

 -% (  67$57672381,7-81&7,21%2; 

 -% (  67$57672381,7-81&7,21%2;7(50,1$/6(7;; 

 &3 (  /2&$/&21752/3$1(/ 

 &3 (  /2&$/&21752/3$1(/ 

 &3 (  6(1625,&7+(502&283/(/2&$/,1',&$7,213&21752/3$1(/ 

 &3 (  6(1625,&7+(502&283/(/2&$/,1',&$7,213&21752/3$1(/ 

 &3 (  6(1625,&7+(502&283/(/2&$/,1',&$7,213&21752/3$1(/ 

 &3 (&  &21752/3$1(/(1*,1(&21752/ 

 &3 (&  &21752/3$1(/(1*,1(&21752/ 

 &3 (&  &21752/3$1(/(1*,1(&21752/ 

 &3 (&  &21752/3$1(/(1*,1(&21752/ 

 &3 (&  &21752/3$1(/(1*,1(&21752/ 

 &3 %5  &21752/3$1(/%5,'*( 

 &3 %5  &21752/3$1(/%5,'*( 

 568 (&  )((',1*3/8*,1&$5'6$$5306:,7&+81,7 

 568 (&  3/8*,1&$5'6$$$5306:,7&+81,7 

 568 (&  3,&.83(1*,1(63((':25.,1*+2850(7(55306:,7&+81,7$ 

 568 (&  %,1$5<28738763/8*,1&$5'6$$5306:,7&+81,7 

 568 (&  $1$/2*8(28738763/8*,1&$5'6$$$$5306:,7&+81,7 

 568 (&  %,1$5<28738763/8*,1&$5'6$$5306:,7&+81,7 

 568 (&  5306:,7&+32,1763/8*,1&$5'6$$$5306:,7&+81,7 

 568 (&  %,1$5<28738763/8*,1&$5'6$5306:,7&+81,7 

 568 (&  %,1$5<28738763/8*,1&$5'6$$5306:,7&+81,7 

 568 (&  )8(/75$160,77(5)8(/5$&.326,7,215306:,7&+81,7$ 

 568 (&  2873876)8(/5$&.326,7,215306:,7&+81,7$ 

 
 '$7(  &$7(53,//$502725(1 3$*( 
5
((48,30(17(1*,1( $  2) 
86(5 0=/
*PE+ &R.* &217(176
&+(&. %HKQNHQ &DWHUSLOODU&RQILGHQWLDO *5((1
&21752/ 021,725,1* 3$*( 
&+$1*( '$7( 1$0( 67$1' ),567 &5($7(')25 &5($7('%<
         
2IIHQGHUVZLOOEHKHOGOLDEOHIRUWKHSD\PHQWRIGDPDJHV$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHGLQWKHHYHQWRIWKHJUDQWRIDSDWHQWXWLOLW\PRGHORURUQDPHQWDOGHVLJQUHJLVWUDWLRQ F &DWHUSLOODU0RWRUHQ*PE+ &R.*

3$*( '(9,&( /2&$7 6+((7 '(6,*1$7,21 5(9 '$7(

 568 (&  63$5(7(50,1$/6;;5306:,7&+81,7 

 6)6 (&  )(('&21752/,1',&$7,21)(('(0(5*(1&<67233527(&7,216<67(0$$ 

 6)6 (&  67$57,1*,17(5/2&.3527(&7,216<67(0 

 6)6 (&  /2$'5('8&7,213527(&7,216<67(0 

 6)6 (&  67$57,1*,17(5/2&.6+87'2:13527(&7,216<67(0 


7KHFRS\LQJGLVWULEXWLRQDQGXWLOL]DWLRQRIWKLVGRFXPHQWDVZHOODVWKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQRILWVFRQWHQWVWRRWKHUZLWKRXWH[SUHVVHGDXWKRULVDWLRQLVSURKLELWHG

 6)6 (&  6+87'2:129(55,'(3527(&7,216<67(0 

 6)6 (&  0$18$/67235(6(73527(&7,216<67(0 

 6)6 (&  6+87'2:1(0(5*(1&<6723:,5(%5($.021,725,1*3527(&7,216<67(0$ 

 6)6 (&  6+87'2:10$18$/67235(/$<&$5'5('8&7,213527(&7,216<67(0$ 

 6)6 (&  /2&$/,1',&$7,213/8*,1&$5'6$$$3527(&7,216<67(0 

 6)6 (&  /2&$/,1',&$7,213/8*,1&$5'6$$$3527(&7,216<67(0 

 6)6 (&  5(027(,1',&$7,21(0(5*(1&<0$18$/67233527(&7,216<67(0 

 6)6 (&  287387&2//(&7,1*)$,/85(3527(&7,216<67(0 

 6)6 (&  28738765(027(,1',&$7,2167$57,1*,17(5/2&.3527(&7,216<67(0$ 

 6)6 (&  28738765(027(,1',&$7,215('8&7,213527(&7,216<67(0$ 

 6)6 (&  5(027(,1',&$7,215('8&7,216+87'2:13527(&7,216<67(0$ 

 6)6 (&  28738765(027(,1',&$7,216+87'2:13527(&7,216<67(0$ 

 6)6 (&  28738765('8&7,21$8720$7,&0$18$/67233527(&7,216<67(0$ 

 6)6 (&  63$5(7(50,1$/6;;;3527(&7,216<67(0 

 33 %5  3527(&7,213$1(/%5,'*( 

 33 %5  3527(&7,213$1(/%5,'*( 

 7& (&  &+$5*($,57(03(5$785(&21752//(5 

 7& (&  )5(6+:$7(57(03(5$785(+77(03(5$785(&21752//(5 

 7& (&  )5(6+:$7(57(03(5$785(/77(03(5$785(&21752//(5 

 7& (&  7(50,1$/675,36$7027259$/9(67(03(5$785(&21752//(5 

 %(4 (  %$55,1*(48,30(17:,7+23(5$7,1*3$1(/(1*,1( 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 
 '$7(  &$7(53,//$502725(1 3$*( 
5
((48,30(17(1*,1( $  2) 
86(5 0=/
*PE+ &R.* &217(176
&+(&. %HKQNHQ &DWHUSLOODU&RQILGHQWLDO *5((1
&21752/ 021,725,1* 3$*( 
&+$1*( '$7( 1$0( 67$1' ),567 &5($7(')25 &5($7('%<
         
2IIHQGHUVZLOOEHKHOGOLDEOHIRUWKHSD\PHQWRIGDPDJHV$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHGLQWKHHYHQWRIWKHJUDQWRIDSDWHQWXWLOLW\PRGHORURUQDPHQWDOGHVLJQUHJLVWUDWLRQ F &DWHUSLOODU0RWRUHQ*PE+ &R.*

3$*( '(9,&( /2&$7 6+((7 '(6,*1$7,21 5(9 '$7(

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 


7KHFRS\LQJGLVWULEXWLRQDQGXWLOL]DWLRQRIWKLVGRFXPHQWDVZHOODVWKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQRILWVFRQWHQWVWRRWKHUZLWKRXWH[SUHVVHGDXWKRULVDWLRQLVSURKLELWHG

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 (* (&  (/(&7521,&*29(51255(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 )&7 (  '&6833/< 

 )&7 (  3/&,13876)&7&21752/(1*,1(&21752/ 

 )&7 (  3/&,138762873876)&7&21752/(1*,1(&21752/ 

 )&7 (  3/&$1$/28*(,13876)&7&21752/(1*,1(&21752/ 

 )&7 (  3/&2873876)&7&21752/(1*,1(&21752/ 

 )&7 (  3/&2873876)&7&21752/(1*,1(&21752/ 

 )&7 (  3/&2873876)&7&21752/(1*,1(&21752/ 

 )&7 (  3/&$1$/28*(,13876)&7&21752/(1*,1(&21752/ 

 %;  7(50,1$/675,3'(),1,7,21 

 %  &$%/(29(59,(: 

 %  &$%/(29(59,(: 

 %  &$%/(29(59,(: 

 %  &$%/(29(59,(: 

 %  &$%/(29(59,(: 

 
 '$7(  &$7(53,//$502725(1 3$*( 
5
((48,30(17(1*,1( $  2) 
86(5 0=/
*PE+ &R.* &217(176
&+(&. %HKQNHQ &DWHUSLOODU&RQILGHQWLDO *5((1
&21752/ 021,725,1* 3$*( 
&+$1*( '$7( 1$0( 67$1' ),567 &5($7(')25 &5($7('%<
         
2IIHQGHUVZLOOEHKHOGOLDEOHIRUWKHSD\PHQWRIGDPDJHV$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHGLQWKHHYHQWRIWKHJUDQWRIDSDWHQWXWLOLW\PRGHORURUQDPHQWDOGHVLJQUHJLVWUDWLRQ F &DWHUSLOODU0RWRUHQ*PE+ &R.*

3$*( '(9,&( /2&$7 6+((7 '(6,*1$7,21 5(9 '$7(

 %  &$%/(29(59,(: 

 %  &$%/(29(59,(: 

 %  &$%/(29(59,(: 

 %6 (  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&)&7&21752/ 

 %6 (  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&)&7&21752/ 


7KHFRS\LQJGLVWULEXWLRQDQGXWLOL]DWLRQRIWKLVGRFXPHQWDVZHOODVWKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQRILWVFRQWHQWVWRRWKHUZLWKRXWH[SUHVVHGDXWKRULVDWLRQLVSURKLELWHG

 %6 (  7(50,1$/6(77(50,1$/%2; 

 %6 (  7(50,1$/6(77(50,1$/%2; 

 %6 (  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&(1*,1(683(59,6,21-81&7,21%2; 

 %6 (  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&(1*,1(683(59,6,21-81&7,21%2; 

 %6 (  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&(1*,1(683(59,6,21-81&7,21%2; 

 %6 (  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&530,1',&$7,21785%2&+$5*(5(1*,1(-81&7,21%2; 

 %6 (  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&(;+$867*$67(03(5$785(-81&7,21%2; 

 %6 (  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&23(5$7,1*&21752/-81&7,21%2; 

 %6 (  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&23(5$7,1*&21752/-81&7,21%2; 

 %6 (  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&23(5$7,1*&21752/-81&7,21%2; 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5306:,7&+81,7 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5306:,7&+81,7 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5306:,7&+81,7 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5306:,7&+81,7 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&3527(&7,216<67(0 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&3527(&7,216<67(0 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&3527(&7,216<67(0 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&3527(&7,216<67(0 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&3527(&7,216<67(0 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&3527(&7,216<67(0 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&3527(&7,216<67(0 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&3527(&7,216<67(0 

 %6 (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&3527(&7,216<67(0 

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&&21752/3$1(/ 

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&&21752/3$1(/ 

 
 '$7(  &$7(53,//$502725(1 3$*( 
5
((48,30(17(1*,1( $  2) 
86(5 0=/
*PE+ &R.* &217(176
&+(&. %HKQNHQ &DWHUSLOODU&RQILGHQWLDO *5((1
&21752/ 021,725,1* 3$*( 
&+$1*( '$7( 1$0( 67$1' ),567 &5($7(')25 &5($7('%<
         
2IIHQGHUVZLOOEHKHOGOLDEOHIRUWKHSD\PHQWRIGDPDJHV$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHGLQWKHHYHQWRIWKHJUDQWRIDSDWHQWXWLOLW\PRGHORURUQDPHQWDOGHVLJQUHJLVWUDWLRQ F &DWHUSLOODU0RWRUHQ*PE+ &R.*

3$*( '(9,&( /2&$7 6+((7 '(6,*1$7,21 5(9 '$7(

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&&21752/3$1(/ 

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&&21752/3$1(/ 

 % %5  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&&21752/3$1(/ 

 % %5  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&&21752/3$1(/ 

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5(*8/$7(856(8523$ 


7KHFRS\LQJGLVWULEXWLRQDQGXWLOL]DWLRQRIWKLVGRFXPHQWDVZHOODVWKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQRILWVFRQWHQWVWRRWKHUZLWKRXWH[SUHVVHGDXWKRULVDWLRQLVSURKLELWHG

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5(*8/$7(856(8523$ 

 % (&  ;7(50,1$/675,39'&5(*8/$7(856(8523$